JP6521333B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachinko machine") and a drum-type gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachislot machine").

  Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that generates a big hit gaming state when a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to win based on the game ball having won the starting opening, and the lottery result is a win. In this big hit game state, it is possible to obtain a large number of winning balls in a short time by opening the big winning opening as a winning opening which is normally closed and making the big winning opening win a game ball one after another. It is.

JP, 2013-48980, A

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, there is no change as compared with the conventionally used board, and there is a possibility that the amusement of the game may be lowered.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in game entertainment.

(Solution 1)
A game panel in which a game area is formed on the front,
A passage opening through which game balls flowing down the game area can pass;
A variable receiving port provided on the downstream side of the passage port and having a switching member capable of changing between an open state capable of receiving gaming balls and an unacceptable closed state ;
A common view variation display means for performing variation display of a normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the passage opening;
Switching member control means for controlling the switching member in the open state based on the fact that a specific result is derived as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol;
A specific passage through which the game ball, which has passed through the passage opening, reaches the variable receiving opening;
And state control means for controlling to a specific gaming state in which a short variation time shorter than normal is set as the variation time of the normal symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
The specific passage is configured such that the flow-down direction of the game ball flowing down is changeable in the front-back direction, and has a change portion that changes the flow-down direction,
At least the if it is controlled to a specific game state, said by the passage of the passage port as the game balls became opportunity to control the switching member to the open state, it flows down with the change by the change unit Configured to be receivable in the variable receiving port;
The passage opening, the changing unit, and the variable receiving opening are all provided in the right gaming area of the playing area, and all the passage opening, the changing unit, and the variable receiving opening are It is characterized in that it is configured as one unit member so as to be integrally attached to the game panel .

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of the outer frame which comprises a pachinko machine, a main body frame, a game board, and a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the removal | desorption structure of the upper shaft support bracket of a main body frame, and the upper support bracket of an outer frame. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper-support metal fitting of an outer frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the figure of (A) from the downward direction. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was looked after. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base substrate cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right side decoration unit and looked at it after. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was looked after. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of the left side decoration unit by photography. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and observed the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of a plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of a plate unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit and was seen after. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected in the site | part of the ball rental unit of the plate unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which the press operation part in the operation unit was pushed. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle apparatus in a door frame, and was seen from the front, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle apparatus and was looked after. (A) It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fal cover unit in a door frame, and was seen from the front, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fal cover unit and was looked after. It is a front view shown in the state which removed the front cover of the foul cover unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball | bowl feed unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and viewed from the rear. (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member seen from the front, (D) These are explanatory drawings which show the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnects and shows a door frame in the approximate center of the up-down direction. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of a main body frame. It is a left side view of a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was looked after. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hit and fired device in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hit and fired device in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the award ball unit in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was looked after. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and it saw after it. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the delivery path, the delivery motor, and the delivery rotary body in a winning ball apparatus. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution passage of the ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball | bowl outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball | bowl outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball | bowl outlet opening-and-closing unit in a main body frame, and the fal cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of a substrate unit in a main part frame. It is a rear perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was looked after. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board | substrate box in a board | substrate unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. (A) is a front view of a firing power supply substrate box, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and was seen from the back side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding door for a door frame and a sliding lever for a main frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the locking device and was looked after. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the sliding lever for door frames in the lock device, and the sliding lever for main body frames. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a fraud control member in a lock device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen after. (A) is a front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko machine, (B) is a front view which shows the other form of a function display unit. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board using the gaming panel of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 etc. disassembled and viewed from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board which looked at FIG. 103 later. FIG. 140 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board using the front component of embodiment different from the example of FIG. 103 grade | etc., And was seen from the front. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the game board when FIG. 106 is viewed later. It is a fragmentary sectional view showing the crime prevention structure in the axial support side of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the state which accommodated the game board in the main body frame. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board diagonally from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the perspective view which disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonal back. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the game board cut at an approximate center in the vertical direction and viewed from the upper side. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the game board cut at the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right side. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at an attacker unit from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attacking unit and was seen after. It is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit of the table unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the starting mouth unit of the table unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the starting opening unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and looked at the starting opening unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front side unit of the front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front side unit of the front unit from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the front side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front side unit and was looked after. It is a front view of the center part of a front unit. It is the perspective view which looked at center goods from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at a center character later. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center part into every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center part into every main member and was looked after. It is the perspective view which looked at the distribution member of center goods from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the distribution member of center goods after. It is front sectional drawing which shows the left route in center goods with a part of warp passage. It is a perspective view which shows the lower warp passage member and stage member in center goods. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd addition unit of the center goods from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd attachment unit from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd attacking unit of center goods, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd attacking unit of center goods, and was seen after. (A) It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd starting opening unit of center goods from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd starting opening unit of the center goods from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd starting opening unit of center goods, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd starting opening unit of center goods, and was seen after. (A) is front sectional drawing which shows the right route in center goods, (b) is BB sectional drawing in (a). (A) is front sectional drawing which expands and shows the principal part of the right route when the 2nd starting opening of a center thing is in an open state, (b) is cut in the part of the 2nd starting opening in (a) Side cross-sectional view. It is front sectional drawing which expands and shows the principal part of the right route when the 2nd big winning opening in a center character is open. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit into every main component, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit into main component members, and was seen after. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a flow chart showing the procedure of the main process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, (b) is an interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a big hit determination table used for lottery processing for a big hit, (B) is a reach determination table used for lottery processing for reach, and (C) is a lottery processing for types of big hit Symbol determination table used for It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special gate part passage processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol process processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the submain process performed by periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about 16 ms regular processing performed by periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a timing chart in the case where fate branching rendition is performed based on 16R probability variation big hit. It is a timing chart in the case where fate branching rendition is performed based on big hit other than 16R probability variation big hit. It is a specific effect image in the liquid crystal display device when the fate branching effect is performed. It is a specific effect image in the liquid crystal display device when the fate branching effect is performed. It is a specific effect image in the liquid crystal display device when the fate branching effect is performed. It is a timing chart in, when performing fate selection chance presentation. It is a specific effect image on the liquid crystal display device when the fate selection chance effect is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the payment presentation execution processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the prize ball processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main frame is opened to an outer frame of a pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened to the main frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Furthermore, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of an outer frame, a main frame, a game board, and a door frame constituting a pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, a main frame, and a game board constituting a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

  1 to 7, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the outer frame 2 installed on the island facility (not shown) of the game hall and the outer frame 2 are pivotably supported openably at the front side. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3 and a game area 1100 which is fixedly attached to the main body frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball as a game medium is struck, and the front of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 It has the door frame 5 pivotally supported openably and closably with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to close from the side. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a space below the game window 101 for storing game balls. A tray-like upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 5 are provided.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in the drawings, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are formed in vertically long rectangular shapes respectively extending in the vertical direction in front view. The dimensions of the vertical width of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 with respect to the outer frame 2 are formed to be slightly short. The decorative cover 23 is attached to the front of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are arranged such that the upper ends thereof are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatable at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. It is supported, and the right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is moved forward with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  In front view, the pachinko machine 1 is configured such that a game area 1100 in which game balls are hit through the substantially circular game window 101 is exposed, and projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper dishes 301 and lower dishes 302 are arranged up and down. In the front lower right corner of the door frame 5, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed, and the player handles the handle device 500 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper tray 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the gaming balls in the upper plate 301 are driven into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 with a hitting strength according to the rotation angle, and it is possible to play a game.

  Although details will be described later, although the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by the transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, the player can view the inside of the game area 1100. By inserting a hand or the like, it is possible not to touch the game ball or the obstacle nail (not shown) in the game area 1100, various winning openings, features or the like. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, there are provided various control boards and a back cover 900 which is closed to cover the rear of the game board 4.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Furthermore, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment / detachment structure of the upper shaft support bracket of the main body frame and the upper support bracket of the outer frame. FIG. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting state of the lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a back view of the upper support fitting portion for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a back view of the upper support fitting portion for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the lateral direction, and left and right sides extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. The frame plates 12 and 13 and four connecting members 14 for connecting the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12 and 13 are provided. They are assembled in a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape) by connecting them. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, There is provided an engagement notch 15 which penetrates and is recessed to the left and right direction center side. A mounting step 10a recessed from the other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is supposed to be.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are light-weight metal molds (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is substantially flat, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. A protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extruding direction) is provided to enhance strength and rigidity (see FIGS. 9 and 108). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when installing the pachinko machine 1 on the island facility of the game hall, etc. While being able to easily hold the pachinko machine 1 as a finger grip, the design of the appearance can be enhanced. In addition, there are also drawings in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted for convenience.

  The connection member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 to be in the left-right direction. To the side frame plates 12 and 13 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 in the vertical direction to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and opposite to the vertical piece 18 It has a plate-like engagement piece 19 which can be inserted into and engaged with the engagement cutout portion 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 extending in the direction. In this example, the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively left-right asymmetrical The vertical pieces 18 are formed separately in the front and back direction. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively formed in symmetrical shapes. It is done.

  In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 abut on the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame are inserted into and engaged with the portion 15 by screwing predetermined screws into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19. It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state where the vertical piece 18 abuts on the upper inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13 and a predetermined screw The upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected by being screwed into the vertical piece 18. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state of being inserted into the projecting portion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is supposed to be. Furthermore, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state where the vertical piece 18 abuts on the lower inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13 and a predetermined screw The lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected by being screwed into the vertical piece 18, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 can be connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of this example is disposed to face the upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper support fitting 20 and fixed at a predetermined position inside the lower side frame 12 of the left side. Fixed on the front surface of the reinforcing bracket 22 and the reinforcing bracket 22 disposed so as to support the lower surface of the lower supporting bracket 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13. And a decorative cover 23. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be able to open and close.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projection piece 20b projecting forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a than the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion Support rod hole 20c notched to be bent from the right end near the front end in the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and the left side frame hanging downward from the left end of the fixed piece 20a and the support protruding piece 20b A plate-like hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) in contact with the outer side surface of the plate 12 and a hanging wall 20e continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hanging along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b (figure 14 and a stop drop 20f (see FIG. 15) which is continuous with the drop wall 20e and sloped inward at the inlet end of the support well 20c. A pivot pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook 20c of the upper support fitting 20. Further, the upper support fitting 20 is configured such that the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 can be connected by the fixed piece 20a and the depending fixed piece 20d.

  The upper support fitting 20 has the strength of the support protrusion 20b enhanced by the depending wall 20e depending from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b, and the details will be described later, but when viewed from the front, the support protrusion 20b The lock member 27 disposed on the back of the cover can be concealed so as not to be visible from the player side, and the appearance of the lock can be improved. In addition, a support hook 20c formed in the support projection piece 20b has a shape bent in a V shape so as to be inclined from the side on the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed (right side) toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the support weir 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a mounted on and fixed to the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projection 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a beyond the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from near the front end of the support projection 21c. And the support protrusion 21d. A main body frame support hole (not shown) formed in a main body frame support bracket 644 (see FIG. 66 etc.) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support projection 21 d of the lower support fitting 21. After inserting the support projection 21 d of the lower support fitting 21 into the main frame support hole of the main body frame support bracket 644 in the main body frame 3, the support pin 633 of the upper support block 630 of the main body frame 3. The main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported in an openable / closable manner easily by locking the support hole 20c.

  Further, in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, two closing plates 24 and 25 arranged at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction are attached and fixed inside the side frame plate 13 on the right side. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25 a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. See 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the lock device 1000 attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when the body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2. As described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it to one side, the engagement between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 is released. The main body frame 3 can be opened relative to the outer frame 2.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcement fitting 22. The guide plate 26 guides the main body frame 3 smoothly when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is exchangeably mounted and fixed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support protrusion 20b of the upper support fitting 20, and the rivet 28 supports the support protrusion 20b. It is pivotally supported rotatably. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a in the right direction from the stopper portion 27a protruding forward from the position supported by the rivet 28 and the position supported by the rivet 28 The operating portion 27b which protrudes, the elastic piece 27c which protrudes from the opposite side to the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and the front end of the stopper portion 27a And an arc-shaped end surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to be narrower than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as it is separated from the stopper portion 27a to the left.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (B) and FIG. 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27c is a hanging wall The stopper portion 27a is in contact with the inner side surface of 20e, and the stopper portion 27a closes a part of the support hole 20c bent in a V-shape, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is the deepest portion of the support hole 20c. The part is not closed, and a space into which the pivot pin 633 of the upper pivot bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed at the deepest part of the support pit 20c.

  In the supporting mechanism of the pivoting pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example, the pivoting pin 633 is inserted into the deepest portion of the support hook 20c and the tip side of the stopper portion 27a is the entrance end Normal (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f and it is not in a state of being in contact with the stop drooping portion 20f) In the pivotally supported state, the centers of the pivotal support pin 633 located at the deepest part of the support drill hole 20c formed by bending and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a are diagonally offset and opposed to each other. ing. And, in this normal support state, the support pin 633 supporting the heavy main body frame 3 is in a state of being in contact with the front end portion of the support hook hole 20 c. Since the load on the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is hardly applied, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27. Since the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is provided with an arc-shaped distal end surface 27d, when the operation portion 27b is turned to turn the lock member 27, the lock member 27 can be smoothly turned. It has become. Further, in the drawing, the arc center of the tip end surface 27d is taken as the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when an acting force F is applied in a direction in which the pivotal support pin 633 is pulled out along the slope of the support hook 20c formed in a U-shape and abuts on the circular arc tip surface 27d, the acting force F is A component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the end surface 27d) acting on the contact portion between the support pin 633 and the arc-shaped end surface 27d When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27), so the tip of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is supported Since the moment to rotate in the direction (clockwise direction in the figure) which is detached from the projecting piece 20b does not work, the pivot pin 633 is held between the tip of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and one inner surface of the support hook 20c. Hold the Therefore, even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 and elasticity formed integrally by synthetic resin It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c, and to prevent the shaft support pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if the end of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction (clockwise direction in the figure) that is released from the support projecting piece 20b by applying an unreasonable force, one side of the end of the stopper portion 27a Since it does not rotate in the direction in which it abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f and disengages further, the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b.

  In addition, even if the shape of the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or the tip of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 as well. Since the tip end side of the stopper portion 27a just contacts the stop hanging portion 20f even when the member 27 rotates, the applicant of the present invention has a point that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b. I have confirmed.

  The operation of the lock member 27 of this embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise of pivotally supporting the body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 so as to be able to open and close, lower support brackets in a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in the body frame shaft support bracket 644 (see FIG. 63) of the body frame 3 It is necessary that 21 support protrusions 21d be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the pivot pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook 20c. Then, when the pivot pin 633 reaches the deepest portion of the support hook 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the lock pin 27 is resilient because the pivot pin 633 does not abut the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a. The elastic force of the piece 27c urges it to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the entrance portion of the support hole 20c, and at the same time the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a Is opposed to the pivot pin 633 so that the pivot pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook 20c.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 16 (D), this state is held even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Then, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support hook 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projection 20b to turn the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 counterclockwise. By the rotation, the lock member 27 is rotated against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a is in a state of being retracted from the support wedge hole 20c. It can be removed from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main frame 3 is lifted by lifting the main frame support hole formed in the main frame support bracket 644 and the support projection 21 d of the lower support bracket 21 to thereby release the main frame 3 into the outer frame 2. Can be removed from the

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extrusion type material of aluminum alloy), when installing the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility arranged in a row, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical surface of the island Although such work is carried out by nailing the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nail can be made easy to strike, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily installed in the existing island facility. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are formed of a lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) as an extrusion-shaped material, it becomes possible to form a thinner wall while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame, When viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63 etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inner side of the side frame boards 12 and 13, the lateral width can be increased. Can be attached to the main unit frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  The upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are connected by the connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and fixed in a state in which the connecting member 14 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased. It is possible to make it a square shaped framework. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (peripheral surface) of the frame plate 10, 11, 12, 13, when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall not shown, adjacent devices (for example, It can be attached closely with the adjacent ball lending machine).

[1-2. Overall configuration of the door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided openably and closably on the front side of the main body frame 3 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right rear. Furthermore, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back.

  As illustrated, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a door frame having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly elongated circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, and the right side decoration unit 200 at the front of the door frame base unit 100 A left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery and an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100 are provided.

  Further, the door frame 5 penetrates the dish unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the dish unit 300 A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for performing a game ball driving operation, and a rear side of the door frame base unit 100 disposed behind the plate unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. And ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the fal cover unit 540, and mounted so as to close the game window 101 on the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. And a glass unit 590.

1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 28 shows a state of wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view expanding and showing.

  As illustrated, the door frame base unit 100 of this example is a door having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and which is penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a substantially oval shape which is vertically elongated. A frame base main body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 disposed on the front of the door frame base main body 110 on the lower end left and right sides of the game window 101, and a speaker for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110 A bracket 132 and a handle bracket 140 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base main body 110 and supporting the handle device 500 are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like on the outside of the side speaker 130 on the right side in front view. It further comprises a cover member 134 attached to the front of the door frame base body 110. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111 and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or removed. It has become.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 covers the lower portion of the game window 101 with a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. The security cover 180 to be attached, the glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the left side from the center in the horizontal direction ) Mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotational position of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 below the launch cover 191 A handle device relay substrate 192 relaying connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control substrate 4100 and a rear side of the handle device relay substrate 192 are covered. Door frame arranged on the opposite side to the rear cover (in rear view) with respect to the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192 etc. with the center in the left / right direction sandwiching the center of the rear cover A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base body 110, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a rear end surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 A wiring holding member 197 holding a part of a wiring cord 196 (see FIG. 28) for connecting the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side is provided.

  In the door frame base unit 100 of the present example, the overall rigidity is enhanced by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 in which metal sheet metal is assembled by rivets or the like on the rear side of the rectangular door frame base main body 110 made of synthetic resin. It has the strength which can fully support each decoration unit 200,240,280, the dish unit 300 grade | etc.,.

  The door frame base substrate 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 described later. It is connected to 4140 and includes an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs it to the speakers 130, 222, and 262. In this example, the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, the decoration substrates 430, 432 provided in the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 provided in the operation unit 400, the sensors 432a, 432b, The wiring cord 196 connecting the handle device relay board 192, the ball lending unit 360 of the dish unit 300, etc. to the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140 etc. The details are described later, but are held by the wire holding member 197 and extended backward, and the main side relay terminal board 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral side relay terminal board are described later. It is to be connected to 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically elongated frame shape as shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 etc. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the drawing, the game window 101 is formed in a smooth curve shape in which the left and right and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a linear shape extending left and right. ing. In addition, a rectangular notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the far cover unit 540 can be inserted through the pivoting side (left side in front view) on the lower inner peripheral edge of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110. Is formed. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101, and widths of left and right side sides are the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the pivoting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body 110 in a front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 disposed behind the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and the game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It is supposed to be.

  The door frame base main body 110 is disposed on the left and right outside of the lower side of the game window 101 in addition to the game window 101, and the speaker attachment portion 111 for attaching and fixing the side speakers 130 and the ball feed unit 580 are attached and fixed. The ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) and the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 penetrate in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position and the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301 of the tray unit 300 are sent to the ball feeding unit 580 A ball feed opening 113 for feeding, and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 by slanting obliquely so that the right (open side) end of the front disposed at the lower right corner in front view and bulging forward is retracted. A wire passage port 115 which penetrates in the longitudinal direction at a predetermined position of the handle attachment portion 114 and through which a wire from the handle device 500 can pass; Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base main body 110 has a relay board attachment portion 117 for attaching the handle device relay board 192 to the lower side in the ball feed unit attachment concave portion 112, and the door frame base main body 110 in rear view. Of the board attachment portion 118 disposed on the lower right side (axial support side) of the lower part for attaching the door frame base substrate 194 and the center of the lower end of the game window 101 closer to the center than the speaker attachment portion 111 And a security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 projecting rearward. Further, the door frame base main body 110 is recessed toward the front side substantially along the inner periphery of the game window 101 on the rear side, and the front edge of the glass unit 590 can come in contact with the glass unit support stepped portion 110 a It further includes two locking member mounting portions 110b that project rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery and rotatably support the glass unit locking member 190.

  Furthermore, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, there is provided a door frame protrusion 110c that protrudes backward from the lower side by a predetermined amount. This door frame protrusion 110c is an engagement groove 603 of the main frame 3 described later. It is supposed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked to the main body frame 3, and an incorrect tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Also, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from invading and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, there is provided a positioning projection 110d which protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower than the lock hole 116 in rear view and is fitted with the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions by fitting the positioning protrusion 110 d with the fitting groove 612.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided at its front surface with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the plate unit 300, etc. In addition, a large number of mounting holes are formed at appropriate positions for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like. In the door frame base main body 110, an attachment portion 110g for attaching the speaker bracket 132 to which the side speaker 130 is attached and an attachment hole 110h (see FIG. 18 etc.) for attaching the side speaker cover 338 are at appropriate positions. It is formed.

  Further, in the door frame base main body 110, the lower disc ball supply port 310g in the disc unit base 310 of the disc unit 300 described later between the ball feed unit attachment recess 112 and the board attachment portion 118 and At a position corresponding to the double ball outlet 544b, a rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided.

  Furthermore, the door frame base main body 110 is formed on the front side thereof above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111, and includes a shallow dish-shaped security concave portion 120 recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A crime prevention member 121 formed in a shallow box shape from the front side is inserted into the crime prevention recess 120. The crime prevention member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape in which the front side is opened by bending a metal plate. Thereby, in order to cheat the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is possible to make a hole by a thin drill or the like from the joining portion between the side decoration unit 200, 240 and the dish unit 300 as metal. It can be blocked by the crime prevention member 121, so that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

  Further, although the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is not shown in detail, the intersection of the central axes thereof is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1) forward from the center of the game area 1100 in front view It is obliquely fixed so as to be at the position of 5 m), and the sound can be most efficiently delivered to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the side speakers 130 are mainly configured to output middle-to-high range sounds, and are disposed at positions separated as far as possible from the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speakers 130, it is possible to output sounds with high stereo feeling.

  These side speakers 130 have their outer peripheries sandwiched by a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and the speaker attachment portion 111 of the door frame base main body 110 disposed on the rear side. It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base main body 110 from the front side by a predetermined screw.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape whose front side is opened as shown in FIG. 25 to FIG. 27 and the like. It has a step 195a recessed forward at a position slightly lower than the center of the. The wire holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195 a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28 etc., the wire holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape elongated in the lateral direction, and the cross section is formed in an I shape. It is formed of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three each in the upper and lower sides in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at the upper and lower ends. The wire holding member 197 has the end portion on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the assembled state of the door frame 5 in the vertical direction at the step portion 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. It is pivotally supported around the extended axis, and although the detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wire holding member 197 is rotated toward the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, the wire holding member 197 is It can be accommodated in the step portion 195 a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  The wire holding member 197 has a wire cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side, and a predetermined binding is formed in the holding holes 197a which are paired in the upper and lower direction. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction to close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3 It is pushed forward by the part, and it will rotate in the direction which approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thereby, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main frame 3 is free. The bend is large (sharp) near the end. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled backward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves in the direction of moving away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (the direction of the main body frame 3). Thereby, the wiring cord 196 folded at the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is expanded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being blocked by the wiring cord 196.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the end of the wire holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported is moved by the door frame base substrate cover 195 so that the free end moves to the main body frame 3 side. The main frame 3 is pivotally supported on the rear surface and held so that a part of the wiring cord 196 electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 does not move in the vertical direction. When opening and closing the door frame 5, the wiring cord 196 can be folded or unfolded in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent occurrence of problems (breaks in the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.) due to pinching or the like.

  Further, according to this embodiment, since the wire holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when a force is applied through the wire cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to prevent the vertical movement of the wiring cord 196, and to securely fold the wiring cord 196 in the lateral direction to prevent the occurrence of a failure.

  Furthermore, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a bridge is placed between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part of the wire is bridged by the wire holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wire cord 196 from hanging down even if the door frame 5 is opened and closed. The main control board 4100 as a main body side electric device, the peripheral control unit 4140, the payout control board 4110, etc. can be prevented from being caught and broken, or the door frame 5 can not be closed. And door-side electric devices as decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, speakers 130, 222, 262, lend Unit 360, the handle device 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of defective wiring cord 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  In addition, a part of the wiring cord 196 is held by the rotatable wiring holding member 197, and even when the wiring cord 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 rotates. Because the force can be released by doing this, it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 196 from being pulled, and a problem such as disconnection of the wiring cord 196 or disconnection of the connection connector may occur. It can be prevented. In addition, since a part of the wiring cord 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring cord 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates, the conventional one (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009) The wiring cord 196 does not slide as in the case of U.S. Pat. No. 2,213,675), and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 196 from being rubbed to cause problems such as electrical leakage and disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted through the through holding holes 197a arranged at a predetermined interval in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring cord 196 is held by the binding band 198. The binding band 198 holding 196 can be prevented from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and the wiring cord 196 together with the binding band 198 can be detached from the wiring holding member 197 It can be reliably prevented.

  Also, even if the wiring cord 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 at a position away from the side of the door frame 5, the wiring cord can be used by the wiring holding member 197 as described above. Since the wire cord 196 can be favorably prevented from hanging down when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding 196, the strength and rigidity of the pivotally supported side of the door frame 5 are enhanced. It can be set as the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5, and it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with the high crime prevention property with respect to a fraud.

  Furthermore, since the wire holding member 197 is provided with the protrusions projected at least along the wiring cord 196 from both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, the pair of protrusions and the plate surface of the wire holding member 197 The three sides of the wiring cord 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring cord 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wire holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wire holding member 197 can be enhanced, and the wire holding member 197 is prevented from being bent when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. The door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good condition.

  Further, the length from the proximal end to the distal end of the wire holding member 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the axial center of the door frame 5 to the axial center of the proximal end, and the extension of the main body frame 3 in the wiring cord 196 In the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the predetermined position is set to a position closer to the axial center of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197. A pantograph-like link is formed by the axial center of the member 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring cord 196 in the main frame 3 extends, so when opening and closing the door frame 5. The movement of the wiring holding member 197, the wiring cord 196, etc. can be made smooth and the opening and closing work can be facilitated, and the application of excessive force to the wiring cord 196 etc. Prevent problems from occurring Can. In addition, a pantograph link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion of the wiring cord 196 extending from the tip of the wire holding member 197 is folded back at the tip side along the wire holding member 197. Therefore, in the state where the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring cord 196 can be folded and compacted, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring cord 196 can be reduced.

  Further, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 pivotally supporting the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, A step portion 195 a capable of storing the wire holding member 197 is provided, and when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the step provided with the wire holding member 197 on the door frame base substrate cover 195 Since it is stored in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, and the door frame 5 can be easily closed. The wiring cord 196 can be compacted, and the wiring cord 196 can be prevented from being caught by another member, thereby preventing occurrence of a failure.

  Furthermore, the wiring cord 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wire holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (the door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring cord 196 can be made as small as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5, It is possible to reliably achieve the above effects. In addition, since the wire holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and there is no need to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 relatively. To make the pachinko machine 1 capable of holding the game board 4 having the larger game area 1100 and having the large game board 4 so as to strongly attract the interest of the player. it can.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 etc., the handlebar bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 extends from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 141 extending in the longitudinal direction to the shaft of the cylindrical portion 141 from the rear end. A plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding in the right-angled direction outward with respect to the annular flange portion 142 and the cylindrical portion 141 protruding in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141 A plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 are provided, which connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 to each other in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment portion 114 in the door frame base main body 110. Although not shown, the shaft of the cylindrical portion 141 substantially coincides with the wiring passage port 115 in a state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed in the position corresponding to the three groove parts 502a. Then, only when the three ridges 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other, the cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as to be incapable of relative rotation with respect to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 inclined at an angle so that the axis of the tube portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes to the front in a front view. The axis of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in the state is similarly inclined.

  Subsequently, as shown mainly in FIGS. 25 and 26, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110; A pivot support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 mounted along the back surface of the support side portion 110 of the support side, an open side reinforcement sheet metal 153 mounted along the back side of the open side end portion of the door frame base main body 110, and the door frame base main body 110 The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is attached along the lower side back surface of the game window 101, and they are mutually tightened with a screw or a rivet to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 25, this reinforcing unit 150 has an upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided in the upper and lower directions on the upper surface and at the upper and lower end portions of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 And a lower support portion 158 having an axial pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower shaft support sides of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 It is pivotally supported open and close freely.

  The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 is formed to have a predetermined width and substantially the same length as the lateral width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side edge of the long side edge A lower bent piece 159 bent forward (see FIG. 25) and an upper bent piece 160 bent forward on the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in a front view. And a vertically bent projecting piece 161 which is bent backward at a central portion of the upper long side edge and extended in the vertical direction. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is enhanced by the lower bending projection 159 and the upper bending projection 160 and the like. Further, the vertical bending and projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed to engage and engage with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5, the vertical bending protrusion 161 is engaged with the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 It is possible to regulate moving backward. In the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base main body 110 is formed.

  In addition, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 is provided with an open side outward bending projection 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154; It has an open side inner bent piece 164, and as shown in the figure, the open side inner bent piece 164 is formed to extend backward more than the open side outer bent piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 is provided on the lower rear side of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 to be in contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 described later. Further, the axially supporting reinforcing metal plate 152 is provided with a U-shaped axially supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166 which extends rearward at the outer end of the long side and opens at the outside of the axially supporting side (see FIG. See 108). In addition, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bending projections 167 that are bent backward on both sides of the long side.

  The axially supporting reinforcing metal plate 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported only at two upper and lower points of the upper and lower shaft supporting portions 156 and 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is enlarged. Although there is a possibility that it becomes easy to carry out an action, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of this example is provided with the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced. The support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. In addition, the front end piece 952b of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 described later is inserted in the U shape of the axially supported U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the axially supported reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. (See 108), it is possible to prevent the insertion of the tool, and to prevent only the pivotally supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 from being bent, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 25 and FIG. The crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent intrusion of the illegal tool to the game board 4, and as shown in the figure, the left and right are made of transparent synthetic resin. Is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing sheet metals 152 and 153, and is arced substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 at the upper side The contact recess 181 is formed, and the post-security projection piece 182 protrudes rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, on the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180, there are provided crime prevention rear end projecting pieces 183 projecting backward along the shape of the end. The rear end protrusion 183 on the right side (axial support side) in the rear view is extended to the rear more than the rear end protrusion 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention front protrusion 184 protruding along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and left and right outside the crime prevention front protrusion 184 And a U-shaped attachment elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end of the connector.

  The crime prevention cover 180 mounts the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in a front view to the crime prevention cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (axial support side) By being attached to the crime prevention cover attaching portion 364 of the unit 300, the door frame 5 can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. When the crime prevention cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, although the detailed illustration is omitted, the front crime prevention piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bending projection 161. In addition, when the door frame 5 is closed, the rear half of the pivot support side 182 is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 when the door frame 5 is closed, and the open side half is front It is in a state of being inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112 in the component 1110. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool tries to intrude into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, it is possible to prevent the intrusion by the post-security projection piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  In addition, since the crime prevention cover 180 can cover the front lower portion of the guiding passage of the hitting ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed by the back surface thereof. It is possible to prevent the striking of the hitting path against the glass plate 594 which flies or reverses the guide passage portion.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the outer periphery of the rear lower portion of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5 is covered with the crime prevention cover 180, so the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if you try to cheat inside the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) by inserting a highly flexible tool between them, the security cover 180 can prevent the intrusion of the tool, cheating It has become possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high safety against such as.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with the fitting portions 190 a rotatably fitted to the locking member mounting portions 110 b protruding rearward from the door frame base main body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking piece 592a of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 fixes a screw for securing the locking member to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base main body 110 passes through the fitting portion 190a. By doing this, it is rotatably supported with respect to the locking member mounting portion 110b.

  The locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a protrusion that protrudes rearward on the rear side, although detailed illustration is omitted, and this protrusion is rotated when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook for operation.

  Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. In addition, the handle device relay substrate cover 193 and the door frame base substrate cover 195 are respectively fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110. When the launch cover 191, the handle device relay substrate cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with one another. It is possible to cover the front surface of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 attached to the main body frame 3.

[1-2 B. Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 29 to FIG. FIG. 29A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as viewed from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as it is disassembled and seen afterward.

  The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating the right side half of the front periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in the front view, as shown in the figure. While being formed in circular arc shape along, the outer side is formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces, and a side inner lens 212 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210. The right side upper decoration substrate 214 is disposed on the upper side from the approximate center in the vertical direction on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface; The lower side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 disposed on the lower surface of the lens 212 from the approximate center of the vertical direction and on the surface of which the plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) are mounted Right-handed rhinoceros attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to cover the right side upper decoration substrate 214 The upper decoration substrate cover 218 and the right side lower decoration substrate cover 220 attached to the side lens 210 and the side decoration frame 202 so as to cover the back side of the right side lower decoration substrate 216 and to sandwich the right side lower decoration substrate 216 ing.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is disposed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 on the front of the side lens 210 and the side outer cover 202 attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 and the side lens 210 A plurality of side flash lenses 204 radially extending from the center, a side upper inner lens 206 disposed between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side upper inner lens 206 An inner lens bracket 208 for attachment to the upper portion 212 and an upper right speaker 222 for attachment to the upper side inner lens 206 are provided.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, the side outer cover 202, the side flash lens 204, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are formed of translucent members. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed on the surface of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a and 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the upper right side decoration substrate 214 and the lower right side decoration substrate 216 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the upper side inner lens 206. 216a, 216b, etc. can not be clearly viewed from the player side. In addition, the front surface of the right upper side decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 is white, and the light such as the mounted LEDs 214 a, 214 b, 216 a and 216 b efficiently decorates the right side decoration unit 200. While the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit, the decorative boards 214 and 216 are not noticeable. The upper right upper decoration substrate 214 and the lower right decoration substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, and 216a are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can be made to emit light as appropriate, so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

  As illustrated, the right end and the upper end of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example are formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base main body 110 in the front view, and the left end is the game window 101 Is formed in a curved shape along the outer periphery on the right side of. The side lens 210 is divided into a plurality of circumferential lens portions 210 a consisting of a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces and the circumferential lens portions 210 a in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and a plurality of circles extending substantially concentrically with the game window 101. And a radiation lens unit 210b having a prism surface of The plurality of radiation lens portions 210b in the side lens 210 are formed to extend on radiation centered on the lower center of the game window 101 in a front view, as shown in the figure, and from the front surface of the circumferential lens portion 210a The side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

  In addition, the side lens 210 includes, on the right side surface, side diffusion lens portions 210c that extend in the front-rear direction and are aligned in the vertical direction. The light from the upper right side decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 can be widely diffused in the right direction and the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1 by the side diffusion lens portion 210c. Although not shown in detail, a plurality of through holes are formed in a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker 222, and the sound from the upper right speaker 222 is made to the player side. It can be transmitted well.

  The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent and is inserted and fitted from the rear side into the inside of the side lens 210, and as shown in the drawing, the portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkled shape The portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface. Further, although not shown in detail, in the side inner lens 212, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed in a forwardly protruding peak portion in a wrinkled portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The side inner lens 212 is capable of irregularly refracting and irregularly reflecting light by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small diameter lenses, and the outer appearance of the right side decoration unit 200 is glittered in cooperation with the side lens 210 disposed on the front side. It is now possible to make it appear strange and unclear with a sense of perspective.

  A plurality of high-brightness color LEDs are mounted on the surface of the right-side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right-side lower decoration substrate 216 of the right-side decoration unit 200, and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a have relatively wide illumination angles (for example, 60.degree. To 180.degree.), And the LEDs 214b and 216b disposed at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 are relatively illuminated. A narrow angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) is used. In the present example, the LEDs 214 c of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 are red and green LEDs.

  The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200, like the side speaker 130, outputs middle-to-high range sound and can be attached at a predetermined position by a side upper inner lens 206 in a predetermined direction. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 supporting the upper right speaker 222 has a cylindrical horn portion that extends diagonally forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view, The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 can not be seen from the player in front view.

  The upper right speaker 222 in this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, and noise is generated for other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. In the same manner as the side inner lens 212, the side upper inner lens 206 is also formed with a wrinkled front surface, and a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed in a forwardly protruding peak portion of the wrinkled portion. The light is irregularly refracted and diffusely reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small diameter lenses.

  The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is inserted and disposed on the front side of the radiation lens portion 210b recessed rearward of the side lens 210, and simulates a rocky area by a plurality of spindle-like curved surfaces. The side lens 210 can be accented. Further, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by the light emission of the LEDs 214 b and 216 a of the right upper side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 disposed on the rear side, and the circumferential lens portion 210 a Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each of them.

[1-2 C. Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 32 to FIG. 32A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as viewed after being disassembled. Further, FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decoration unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing a light emission mode of the left side decoration unit by a photograph.

  The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating the left half of the front periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in the front view, as shown in the figure. Along the arc shape, the left side and the upper side are formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are formed asymmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has a width substantially the same as the width of the right side decoration unit 200, a plurality of large window frames 242a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and an elliptical shape disposed between the large window frames 242a. Frame-like lower decoration frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, and two large window frames 244a continuous on the upper side of the lower lower decoration frame 242 and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and And a frame-like upper decoration frame 244 having an oval small window frame 244b disposed between the window frames 244a.

  Further, the left side decoration unit 240 has a side flash lens 246 and a side flash lens 246, which are fitted from the rear side to the small window frames 242b and 244b of the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244, respectively. Transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of circumferential lens portions 250 a that are supported from the rear side and are fitted from the rear side to the large window frames 242 a and 244 a of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244. A plurality of slits 251a disposed on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 are formed, and an inner decorative member 251 provided with a plated layer having metallic luster on the surface, and a rear side of the inner decorative member 251 And a plurality of radially extending bands centered on the lower left and right center of the game window 101 A side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by the lens, and a.

  In addition, the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the approximate center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and the decoration on the left side is mounted with a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) on the surface A substrate 254, and a left side lower decoration substrate 256 disposed on the lower side from the approximate center of the side inner lens 252 in the vertical direction from the lower side and having a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface; A left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to cover the rear side of the left upper side decorative substrate 254 and sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and a left side covering the rear side of the left side lower decorative substrate 256 Left side lower decoration substrate cover attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decoration substrate 256 It is provided with a 60, a.

  Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 is transparent on the front upper right portion of the side inner lens 252 by supporting the upper left portion speaker 262 and the upper left portion speaker 262 disposed on the front side of the side inner lens 252 and front view upper right portion. A diffusion portion formed by an upper speaker bracket 264 and a plurality of strip lenses attached to the front of the upper speaker bracket 264 and inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 at the upper right in front view and centered on the lower right and left center And an upper right inner lens 266 having a 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

  The left side decoration unit 240 is formed of an opaque member, and the lower side decoration frame 242, the upper side decoration frame 244, the left side upper decoration substrate cover 258, and the left side lower decoration substrate cover 260 are formed of an opaque member. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plated layer of a predetermined color (in this example, a silver color). The side flash lens 246 is translucent and is entirely made of a milky white synthetic resin. The side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

  In this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the lower lower decoration frame 242 and the upper upper decoration frame 244 (small windows with respect to the radial axial direction centering on the lower left and right center of the game window 101) On both sides sandwiching the frames 242b and 244b, opening frames 242c and 244c are formed to penetrate in a state where the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 are cut away, and the small window frames 242b and 244b The opening frames 242 c and 244 c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c in the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 can not be viewed by the milky white side flash lens 246. .

  On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted and closed from the rear side to the large window frames 242a and 244a of the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244, and the transparent peripheral lens portion An inner decorative member 251 disposed on the rear side through 250a can be viewed from the player side. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, and light is irregularly refracted by the diffusion part 252a, and the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 passes through the back of the side inner lens 252. It is not possible to clearly see the side. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slits 251a of the inner decorative member 251. Etc. can not be clearly viewed from the player side.

  In addition, the front surface of the upper left side decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 is white, and the left side decoration unit 240 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. While the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit, the decorative substrates 254, 256 are not noticeable. The upper left upper decoration substrate 254 and the lower left lower decoration substrate 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control unit 4140 The light emitting decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 can be made to emit light appropriately.

  The lower side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is formed to extend vertically along the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section whose rear side is open. The lower side decoration frame 242 is formed between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and between the large window frames 242a and having a substantially elliptical shape penetrating in the front-rear direction It is provided with a window frame 242b and an opening frame 242c disposed on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the game window 101 side and the outer side of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrating in the front-rear direction and notched to the side. It is formed.

  The side lower decorative frame 242 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c Is fitted from the rear side. That is, the lower side decoration frame 242 can form an outer peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the side flash lens 246.

  Further, the upper side decoration frame 244 in the left side decoration unit 240 is continuous with the upper end of the lower side decoration frame 242 and has a substantially triangular shape in a front view extending from the upper left outer periphery to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 It is formed in a U-shaped cross section whose side is open. The upper side decoration frame 244 is a substantially oval small window frame disposed between the large window frames 244a and extending through the two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and extending in the front and rear direction. And an opening frame 244c which is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 244b (the game window 101 side and the outer side of the pachinko machine 1) and which penetrates in the front-rear direction and which is notched to the side. ing.

  This side upper decoration frame 244 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted from the rear side to the large window frame 244a, and a side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c 246 is adapted to be fitted from the rear side. That is, the upper side decoration frame 244 can form an outer peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the side flash lens 246. The upper side decoration frame 244 is configured to form a continuous design with the lower side decoration frame 242 when assembled as the left side decoration unit 240.

  In this example, the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 are colored in black, and the side lenses facing from the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. 250 and the side flash lens 246 are emphasized and can be seen.

  Also, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size obtained by combining the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244, and has a size ranging from the center to the left on the left side and the upper side of the gaming window 101 There is. This side lens 250 is a form in which the peripheral lens portion 250 a fitted from the rear side into the lower window decoration frame 242 and the large window frames 242 a and 244 a of the upper side decoration frame 244 is recessed rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250 a. And a radiation lens portion 250b on the front side of which the side flash lens 246 is disposed. In the side lens 250, the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one curved surface that is smoothly curved, and the radiation lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. Further, the side lens 250 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

  Furthermore, the inner decoration member 251 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of each circumferential lens portion 250a in the side lens 250, and includes a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front and back direction ing. The inner decorative member 251 also extends in the width direction so that the plurality of slits 251 a extend along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and are concentric with the center of the game window 101 as shown in the figure. There is more than one. Further, in the inner decorative member 251, the front surface on which the plurality of slits 251a are formed is formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plated layer having a metallic gloss of silver color on the surface, and can be viewed from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the transparent side lens 250. .

  Further, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251 and has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250 and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin There is. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion portion 252 a which is bulged forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decorative member 251 is inserted from the rear side into the inside of each inner decorative member 251. In the diffusion section 252a of the side inner lens 252, a plurality of strip lenses extending radially around the lower center of the game window 101 are formed on the front surface, and the inner side of the strip lens extending direction is disposed on the front side It intersects (substantially orthogonal) to the extending direction of the slit 251 a of the decorative member 251.

  In the side inner lens 252, the diffusion portion 252a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251, but the light is irregularly refracted by the plurality of strip lenses formed in the diffusion portion 252a. The rear side is not clearly seen through the part 252a. Further, as illustrated, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion portions 252a, and light from the upper left upper decoration substrate 254 and the lower left lower decoration substrate 256 disposed on the rear side Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

  Further, the upper left side upper decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 of the left side decoration unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the large lower side decoration frame 242 and large upper side decoration frame 244 The LEDs 254a and 256a disposed at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (peripheral lens portions 250a of the side lenses 250) have relatively wide illumination angles (for example, 60.degree. To 180.degree.). LEDs 254 b disposed at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242 b and 244 b and the opening frames 242 c and 244 c of the lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 (the radiation lens portion 250 b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246) 256b has a relatively narrow illumination angle (eg, 15 ° to 6 °) °) is used.

  The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs middle-to-high range sound similarly to the side speaker 130, and is mounted by the upper speaker bracket 264 at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn (not shown) that protrudes diagonally forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper back side of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via the protective plate 268, and the upper left speaker 262 is not seen from the player in front view It has become. In addition, a protection plate 268 made of a metal plate can be used to prevent tampering with the upper left speaker 262 or the insertion of an illegal tool into the pachinko machine 1 by breaking the cone of the upper left speaker 262. It has become. The upper left speaker 262 in this example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below, so that it is difficult for the other pachinko machines to be noisy.

  Next, characteristic light-emitting effects in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the surface of the side lens 250 that forms the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240 and includes the curved transparent circumferential lens portion 250a, and on the back side of the circumferential lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a having a metallic luster plated layer and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and disposed on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting with the extending direction of the slits 251a A side inner lens 252 having a diffusion portion 252a formed of a plurality of strip lenses, and a left side upper decoration substrate 254 and a left side lower decoration substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 and on which a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a are mounted. And (see FIG. 35 etc.). Thereby, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are caused to emit light, the light irradiated forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252, and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251, Light is emitted from the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250 to the player side, so that the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated and decorated.

  By the way, the light irradiated forward (side of the side lens 250) through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is partially transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 and irradiated to the player side. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected on the inner surface of the circumferential lens portion 250a to illuminate the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Then, since the inner decorative member 251 is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected to the inner decorative member 251 side by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a is the surface of the inner decorative member 251. The light is reflected toward the peripheral lens portion 250a on the (front surface) side, and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decorative member 251 is transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and irradiated to the player side.

  At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the circumferential lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251, and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are smoothly curved respectively. The light reflected on the rear surface side converges, and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) diffuses, and direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused to the peripheral lens portion 250a. The indirect light reflected on the front surface of the lens portion 250 a and the inner decoration member 251 is respectively irradiated to the shifted position. Further, the light passing through the slit 251 a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused in a stripe shape in the extending direction of the slit 251 a by the diffusion portion 252 a formed by the plurality of strip lenses in the side inner lens 252 and intersected. It is diffused in the (substantially orthogonal) direction. Therefore, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is longer than the width of the slit 251a, extends in a direction intersecting the direction in which the slit 251a extends, and is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of stripes of light of different shading. It is possible to make a fantastic luminous decoration with a sense of perspective (see FIG. 36).

[1-2 D. Upper decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as viewed from the rear.

  The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 17 and the like, at the upper center of the front of the door frame 5, between the upper end edges on the central side of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It is mounted between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 has an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-like upper extension frame 281b which extends laterally from the top of the central frame 281a and narrows toward the tip. A front decorative member 281 having a frame-like lower extending frame 281c which extends from the lower part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes thinner toward the tip, and an upper extending frame 281b and a lower part disposed on the rear side of the front decorative member 281 A translucent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a smaller in diameter than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and closing the inside of the extension frame 281c, and a tubular member inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282 A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 inserted in the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward, and a surface disposed on the rear side of the upper central lens 284 A plate-like diffusion lens 285 in which a plurality of minute prisms are formed, an annular lens support member 286 which holds the outer periphery of the diffusion lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the lens support member 286 And a light shielding member 287 having a cylindrical portion 287a having substantially the same diameter as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286, and a rear side of the light shielding member 287 arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light shielding member 287 A plurality of LEDs 288a, and a plurality of LEDs 288b arranged at positions corresponding to the outside of the cylindrical portion 287a are mounted on the front surface of the upper central decorative substrate 288.

  Also, the upper decorative unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decorative member 281, the upper lens 282, the light shielding member 287, and the upper central decorative substrate 288 from the rear side, Of the upper side decoration substrate 290 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 289 covering the rear surface of the upper side decoration substrate 290 and attached to the lower side of the rear surface of the substrate cover 291 and extending backward A mounting bracket 292, an upper lower cover 293 attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281, and has transparency and covers the lower side of the upper lower cover 293 And an upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped into a shape.

  Furthermore, the upper decorative unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward in a plate shape from the upper rear end of the front decorative member 281 and has a cutout 295a whose rear end is open at the center in the left-right direction. The cover 295, a plate-like lid member 296 closing the notch portion 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decorative member 297 attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 in a front view and shaped into a predetermined shape .

  In the upper decorative unit 280 of this example, a plated layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decorative member 281, and the front decorative member 281 is made to glow by external light. Further, the upper lens 282 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a central annular lens portion 282b facing the inside of the central frame 281a of the front decorative member 281 on the outer periphery of the through hole 282a and the upper extension of the front decorative member 281 An extension frame lens portion 282c that faces the inside of the frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c is provided. In the upper lens 282, a plurality of band-shaped lenses radially extending on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b are circumferentially arrayed, and an axial center of the through hole 282a is centered on the front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of concentrically extending prisms are formed. Thus, light can be irregularly refracted by the plurality of prisms or strip lenses of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 can not be clearly seen.

  The upper central lens 284 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 is formed to have a smooth spindle shape on the front side, while a plurality of lenses concentric to the rear side are formed, and light can be irregularly refracted, so the rear side is clear. It can not be seen by

  Further, in the upper central decorative substrate 288 of the upper decorative unit 280, the plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs, respectively. The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 can be separately illuminated and decorated. Furthermore, in the upper side decoration substrate 290 of the upper decoration unit 280, the plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs, respectively, Are arranged at positions corresponding to the respective frames. The upper side decorative substrate 290 can emit light and decorate the upper extending frame 281 b and the lower extending frame 281 c of the front decorative member 281 by appropriately emitting the LED 290 a.

[1-2 E. Dish unit]
Subsequently, the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the pan unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the pan unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the portion of the dish unit in the door frame, cut at a portion of the ball lending unit.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 for storing gaming balls paid out from the winning ball device 740 described later, and the game stored in the upper tray 301 A ball can be supplied to a ball striking device 650 described later via a ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of this example includes a substantially plate-like dish unit base 310 extending in the left-right direction fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100; When the upper outer periphery of the upper dish body 312 is covered with the dish-like upper disc body 312 fixed to the front approximately in the center and the upper side and the rear being open and the front left side (axial support side) is largely bulging forward An upper dish upper panel 314 which is formed to be curved so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward in a visual manner, an upper dish front decorative member 316 attached to the upper front end edge of the upper dish upper panel 314, and an upper dish front An upper dish upper inner decoration member 318 disposed between the decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper panel 314, and a portion on the right side of the upper dish front decoration member 316 and continuous with a right upper portion of the upper dish upper panel 314 A dish upper right decorative member 319 on the cover, and a.

  Further, the plate unit 300 is attached to the lower surface of the plate attachment base 320 attached to the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 from the left and right center to the right lower surface and having a plurality of minute prisms formed on the surface. And an upper dish decoration substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper surface thereof. By appropriately lighting the LED 322a of the upper dish decoration substrate 322, it is possible to make a part of the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper right decoration member 319 emit light and decorate.

  Furthermore, in the dish unit 300, the lower part of the upper dish body 312 is fixed to the front of the dish unit base 310 and the upper and the rear are opened and the center in the left and right direction bulges forward in front view and the front end is the center in the left and right direction The lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the head and the upper end of the lower dish body 324 are fixed to the upper portion of the lower dish body 324 and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward similarly to the lower dish body 324 in front view A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 curved to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of a lock device 1000 described later at a portion covering the lower edge front end of the lower plate body 324 and extending to the right in front view A lower cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing the upper opening and an upper opening formed on the lower end of the lower cover 328 at the right, left, center left position of the lower end of the lower cover 328 decorated coaxially with the lock hole 328a of the lower cover 328 A lower tray right side cover 330 provided with a lower opening 330b of the handle 500 is inserted from the open front below the 330a and the upper opening 330a, and a.

  Further, in the pan unit 300, the lower pan upper left side cover 332 obliquely extending covering the left front end of the lower pan main body 324 and the left front end of the lower pan top plate 326, and the lower end of the lower pan upper left side cover 332 Lower plate lower left side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate which is closed from the rear side and the opening 334a of the lower plate lower left side cover 334 is made transparent And a frame-like holding member 337 which holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower plate lower left side cover 334. The right front end of the lower tray top plate 326 is covered by the upper tray front decoration member 316.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is attached to upper left and right ends of the dish unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish upper left cover 332 are designed A side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and formed in a continuous shape, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338 A cover member 339 having a plurality of holes and a disc-like shape which is loosely curved so as to close the rear side 338a and project the front side.

  In this example, since the cover 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to deform even if it is pushed or struck from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be made. As long as it can be protected. In addition, the side speaker cover 338 has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster formed on the surface. The cover 339 is colored black.

  Furthermore, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for removing the gaming balls attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish main body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302; A lower disc ball removing mechanism 350 for removing the gaming balls attached to the lower surface and stored in the lower disc 302, and attached to the upper left side in a front view of the disc unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 A ball lending unit 360 for operating a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit, not shown).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 capable of storing gaming balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish main body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the tray unit 300 constitutes a lower tray 302 capable of storing gaming balls by a portion of the tray unit base 310, the lower tray main body 324, the lower tray top plate 326, the lower tray cover 328 and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left and right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed at the upper end edge extending in the left and right direction. It is equipped. A rental ball unit attachment portion 310b is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a for attaching the rental ball unit 360 through in the front-rear direction. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side (near the upper left corner in a front view) of the ball unit attachment portion 310b and has an oblong ball supply port 310c having a horizontally long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front and back direction; An upper countersink outlet 310d which penetrates vertically in the front-back direction below the mouth 310c (approximately in the middle in the height direction of the tray unit base 310) and near the right end of the decorative portion 310a; And a pair of lower tray support portions 310e which are disposed directly below the ball outlet 310d and the upper ball inlet 310c and which project forward and whose upper surfaces have the same height. The upper flat ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to the middle position in the front-rear direction of the upper surface of the lower flat support portion 310e disposed immediately below.

  Further, the pan unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower pan support portions 310e, is fitted with the rear ends of the lower pan main body 324 and the lower pan top plate 326, and is formed into a horizontally long rectangular ring in a front view. A groove 310f, and a rectangular lower ball supply port 310g disposed at the lower right of the center of the portion surrounded by the lower plate support groove 310f and penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44, the bowl unit base 310 is provided with a lower bowl ball feeding rod 310h cylindrically extended rearward so as to be continuous with the lower bowl ball feeding port 310g and an open side of the lower ball bowl feeding rod 310h. And a notch 310i formed on the side and of a size through which the game ball can pass.

  The upper bowl ball supply port 310 c of the bowl unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit through the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the notches 101 a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150. It is in communication with the first ball outlet 544 a of the unit 540. At the front end of the upper flat ball supply port 310c, there is provided a guiding recess 310j which extends in the right direction in a front view and is recessed rearward. The guiding recess 310j is inclined so that the right end in the front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined such that the front end is lower in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the height difference between the front end of the guiding recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper tray main body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guiding recess 310j, and at the right end of the guiding recess 310j, the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 312 and The difference in height is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper bowl ball supply port 310c is closed by the gaming ball stored in the upper plate 301, the gaming ball paid out from the winning ball device 740 via the far cover unit 540 is Since it is not possible to go straight forward into the upper tray 301 from the upper flat ball supply port 310c, the paid-out gaming ball abuts on the gaming ball in which the front side of the upper flat ball supply port 310c is closed and rolls The direction is changed, and guided so as to roll in the guiding recess 310j to the right in front view, and released from the vicinity of the right end of the guiding recess 310j to the upper side of the gaming ball stored in the upper plate 301; Become. Thus, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper plate 301 in the upper and lower two stages, so that the player does not move the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Even when the game balls are paid out, the game balls can be continuously supplied (released) into the upper plate 301, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling bothersome for the storage of the game balls on the upper plate 301. In addition, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game by concentrating the player on the game by the operation of hitting the game ball and the game ball hit, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301. It is possible to

  The upper bowling ball outlet 310d of the bowl unit base 310 includes the opening 344a of the upper bowl bowling base 344 in the upper bowl bowling mechanism 340 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is in communication with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the lower ball supply port 310g extends rearward from the rear side through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. Above, while being connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, the notch portion 310i of the lower flat ball supply rod 310h is provided in the upper flat ball extraction mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removal flow path 344 c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower spherical ball supply port 310g is provided with an expanded portion 310k that is expanded in the left direction in a front view, and the lower conical ball supply port is formed by this expanded portion 310k. The front end of 310 g is spread in the left and right direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress early clogging of the lower ball ball supply port 310g by the gaming balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower ball ball supply port 310g, and more games A ball can be fed into the lower plate 302.

  The upper plate main body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (axial support side) bulges forward than the center in a front view and the bottom surface is entirely lower at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side There is. In the bottom surface of the upper disc body 312, the rear end on the pivotal support side is near the bottom of the upper disc ball supply port 310c in the disc unit base 310, and the rear end on the open side is the upper disc ball discharge port 310d in the disc unit base 310. The gaming balls, which are formed to be respectively positioned near the middle position in the vertical direction, are supplied to the upper disc main body 312 (the upper disc 301) from the upper disc ball supply port 310c and are guided to the upper disc ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  In the upper tray main body 312, a metal upper tray rail 313 which can be in contact with the game ball is attached at the rear end of the bottom and on the open side from the center in the lateral direction. Although not shown, the upper tray rail 313 is electrically grounded (earthed) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, and outside the open side of the upper plate body 312 A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the mounting hole 314a penetrates in the vertical direction and on which the upper disc ball extracting button 340 described later is attached. The upper tray upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape at the front end which is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper tray main body 312 and is a decorative attachment portion 314 b And an operation unit attachment portion 314c formed in a step shape which is further lowered than the decoration attachment portion 314b at a position on the front side than the upper plate main body 312 at the center in the horizontal direction and for attaching an operation unit 400 described later. There is.

  The upper dish front decoration member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin so as to extend in the left and right direction along the front end of the upper dish upper panel 314. The upper dish front decoration member 316 is formed to have a smooth shape on the left side from a position closer to the center right in the left-right direction, while the right side is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape. It is formed in such a rugged shape. Further, although the detailed illustration of the upper dish front decoration member 316 is omitted, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed on the right rear surface formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and light can be irregularly refracted. The rear side is not clearly seen from the player side. The upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 is disposed behind the smoothly formed portion on the left side of the upper dish front decorative member 316, and is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. Thereby, while the upper tray upper inner decorative member 318 is in the assembled state, the portion visible through the left side of the upper tray front decorative member 316 can be clearly seen from the player side, while the right side of the upper tray front decorative member 316 The part seen through is seeming to be unclear from the player side and the feeling of a sense of distance not fixed.

  Further, the upper tray upper right decoration member 319 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces in the same manner as the right side portion of the upper dish front decorative member 316, and the upper dish upper decorative member 316 is The upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of the upper countersinking button 341 described later. In the upper dish upper right decoration member 319, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed on the back surface (lower surface), and light can be irregularly refracted, and the lower side is not clearly seen from the player side There is. An upper plate decoration substrate 322 is disposed behind the right side of the upper plate front decoration member 316 and below the upper plate upper right decoration member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decoration substrate 322 is used. By appropriately emitting light, the upper tray front decoration member 316 and the upper tray upper right decoration member 319 can be made to emit light appropriately.

  A lower plate body 324 of the lower plate unit 300 is fanned in a front view in plan view and has a bottom plate 324a formed so that a rear end is formed linearly in the left-right direction and a substantially center of the upper surface is lowest, and a center of the bottom plate 324a And a side plate 324c rising upward from the front end and the side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. An upper end of the side plate 324c of the lower tray main body 324, which rises upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a, is formed in a curved shape so as to become lower toward the front side and to the rear side. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower flat plate 326 are placed and connected to the straight part of the upper end.

  The lower plate main body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324 a and the side plate 324 c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310 f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower bowl ball opening hole 324b of the lower bowl main body 324 is closed by the opening / closing shutter 352 of the lower bowl ball outlet mechanism 350 disposed on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 is formed of a black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower plate side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin, and is provided with a plated layer having a silver color and metallic feel (a matte state such as sandblasted instead of a mirror surface) on the surface. The lower tray side cover 330 is provided with a plate-like portion extending rearward from the lower end and forming a part of the bottom surface of the tray unit 300. The lock hole 328 a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330 a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3. On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 is exposed from the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

  In addition, the lower plate upper left cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic gloss on the surface. Further, the lower plate lower left cover 334 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plated layer having a red metallic luster on the surface, and extends backward from the lower end to a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300 It has a plate-like part that forms The opening 334a of the lower tray lower left cover 334 is formed at a position corresponding to the front of the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 described later, so that the sound from the speaker 821 can be transmitted to the player side It has become. The protective cover 336 for closing the opening 334a of the lower plate lower left cover 334 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed in a metal plate, and prevents an unauthorized tool from being inserted therein.

  The lower unit side cover 330 and the lower unit lower left cover 334 close the bottom excluding the center in the left-right direction, and the lower unit side cover 330 and the lower unit lower left cover 334 The bottom surface between them is closed by the lower ball ball removing mechanism 340 described later.

  The upper disc ball removing mechanism 340 in the disc unit 300 is operated with respect to the upper disc ball extracting button 341 which is mounted to be able to advance and retract in the vertical direction with respect to the mounting hole 314 a of the upper disc upper panel 314. The actuating unit 342 moves up and down more than the up and down movement of the upper bowl ball release button 341 and is supported on the front side of the bowl unit base 310, and supports the operating plate 342 in an operable (rotatable) manner. A mounting base 346 attached to the front of the housing, and a contact piece which slides in the vertical direction by the vertical movement of the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 and abuts against the actuating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 described later. 343a and arranged on the rear side of the dish unit base 310; The an upper pan ball vent base 344 attached to the rear side of the vertical direction slidably supported to be countersunk unit base 310, and a.

  Although the detailed illustration of the upper disc ball extraction mechanism 340 is omitted, the operation piece 342 which moves up and down with the upper disc ball extraction button 341 so that the upper disc ball extraction button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. It is biased upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper ball ball removal slider 343 is urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper ball ball removal base 344 and the upper ball ball removal base 344.

  The upper disc ball removing base 344 of the upper disc ball removing mechanism 340 closes the upper disc ball outlet 310d of the disc unit base 310 and at the same time communicates with the upper disc ball outlet 310d and opens forward. 42 and a ball guiding channel 344b communicating with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper countersinking base 344 and guiding the gaming ball that has passed through the opening 344a downward and then guiding it backward (FIG. 42 and FIG. 44) and extends downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b and then extends toward the right (axially supported) end in a rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper countersinking base 344 And a ball removing channel 344c in which the game balls can be distributed.

  In the upper bowl ball removal base 344, the opening 344 a communicates with the upper bowl ball outlet 310 d, and the lower end of the ball guiding channel 344 b communicating with the opening 344 a is the ball of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper tray 301 is communicated with the ball feed unit 580 by communicating with the entrance 581 a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 through the feed opening 113. It can be supplied to

  Further, the ball extraction flow path 344c of the upper countersink ball extraction base 344 communicates with the ball extraction port 581b of the ball feed unit 580 through the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 at the upper end adjacent to the ball guide flow path 344b. And the lower end extending to the pivotal support side is in communication with the notch 310i of the lower ball supply rod 310h in the plate unit base 310, and the gaming ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 is It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower end of the rear end of the ball removal flow passage 344c is closed by the upper countersink ball removal flow passage cover 345.

  When the upper disc ball extracting mechanism 340 presses the upper disc ball extracting button 341 downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343 a which protrudes backward is also obtained. Move down. The actuating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a rotates the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction by the downward movement of the contact piece 343a. The movement between the entry port 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entry port 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication. As a result, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301 are transferred from the upper tray ball outlet 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 through the opening 344a of the upper tray ball removing base 344 and the ball guiding channel 344b. After entering, it is discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball outlet flow passage 344c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344 and the lower bowl ball supply port 310g from the lower bowl ball supply port 310g via the lower bowl ball supply rod 310h of the bowl unit base 310. Can be discharged into the

  The ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343 a of the upper disc ball removing slider 343 biased upward by a coil spring, so that the ball removing member 583 is Even if game balls are vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a of the above, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that biases the upper disc ball removal slider 343 via the actuating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 etc. While being able to prevent breakage, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition 583a.

  The lower disc ball removing mechanism 350 in the disc unit 300 is disposed between the lower disc side cover 330 and the lower disc lower left cover 334 on the lower side of the lower disc body 324 to form a bottom central portion of the disc unit 300. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 352 pivotally supported on the upper surface of the extraction base 351 and the lower tray ball removal base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower disk sphere extraction hole 324b of the lower disk body 324, and the opening / closing shutter 352 And a lower disc ball extraction button 354, which is attached to the front end of the lower disc ball extraction slider 353. There is.

  The lower disc ball dropping base 351 is provided with a base ball removing hole 351 a vertically penetrated at a position facing the lower disc ball dropping hole 324 b of the lower disc body 324. In addition, the opening and closing shutter 352 is a closing portion 352a that can close the lower flat ball opening hole 324b, and a shutter round hole that is disposed on the front side of the closing portion 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction substantially coincident with the lower flat ball opening hole 324b. , And the biasing portion 352a is biased by the coil spring 356 so as to close the lower countersink opening 324b and the base opening 351a. .

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the open / close shutter 352 is provided with a contact pin that can contact with the lower flat ball slide slider 353, and this contact pin contacts the lower flat ball slide slider 353. The closing portion 352a and the shutter opening hole 352b are pivoted to move backward by the lower opening ball slide slider 353, or the lower opening ball slide slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring 356. It can be done.

  In the lower disc ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the open / close shutter 352 is substantially coincident with the lower ball removing hole 324b of the lower disc body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower disc remover base 351. A holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower countersinking slider 353 at a predetermined position is further provided in order to hold the moving position.

  The lower disc ball extracting mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower disc ball extracting button 354 is moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower disc ball extracting button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower disc cover 328 or the like. The lower countersink hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a of the open / close shutter 352. In this state, gaming balls can be stored in the lower plate main body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower disc ball release button 354 in the closed state is pushed backward, the lower disc ball out button 354 and the lower disc ball out slider 353 slide backward, and the slide out of the lower disc ball out slider 353 opens and closes. The shutter 352 rotates against the biasing force of the coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball opening hole 352b move rearward.

  Then, the opening / closing shutter 352 is pivoted to the rear, so that the shutter ball opening hole 352b is overlapped with the lower ball opening hole 324b and the base ball opening hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball opening hole 352b and the lower ball opening hole The game balls stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 300 through the lower tray ball removal holes 324b. When the lower countersink slider 353 is moved backward to a position where the shutter holes 352b and the lower counters ball 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower countersink 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower disc ball removal slider 353 is locked (held), the lower disc ball release button 354 is kept in the open state retracted backward, and the shutter ball out hole 352 b is released The game ball stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged downward even if it is held in alignment with the removal hole 3324 b and the lower tray removal button 354 is not kept pressed.

  On the other hand, in the case where the lower ball ball extraction hole 324b is closed, when the lower ball ball extraction button 354 in the retracted state is further pressed backward, the holding of the lower ball ball slide 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released. The open / close shutter 352 is urged in such a direction that the closing portion 352a is closed by the coil spring so as to be able to slide, and the closing portion 352a is moved by the biasing force. It will turn in the direction which moves in the direction (forward) of ball removal hole 324b. Then, as the open / close shutter 352 pivots forward, the lower countersink slide 353 slides forward, and the lower countersink outlet 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower counterball relief button 354 is lowered. The game ball can be stored in the lower plate 302 by returning to the closed position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the plate cover 328 or the like.

  The holding mechanism 355 of the lower ball ball pulling out mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and the detailed mechanism will not be described.

  A rental ball unit 360 in the tray unit 300 includes a rental ball button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and also includes a rental balance display unit 363 between the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362. In this ball lending unit 360, a predetermined number of gaming balls can be distributed to the bowl unit 300 by inserting cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and pressing the ball rental button 361. Can be borrowed (dispensed) into the upper tray 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the loaned amount is subtracted and the cash remainder and prepaid card inserted are returned. There is. In addition, the remaining amount display portion 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

  The ball lending unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball lending unit attaching portion 310 b formed in the upper end decorative portion 310 a of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball lending unit 360 is provided with a crime prevention cover attachment portion 364 which protrudes backward from the rear surface and attaches and locks the attachment elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the crime prevention cover 180.

  More specifically, the rental ball unit 360 has a transparent front cover 365 covering the front side of the lending remaining display portion 363 and a lending remaining display portion 363 disposed on the rear side of the front cover 365 and a lending ball button 361. And a return unit 362 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch activated by the operation of the return button 362 is attached, and a back side of the transfer unit base 366 covering the back side of the transfer unit base 366 And a rear cover 367 attached to the The crime prevention cover attachment portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 364.

  The ball-sending unit attachment portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball-sending unit 360 is attached is formed between a circular button opening 310m facing the ball-sending button 361 and the return button 362 and the button openings 310m A transparent front cover 365 having a rectangular display opening 310n closed by a cover 365 and a forwardly projecting protrusion 310o formed on the outer periphery of the two button openings 310m and closing the display opening 310n. The loan remaining display portion 363 disposed on the rear side is visible from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protrusion 310 o of the pan unit base 310 is formed to have a round front end.

  As illustrated, the ball unit 360 of the present embodiment has the ball unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 disposed above the upper plate 301 and directly above the ball ball supply opening 310c. It is arranged to face. In addition, the rental ball unit 360 has a return button 362 disposed at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the rental ball button 361. In the present example, the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362 are colored in a color different from that of the dish unit base 310 (the rental ball unit attachment portion 310 b). Thus, the player can easily recognize the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362.

  In addition, the rental ball unit 360 includes a protruding portion 310o protruding forward (to the player) from the outer periphery of the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362, and when the player inserts a hand into the upper plate 301, Since the hand touches the projecting portion 310o before touching the rental ball button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the rental ball button 361 or the return button 362, and the rental ball button It is possible to prevent the erroneous operation of the 361, the return button 362, and the like.

  The plate unit 300 of this example includes the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, and can be the pachinko machine 1 having the same feel as a conventional pachinko machine provided with two storage dishes. A new pachinko machine 1 (a new type of pachinko machine) can be regarded as a pachinko machine 1 that can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played by reducing anxiety and the like given to the player. It has become.

[1-2 F. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 46 to FIG. FIG. 46 (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the lower right front. Furthermore, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state where the pressing operation unit in the operation unit is pressed.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper tray 301 substantially at the center in the left-right direction in a front view, and the dial operation unit 401 which can be operated by the player An operation unit 405 is provided, and the player's operation can be received according to the game state, and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved. , To be able to participate in the production during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical press operation unit 405 inserted into the annular ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular follower connected with the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 engaged with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 with the drive gear 412 fixed to the rotation shaft, an annular gear rail 416a rotatably supporting the driven gear 410, An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b slidably supporting the press operation unit 405 in the vertical direction, and the press operation unit 405 disposed in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 It has an opening 420a through which a spring 418 for biasing upward, a gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 and a button support cylinder 416b can pass. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed on the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 having an opening 422a which covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 attached on the lower side of the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420 and covering the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit attaching portion 314c in the pan unit 300, and a plating which is disposed on the upper side of the cover main body 426 and formed in a predetermined shape and has silver metallic gloss on the surface A layer-provided inner cover 427 and a transparent surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. In the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428, a circular opening through which the outer cylindrical portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass is formed.

  Furthermore, the operation unit 400 is attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 430a through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 and the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. A dial decoration substrate 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the ring and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 and detecting rotation of the dial operation unit 401, And a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface directly below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decorative substrate 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation portion holding member 416 by the substrate holding claws 416 g of the operation portion holding member 416.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a translucent material, and extends outward from the upper end of the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 401a extending in the vertical direction and the inner cylinder portion 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extending surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c cylindrically extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b and shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a, and an outer cylinder It mainly includes a collar portion 401d annularly extending outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange portion 401 d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a of the upper cover 422. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a connection locking portion 401e (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylindrical portion 401a, and the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked to perform dial operation. The portion 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protrusion 401 f protruding in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401 a at a position lowered by a predetermined distance from the upper end. The projecting portion 401 f of the dial operating portion 401 is annularly formed along the inner periphery of the inner cylindrical portion 401 a. The projecting portion 401f, which will be described in detail later, can come in contact with the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 projects the dial operating portion 401. By coming into contact with the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (the pressing operation portion 405) from being further retracted into the inner cylindrical portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

  As shown in the figure, the protruding portion 401 f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 have their contact surfaces lowered toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. And the contact area is increased when they abut each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed (released) more to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  In addition, the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button main body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button main body 406, and a button cap And a cap inner 408 disposed between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a frusto-conical shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the frusto-conical shape. And a through hole 406a vertically penetrating in the center of the lower end face of the truncated cone shape, and light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It is supposed to be.

  Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b which extend downward from the lower part of the outer periphery and the lower end protrudes outward in the direction perpendicular to the axial direction. By locking with the locking convex portion 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is set so that the button main body 406 does not come off the button support portion 416b. It can be regulated. Further, although not shown in detail, in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416, there is provided a contact portion which prevents the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction, The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is configured not to rotate in the button support cylinder 416b. A gap of a predetermined amount is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap allows the button body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can rotate within the range.

  The button main body 406 further includes a pressing detection piece 406c which can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decoration substrate 432 which extends downward from a position different from the outer peripheral lower portion from the locking claw 406b. When the button main body 406 (press operation unit 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418, the pressure detection piece 406c is detected by the pressure detection sensor 432c.

  Furthermore, as illustrated, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has an outer diameter smaller than that of the upper side below the approximate center in the vertical direction, and a step 407a is formed between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 below the step portion 407a, and the dial operation portion above the step portion 407a. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of 401 and larger than the inner diameter of the projecting portion 401f. Thus, when the button cap 407 (the pressing operation unit 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder 401a from above the dial operating unit 401, the step 407a of the button cap 407 abuts on the projecting portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401. The button cap 407 (the pressing operation portion 405) can not be further inserted into the inner cylindrical portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

  Furthermore, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. The character “Push” is displayed on the top surface of the cap inner 408 so that the character can be viewed from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 is provided with a plurality of gear teeth meshing with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416 b of the operation portion holding member 416, and has an annular slide that contacts the gear rail 416 a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. A moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It can be done.

  Further, the driven gear 410 is provided with a pair of connection locking claws 410b which project upward from a position where the upper end opposes and then protrudes inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operating portion 401 are connected so as to be integrally rotatable by locking with the connection locking portion 401e of the inner cylindrical portion 401a.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, and slits formed between the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c. The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection patterns of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by 410d. In this example, the lengths in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  Further, as illustrated, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, and is fixed integrally rotatably with the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotational direction, rotational speed, and rotational angle, and the drive gear 412 is rotationally driven by the dial drive motor 414 via the rotational shaft. Thus, the dial operating unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating the forward rotation and the reverse rotation in small increments of the drive gear 412 (rotation shaft) by the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a short time for each predetermined rotation angle based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, etc. It is possible to give a feeling.

  Furthermore, the operation portion holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a for rotatably supporting the driven gear 410, and a button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 projecting cylindrically upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. And a locking projection 416f formed on the inner peripheral surface in the vicinity of the bottom in the button support cylinder 416b and capable of locking with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406. 49 and 50) and a through hole 416c for transmitting the light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 through the center of the bottom in the button support cylinder 416b to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (the pressing operation portion 405) And the rotation detection sensor 4 mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 by vertically penetrating the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b. An opening 416d through which the 2a and 432b can pass, and an opening 416e through which the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b vertically penetrates and the press detection sensor 432c attached to the button decoration substrate 432 is viewed from the upper side And a pair of substrate holding claws 416g for locking and holding the extending button decorative substrate 432.

  The operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support cylinder 416b and forms a gap of a predetermined amount in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406, and the locking is performed. It further has a plurality of contact parts that can be brought into contact with the claws 406b. The contact portion allows the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range, and prevents the button main body 406 from rotating around in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although the detailed description of the operation portion holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432, etc. It is prepared for.

  The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operating unit 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 around the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing the driven gear 410 on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported rotatably and rotatably. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation section 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation section 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coil spring 418 is disposed between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416 b and the truncated conical lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is less likely to be damaged even if the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 vertically penetrates the lower recess 420b which is fittable on the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and the bottom (ceiling) of the lower recess 420b. An inner opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c disposed on the opposite side of the opening 420a from the lower recess 420b and capable of accommodating at least the driven gear 410; Have. In addition, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for attaching the dial drive motor 414, and from the outside to the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in the present example) legs 420e that project a predetermined amount and positioning holes 420f that open downward from the lower ends of the legs 420e are provided.

  In addition, the base member 420 has a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 disposed on the upper side outside the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is upward from different positions outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420 h for mounting the protruding dial decoration board 430. Furthermore, although detailed description is abbreviate | omitted, the positioning boss | hub for positioning each member, an attachment hole, etc. are formed in the suitable position of the upper surface and the lower surface of the base member 420. FIG.

  The base member 420 is inserted into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side to the central opening 420a, and then the predetermined screw is inserted. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, whereby the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although the base member 420 is not shown in detail, when the operation portion holding member 416 is supported, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom of the upper recess 420c. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  The leg 420 e of the base member 420 is configured such that a positioning hole 420 f formed at the lower end thereof is fitted with a positioning projection 424 a formed on the upper surface of the bottom of the lower cover 424 described later. The lower cover 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the substrate mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and disposed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration substrate 430 mounted on the substrate mounting boss 420h is driven It is not in contact with the gear 410.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 contacts the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor attachment portion 420 d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transmitted to the base member 420 side. It can be sufficiently transmitted to the base member 420 so that the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. As a result, it is possible to suppress the overheating of the dial drive motor 414, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 or the like due to the overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 is in the form of a box whose lower part is opened, and the top plate thereof is provided with an opening 422a of an inner diameter which allows the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 to pass and the collar portion 401d can not pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the shaft center of the pressing operation unit 405 (follower gear 410) and the shaft center of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed to be extended, and is provided with engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both longitudinal direction ends, and by engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424, the upper surface is formed. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  Further, the upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer periphery of one (front side of the pachinko machine 1) in the short axis direction (front and rear direction of the pachinko machine 1), and a claw-like locking piece 422c whose lower end protrudes outward Is equipped. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper tray front decoration member 316 in the tray unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper tray front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming off the operation unit attachment portion 314 c upward.

  The upper cover 422 has the dial operation unit 401 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422 a in a state where the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration substrate 430, the dial member 401 and the like are attached to the base member 420. By covering the upper side of the base member 420 so as to pass through, the opening 422 a can prevent the dial operating portion 401 from being pulled upward.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 is in the form of a box whose upper part is open, and the outer peripheral shape is substantially the same as the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning projection 424a that can be fitted to the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of the 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with an engaging portion 424 b engageable with the engaging claw 422 b of the upper cover 422 at the upper part of each end in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engagement claws 422b.

  The cover main body 426 in the operation unit 400 is, as illustrated, an opening 426a which vertically penetrates in the center and through which the upper cover 422 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided.

  The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the pan unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300 In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached in a state (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm) slightly floating above the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. The cover main body 426 is elastically deformed when it is pressed or struck, so that the impact can be alleviated.

  In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then An inner cover 427 and a surface cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover main body 426.

  In the operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410, which rotates with the dial operation unit 401, has a circumferential length in the slit between adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and a circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths of the directions are the same. Further, in the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, the distance in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation portion 401 is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410 It is assumed. As a result, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and rotation by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b It is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotating from the detection pattern of the detection piece 410c.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 of this example can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to assist rotation, to prevent it from turning intentionally, and to add a sense of click to the rotation. Furthermore, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeating the forward and reverse rotations of the dial drive motor 414 little by little.

  Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts on the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the button cap As 407 (pressing operation part 405) can not be further inserted into the inner cylinder part 401a, the load applied to the pressing operation part 405 is dialed through the step part 407a and the projecting part 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

  Furthermore, in the operation unit 400 of this example, with the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 in contact with each other by pressing the pressing operation portion 405 By repeating the rotation and reverse rotation, it is possible to vibrate the pressing operation unit 405 as well as the dial operation unit 401, and it is possible to surprise the player by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 and enjoy the game and the effect. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated and operated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be operated by pressing are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if the player etc. hit the operation unit 401 or 405 strongly, and the operation unit 401 or 405 can be freely made to the player. While being able to operate it, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and enjoy the effects using the operation units 401 and 405 to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game it can.

  In addition, the pressing operation unit 405 is disposed at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401. If the pressing operation unit 405 is to be strongly hit, the dial operation unit 401 is also likely to be hit, and the operation unit The force of tapping 401 and 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and concentration of impacted impact can be suppressed to prevent damage to the operation unit 400 and the tray unit 300. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can withstand the smashing, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. While being able to improve the operability of 405, it is possible to enjoy the effects using the operation units 401 and 405, and to suppress the decrease in the interest for the game Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the depressed operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300, and a predetermined amount of clearance is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. When the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the plate unit 300 so that the operation parts 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to apply an impact or load, The impact and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover main body 426 until the lower end of the operation unit 400 abuts on the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 and the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c After contact, the bottom (dish unit 300) of the operation unit attachment portion 314c Since the load can be received, it is possible to disperse the impact and the like from the operation units 401 and 405 and to avoid the concentration of the impact and the like, so that the impact resistance and load resistance of the operation unit 400 and the pan unit 300 can be reduced. It can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of legs 420e that project downward to a position away from the position supporting the operation parts 401 and 405, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the tray unit 300. Since the leg 420e is not disposed immediately below the impact even when an impact from the operation portion 401 or 405 is applied to the base member 420 in contact with the bottom surface of the attachment portion 314c, the operation portion 401 or 405 of the base member 420 is The portion supporting the support is flexed by the impact, and the base member 420 is flexed (elastically deformed), so that the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300 The impact can be reduced to prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  Further, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from the lower side so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in plan view. When the operation portion holding member 416 holding the dial operation portion 401 is removed from the base member 420 and moved downward when the operation portion 401 is smashed from the upper side, the dial operation portion 401 abuts on the upper surface of the base member 420 The downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 can be restricted by the base member 420, and depression of the dial operation unit 401 can be favorably prevented.

  Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 in which the pressing operation unit 405 is disposed at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the game state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotational drive including vibration). Allows the player to be surprised and to pay attention to the effect by the operation unit 401, 405, and the player can be entertained, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414, whereby the dial operation unit It is possible to make it difficult to get bored by making the effect using the 401 (the pressing operation unit 405) more diverse, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 through the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, so that the position of the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414 can be Therefore, even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted via the rotation shaft of the dial operation unit 401. Direct application to the dial drive motor 414 can be avoided, and damage to the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented.

  Furthermore, after making the opening 420a of the base member 420 smaller in diameter than the dial operation unit 401, the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (the operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can contact the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 is the base member It is possible to reliably prevent the user from falling below 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. Thus, it is possible to disperse the impact and load from the rear side and prevent the operating portion holding member 416 from being damaged.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotationally driving the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated and driven by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 Even if the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite the fact that it is rotationally driven by the above, even if the calorific value increases due to an excessive load on the dial drive motor 414, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be well dissipated and dissipated through the base member 420, and any problems with the dial drive means 414 due to overheating can be prevented. It can be made to withstand high loads Can be sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the pressure of the pressure operation unit 405 are provided. The dial operation unit 401 and the pressure operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation or the pressing operation of the player, it is possible to perform an effect according to the player's operation based on the detection signal, and one more for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide a sensation that has a sense of bodily sensation, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Further, the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 for emitting and decorating the operation units 401 and 405 can be provided, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be illuminated and decorated. By doing this, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation unit 401, 405, and the player can easily operate the operation unit 401, 405.

  In addition, since the step 407 a of the pressing operation unit 405 and the projecting portion 401 f of the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other when the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the player presses the pressing operation unit 405. When the dial drive motor 414 causes the dial operation unit 401 to repeatedly rotate forward and reverse within a predetermined angle range and vibrates, the stepped portion 407a in contact with the projection 401f of the dial operation unit 401 is pressed. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, even without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation for the pressing operation 405, so that the effect using the operation unit 400 is enjoyed It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405 which was thought not to move by hand, which is good It is possible to make people think that there is something to be done, and it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the effect using the operation unit 400. While being able to make it easy, it is possible to make the player operate the operation unit 400 positively, enjoy the operation of the dial operation part 401 of the operation unit 400 and the pressing operation part 405, and the interest to the game decreases Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the press operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other when the press operation unit 405 is pressed, the force from the press operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. This enables the load and impact applied to the pressure operation unit 405 to be dispersed to the side of the dial operation unit 401 even when the pressure operation unit 405 is strongly hit, and the load resistance and impact resistance to the pressure operation unit 405. Can be enhanced. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is smashed, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being broken, thereby avoiding interruption of the game due to the breakage of the pressing operation unit 405 (the operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced by the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even when the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, the pressing operation unit 405 can be prevented from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401. The respective roles of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be surely recognized, and it is possible to make it easy for the player to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400 and guiding the player to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. Therefore, the player can easily read the character "PUSH" from the player's side without turning or tilting greatly. It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 has a projecting portion 401 f that protrudes from the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401 a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 has a smaller diameter below a predetermined position in the vertical direction In the upper end of the operation unit 400, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as close as possible. As a result, the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance and the inside of the operation unit 400 via the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate or for the pressing operation unit 405 to be difficult because of the intrusion of foreign matter. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Furthermore, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, whichever direction in the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 Since it is possible to make contact even at a position, even if the pressure operation unit 405 is inclined and pressed (presses a position deviated to the outer periphery than the center of the pressure operation unit 405), it reliably contacts the dial operation unit 401 Thus, the rotary drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, since the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 contact in an annular shape, the load from the press operation unit 405 can be widely dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the press operation unit 405 Impact resistance can be further enhanced.

  In addition, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to be lower in the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, The contact area can be relatively increased in comparison, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed radially outward in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, and the concentration of the load can be prevented. The loadability and the impact resistance can be surely enhanced, and the durability of the operation unit 400 can be enhanced, and the occurrence of problems during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of rotating in the forward and reverse directions, not only the dial operating unit 401 is simply rotated but also it is easily stopped at a predetermined position, The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and can achieve the above-described effects can be embodied with certainty.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the dish unit 300 provided with the upper tray 301 for storing gaming balls, the strength and rigidity of the dish unit 300 is high in order to reliably store a large number of gaming balls. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a blow to the operation unit 400 (the pressing operation unit 405), and to make it easy to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400.

[1-2 G. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as viewed from the rear. The handle device 500 of this embodiment is, as shown in the drawing, on the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 through the lower opening 330b of the lower tray side cover 330 in the tray unit 300. A handle base 502 fixed at a cylindrical shape and having a front end rounded in a direction perpendicular to the axis, a handle body 504 disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 rotatably relatively to the handle base 502, and a front surface of the handle body 504 And a front end cover 506 fixed to the handle base 502 and rotatably supporting the handle body 504 in cooperation with the handle base 502.

  In the handle device 500, the rear end and the front end are rotatably supported by the inner base 508 attached to the front of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle main body 504, and the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506 A shaft member 510 having a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 meshing with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a rotatable integrally with the transmission gear 511 And a rotational position detection sensor 512 held between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

  Furthermore, the handle device 500 has one end attached to the inner base 508 and the other end attached to the transmission gear 511, with the detection shaft 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 in the clockwise direction in a front view via the transmission gear 511. An auxiliary spring 514 for biasing, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, and a firing stop switch 518 attached to a different position on the rear surface of the inner base 508 with respect to the touch sensor 516; A single-shot button 520 rotatably supported to operate the firing stop switch 518, one end attached to the handle base 502 and the other end attached to the handle main body 504, the handle main body 504 in an initial rotational position (counterclockwise in front view Urge to return to the rotating end) A handle return spring 522 that includes a.

  As illustrated, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 according to the present embodiment is configured to have a rear end cylindrically extended rearwardly from a front end that is open on the front side and bulges backward. Three axially extending grooves 502a are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape. The three groove portions 502 a of the handle base 502 are one at the upper side, two at the lower side, and unevenly spaced with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three ridges 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. It is arranged. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502 a fits with the protrusion 143.

  In the handle unit 500, an arc-shaped slit 504a disposed concentrically with the rotation axis is formed in the handle main body 504, and three mounting bosses 506a protruding rearward are formed in the front end cover 506. The mounting bosses 506 a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504 a of the handle body 504. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 504 a in the handle main body 504 abuts on the mounting boss 506 a of the front end cover 506, whereby the rotation range of the handle main body 504 is restricted.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the handle main body 504 is formed with a locking projection 504b that protrudes rearward, and the other end (front end side) of the coil-like handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking projection 504b. By being locked, the handle main body 504 is biased in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by a handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 at one end side.

  The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 is inclined so that its attachment surface faces the outer side (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above, so the handle attached via the handle bracket 140 The device 500 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical surface of the pachinko machine 1) and the door frame It is attached and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle device 500, and can easily perform the turning operation without feeling discomfort in the turning operation.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the handle main body 504 (the handle device 500) is rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is rotated via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft 512a is to be rotated. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes in accordance with the rotation angle of the detection shaft 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the bat firing device 650 described later changes in accordance with the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle main body 504 and the front end cover 508 are plated with a conductive material, and when the player contacts the handle main body 504 or the like, the touch sensor 516 detects the contact. Then, when the touch sensor 516 detects the player's touch, when the handle main body 504 is rotated, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and the game ball is hit. It is possible to That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball can not be hit, It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original and reduce the load (burden) associated with the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Also, when the player presses the single-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the launch stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the launch control unit 4120 (see FIG. 153) The rotational drive can be stopped. As a result, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the gaming ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 520, the operation before the one-shot button 520 is performed. It is possible to fire the game ball with a hitting strength.

  The steering apparatus 500 according to the present embodiment electrically detects the rotation operation of the steering wheel main body 504 by the rotational position detection sensor 512 and, based on the detection of the rotational position from the rotational position detection sensor 512, Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided on the door frame 5 and the hit ball launch device 650 provided on the main body frame 3 as in a conventional pachinko machine are There is no need to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism to be linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed and to be released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration according to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. While being able to do, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of the trouble in the joint unit, to control the decrease in the player's interest due to the hitting trouble of the game ball It has to be able to bet.

[1-2 H. Foul cover unit]
Next, the fal cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 52 and FIG. FIG. 52 (A) is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door cover in an exploded manner, and FIG. 52 (A) is an exploded perspective view taken after the camera (B) disassembled the cover unit. Moreover, FIG. 53 is a front view shown in the state which removed the front cover of the foul cover unit.

  The fal cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is fired by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 described later, or a hit ball firing device 650. The game ball (Fall ball) which has not reached the inside of the game area 1100 despite this is guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The fowl cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 open on the front side and having a flow path of a plurality of gaming balls therein, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 52B, the cover base 542 of the far cover unit 540 is disposed at the upper right corner in the rear view and is in communication with the first ball inlet 542a penetrating in the front-rear direction and the first ball inlet 542a. A first ball passage 542b extending toward the front end of the base 542 to the right in front view, and a second ball inlet 542c disposed outside the first ball inlet 542a (right side in rear view) and larger than the first ball inlet 542a And a second ball passage 542d which is in communication with the second ball inlet 542c and which extends downward and is lowered toward the lower right corner of the front view inside the cover base 542. The first ball inlet 542 a and the second ball inlet 542 c are configured such that the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 with the door frame 5 closed to the main frame 3. And are respectively formed at opposite positions. In the second ball passage 542d of the cover base 542, as shown in the figure, the height of the portion extending in the left and right direction along the lower end is about three times the height of the outer diameter of the gaming ball. A housing space 546 capable of housing a predetermined amount of gaming balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 can communicate with the far ball inlet 542e disposed at the substantially central upper portion in the lateral direction and opened upward, and the far ball inlet 542e, and can guide the game ball to the upper portion near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. And the ball passage 542f. In addition, the cover base 542 is provided with an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball inlet 542c. The opening and closing operation piece 542 g rotates the opening and closing crank 793 by contacting the spherical abutment portion 793 d of the opening and closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, is disposed at the upper left corner in front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 540, and penetrates in the front and rear direction And a second ball outlet 544b disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicating with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 540 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper countersink supply port 310 c of the tray unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the second ball outlet 544 b is connected to the rear end of the lower flat ball supply rod 310 h in the pan unit 300 through the ball passage opening 110 f of the door frame base main body 110.

  The far cover unit 540 of this example is the first ball outlet through the first ball passage 542 b for the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542 a. It can be supplied to the upper tray 301 through the upper tray ball supply port 310c of the tray unit 300 from 544a. In addition, the foul cover unit 540, the game ball supplied to the second ball inlet 542c from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700, through the second ball passage 542d second ball outlet It can be supplied to the lower tray 302 from the lower tray ball supply rod 310h and the lower tray ball supply port 310g of the tray unit 300 from 544b (see FIG. 82).

  Furthermore, although the details of the fal cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the fal ball inlet 542 e is positioned below the far space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball launch device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a far ball and falls down the far space 626, it is received by the far ball inlet 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges the game ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the far ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d (supply ) Can be.

  Further, the fal cover unit 540 of this example forms a side surface of the second ball passage 542 d on the upstream side (left side in a front view) of the accommodation space 546, and the cover base 542 is pivotable by the game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. The rocking member 548 pivotally supported at the same time, a full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting the rocking of the rocking member 548, and a spring for urging the rocking member 548 in a non-detection state by the full tank detection sensor 550 552 and. As shown in FIG. 53, the lower end of the pivoting member 548 is pivotally supported by the cover base 542 and the upper end is pivoted to the left in front view, and is substantially vertical. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. The swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a substantially vertical position. Further, the swinging member 548 has a detection piece 548a projecting outward on the side opposite to the housing space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. .

  Furthermore, the fal cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542 d, and a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 covering the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 in rear view. , And can remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to circulation of gaming balls.

  In this example, the game balls paid out from the winning ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the far cover unit 540, When the game ball is further paid out from the winning ball unit 700 in a state where the inside of the upper plate 301 is full, it stays in the first ball passage 542b of the far cover unit 540, and the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770 further. When the inside of the normal passage 773 in the upper part of the space is also full, gaming balls are distributed to the full tank passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79). Second ball inlet 542c of the far cover unit 540, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 5 It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via 4b.

  Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 is filled with gaming balls, the game balls can not be released from the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540, and stagnated in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. The game ball will be stored. Furthermore, as game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and a large number of game balls are stored in the storage space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548, resisting the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swinging member 548 moves to the left. Then, when the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 is stopped on the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 153). The user is notified that the player is urged to discharge the gaming balls in the dish unit 300 to the outside.

  In addition, when the gaming ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to the substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the detection of the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor 550 It becomes non-detection, and the payout of the game ball from the winning ball unit 700 is resumed.

[1-2 I. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. FIG. 54 (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 55 is a rear view of the ball feeding unit. 56 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 56 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit with the rear case removed and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 57 (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, and (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member as viewed from the front. (D) is an explanatory view showing the operation of the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the gaming balls supplied from the upper tray 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the ball launching device 650 and the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301. The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 can be removed to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper tray ball removal button 341.

  In this ball feed unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper bowl ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 A box-shaped front cover 581 having a through opening 581a and a ball outlet 581b opened to the lower side of the opening 581a, and the rear end of the front cover 581 is closed and the front is opened. The rear cover 582 has a striking ball supply port 582a for supplying to the striking ball launch device 650 the gaming ball which penetrates in the longitudinal direction and enters from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581, a rear cover 582 and a front cover A partition 58 for pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and partitioning the entrance 581 a and the ball outlet 581 b on the rear side of the front cover 581. The ball removal member 583 having a and the gaming balls on the partition 583a of the ball removal member 583 are sent one by one to the ball hitting supply port 582a of the back cover and extend in the vertical direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582 A ball feeding member 584 rotatably supported around the axis and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for turning the ball feeding member 584 are provided. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 584 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, and the ball feeding member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584 and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right. It is arranged.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 has an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the center of rotation of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, is extended forward from 581c. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding channel 344b in the upper countersinking base 344 It is formed to close the.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 divides the space between the inlet 581 a and the ball outlet 581 b below the inlet 581 a, and the partition 583 a whose upper surface is lowered in the direction of the ball feeding member 584; Around an axis extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 584 and bending in a V shape toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b from near the middle in the vertical direction and the lower end extends in the front and rear direction , A rod-like operating rod 583c projecting forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 583b, and a rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c And a weight portion 583d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side to the partition portion 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed to project forward through the arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 54), and the ball feeding opening of the door frame base main body 110 It comes in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper disc ball withdrawal slider 343 in the upper disc ball ejection mechanism 340 of the disc unit 300 via the disc 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a blocking portion 584a having a fan shape in plan view centering on a rotation axis centering on the entrance 581a and the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 and extending in the vertical direction It has a ball holding portion 584b which is recessed in a circular arc shape from the rear end to the rotary shaft side, and a rod-shaped collar portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are respectively formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to be able to hold one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 rotates around the axis of rotation by moving the collar portion 584c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the left-right direction. ing.

  In the ball feed member 584, the supply position is in the direction in which the ball holding portion 584b is in communication with the hitting ball supply port 582a at the same time as the blocking portion 584a faces the partition 583a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition 583a. It is pivoted between the facing holding position. When the ball feed member 584 is at the supply position, the game balls held by the ball holding portion 584b are supplied from the ball hitting supply port 582a to the ball striking and launching device 650, and the game entered into the partition 583a from the entrance 581a. The movement of the ball toward the ball holding portion 584b (ball hitting supply port 582a) is blocked by the blocking portion 584a, and the ball remains on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 584 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition 583a, and the ball holding portion 584b has the end portion on the flange portion 584c side closing the hitting supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Also, the ball feed unit 580 has a ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of a ball feed solenoid 585, and movement of the tip of the ball feed movement rod 586 that is swung in the vertical direction A ball feed crank 587 is provided, which pivots about an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 about an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed actuating rod 586 and extends in the left and right direction with an engaging portion 587a, and a side engaged with the ball feed actuating rod 586 of the engaging portion 587a. A shaft portion 587b rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582, and a ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. And a transmission portion 587c engaged with a rod-like collar portion 584c (see FIG. 56) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center.

  The ball feed unit 580 of this example transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 586, which is oscillated by the driving of a ball feeding solenoid 585 which advances and retracts in the vertical direction, by a ball feeding actuating rod 586 and a ball feeding crank 587. The 584 can be turned. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and is pivoted downward. In the state, the ball feed member 584 is at the supply position. Also, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven, the tip of the ball feed actuating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and is pivoted upward so that the ball feed member 584 pivots to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feed solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 584 is received. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the ball hitting device 650 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 in the ball feed unit 580 is controlled by the launch control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 654.

  In addition, the ball extraction member 583 rotatably supported by the ball feeding unit 580 in this example is configured to apply a moment so as to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by the weight portion 583 c. The forward movement of the actuating rod 583 c abuts against the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper disc ball withdrawal slider 343 in the upper disc ball ejection mechanism 340 of the disc unit 300, thereby restricting its rotation. In normal times, the dividing portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 divides the space between the entrance 581a and the ball removing hole 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball removing hole 581b. Then, when the player presses the upper countersink releasing button 341 of the upper countersink removing mechanism 340 in the countersink unit 300 downward, the upper countersink removing slider 343 slides downward with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, the actuating member 583c moves downward with the contact piece 343a of the upper ball ball extracting mechanism 340, so that the ball removing member 583 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front and the entrance by the partition 583a. The partition between 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the gaming ball entering from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet flow path 344c of the upper tray ball outlet base 344 of the dish unit 300. , And is discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 302.

  In addition, since the contact piece 343a of the upper disc ball removal slider 343 with which the operation rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 is in contact is biased upward by a coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a Also, the impact can be absorbed by a coil spring that biases the upper ball ball withdrawal slider 343 via the actuating rod 583c, so that breakage of the ball withdrawal member 583 and the like can be prevented, and the gaming ball is It can be prevented that the partition part 583a bounces back.

  Further, in the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, a rectangular attachment recess 582b (see FIG. 56B, etc.) recessed forward is formed at the upper right on the back cover 582a of the back cover 582 in the back view. And the tamperproof member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud preventing member 588 of the ball feeding unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 582 a of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the entire outer shape of the fraud preventing member 588 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the opposite end from the approximate center in the vertical direction at the tip on the left side in the rear view. The upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c which are divided up and down with a dividing line 588a extending a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side) and the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c mutually V-shaped formed between the upper piece 588 b and the lower piece 588 c by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588 b in the direction (backward) perpendicular to the general surface of the tamperproof member 588 so as to move away And an inclined portion 588e which is formed at the tip of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and is inclined toward the cut portion 588d.

  As shown in the figure, in the fraud prevention member 588, the base end side of the upper piece 588b is bent so that the tip of the upper piece 588b (left end in rear view) moves backward, so that the cut portion 588d The wire Iw attached to the incorrect gaming ball I is inserted into the V-shaped interior, which is formed in a V-shape in plan view. In the cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, the lower side of the upper piece portion 588b and the upper side of the lower piece portion 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the proximal end It is formed as.

  The inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and can guide the wire Iw attached to the incorrect gaming ball I by the inclined portion 588e into the cutting portion 588d. It is supposed to be. In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, the fraud prevention member 588 is attached from the rear side in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 as illustrated, and the cut portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b in the rear cover 582 A portion corresponding to the portion where the portion is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction, and at the same time, it communicates with the striking ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in such a shape that the hitting ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

  According to this fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I with the wire Iw is supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the ball striking device 650, and the ball striking device 650 causes the illegal game ball I to be played on the game area of the gaming board 4. When driven into the interior 1100, the illegal gaming ball I fired by the striking device 650 moves along the launch rail 660 diagonally to the upper left in front view, and between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 It tries to penetrate into the game area 1100 through. At this time, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the force of the hit game ball I, and unlike the movement trajectory of the illegal game ball I, the wire Iw is a passage of the game ball It will move along the route connecting the shortest distance inside. Therefore, the wire Iw extended from the plate unit 300 through the hitting supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 to the hitting launch device 650 side moves the gaming ball I in the upper left direction (upper right direction in rear view) in front view Then, to move onto the shortest route, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the back surface view of the hitting ball supply port 582a, and is moved into the mounting recess 582b formed in the back view upper right side of the ball hitting supply port 582a. And wire rod Iw which moved to the part (inside of attachment recess 582b) which extended to the right by back view of hitting supply port 582a is a cutting part by a pair of inclined parts 588e of fraud prevention member 588 arranged in the position concerned After being guided into 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the momentum of the incorrect game ball I.

  As a result, the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I is pulled by the force of the illegal gaming ball I in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (left direction in front view) by the cutting portion 588d of the tamperproof member 588 In this state, friction and shear force are applied by the cutting portion 588d to cut the wire Iw (see FIG. 57D). At this time, since the momentum of the illegal gaming ball I with the wire rod Iw is reduced by the friction acting on the wire rod Iw, the portion between the outer rail 1111 and the firing rail 660 does not enter the gaming area 1100. It will be discharged through the

  Therefore, since the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, a fraudulent act is performed by the illegal gaming ball I with the wire Iw in the gaming area 605. It is possible to prevent being cursed. In addition, even if an illegal game ball I intrudes into the game area 1100, as described above, since the wire Iw can be cut by the anti-corruption member 588, an illegal action can not be performed. Even if the wire Iw can not be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire Iw bites into the V-shaped cutting portion 588d to attenuate the force of the illegal game ball I, thereby reducing the game area 1100. Since it is possible to prevent intrusion into the inside, it is possible to prevent fraud from being conducted.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301 and supplied to the ball feed unit 580, and then the player operates the handle device 500 provided on the front of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650 by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580, and the game ball is hit into the game area 1100 by the ball hitting and firing apparatus 650. The game is performed in the game area 1100 which is made visible through the game, and the player can be entertained, and the feed mechanism (the ball feed member 584 or the ball feed solenoid 585) is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and the discharging mechanism (ball removing member 583), and the ball feeding unit 580 is disposed. The ball feed member 584 and the ball hitting and firing device 650 also come close to each other as much as possible, and remain on the ball feed member 584 when the game ball in the upper tray 301 is ejected by operating the upper disc ball release button 341. The number of gaming balls can be reduced as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 including the ball removing member 583 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, it is possible to increase the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300, and the game ball is hit. The game balls in the upper plate 301 can be eliminated early by the operation, and the upper plate 301 can be prevented from being filled with the game balls at an early stage, and the game balls in the upper plate 301 can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to reduce the feeling of inconvenience for the player and to suppress the decrease in interest, and also to miniaturize the plate unit 300 while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, so The area 1100 can be made large (wide) to be the pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of the player.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with the ball pulling member 583, the ball feeding member 580 can be compared with the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 separately. The 584 and the ball removing member 583 can be attached, and the time and effort for assembling can be simplified, and the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and a defect occurs in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 Even if the ball feeding unit 580 is replaced, the problem can be solved easily.

  Furthermore, since the ball feed unit 580 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper disc ball is compared to that provided with the ball feed unit 580 on the main body frame 3 side. There is no need to configure the transmission mechanism (upper disc ball extraction mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the extraction button 341 to the ball extraction member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 so as to straddle the openable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (every time the door frame 5 is opened compared to the case where the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side) Blocking of the upper ball ball withdrawal mechanism 340) can prevent the possibility of premature wear of the transmission mechanism, causing malfunction or breakage, and reliability for operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feed unit 580, etc. And durability can be enhanced.

  Further, since the upper disc ball release button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 simply by pressing the upper disc ball release button 341 downward, or the upper plate 301 It is possible to stop the game balls from being discharged from the game player, and to allow the player to easily operate the ball extraction operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball extraction button 341.

  In addition, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is made movable by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 which slides in the vertical direction according to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, the partition 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper countersink slider 343 and the partitions 583a can be reduced as much as possible. The unit 580 can be downsized, and the pachinko machine 1 can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

  Further, the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 is urged upward, and when the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 is at the raised position, the partitioning portion 583 a of the ball extracting member 583 brings the entry port 581 a into communication with the hitting supply port 582 a. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously abuts against the partition portion 583a, the impact can be mitigated by the biasing force acting on the upper tray ball withdrawal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a The durability of 583) can be enhanced. In addition, since the impact applied to the partition 583a can be alleviated by the biasing force acting on the upper flat ball slide slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to collide even if it collides with the partition 583a. Thus, the ball feeding unit 580 or the like can be damaged and the occurrence of a defect can be suppressed.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, it is related to the movement of the partition portion 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a as compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. The friction loss can be reduced, and the operation of the upper bowl ball withdrawal button 341 can be lightened to improve the operability, and the movement range of the partition portion 583a can be reduced in plane projection, as in the above. The effects and effects of

  In addition, since the partition 583a is rotated by its own weight in the direction to connect the inlet 581a and the ball outlet 581b, if a problem occurs in the partition 583a or the upper tray ball withdrawal mechanism 340 Is rotated by its own weight and the inlet 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication with each other, and the game ball in the upper tray 301 hits the ball even though the upper tray ball withdrawal button 341 is not operated. Since it is discharged to the player side without being sent to the device 650 side, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a problem, and to the pachinko machine 1 having no problem. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by moving it.

  Furthermore, since the ball removing member 583 is rotated through the pivoting collar portion 583b of the dividing portion 583a, when the game ball collides with the partitioning portion 583a, the pivoting collar portion whose impact is bent It is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotation shaft by dispersing the pressure by the 583 b or absorbing it by the bending of the rotation flange portion 583 b, so that the durability of the ball removing member 583 can be reduced. It can be enhanced.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper tray 301, when discharging the gaming ball in the upper tray 301, the right and left sides of the gaming ball in the ball feeding unit 580 The movement of the direction can be minimized, and the game ball can be discharged well by improving the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580. In addition, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 can be used as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to suppress the ball feeding unit 580 from being unnecessarily enlarged.

  Furthermore, the tamperproof member 588 is attached to the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the tamperproof member 588 (cut portion 588d) is disposed as close as possible to the ball striking device 650. As a result, the wire Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I in the fastest (impulsive) state immediately after being fired by the ball striking device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d While the wire rod Iw is pulled fast (strongly) against it, the wire rod Iw can be cut reliably and at the same time, the impetus of the momentum of the game ball I is damped and prevented from entering the game area 1100. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed by the fraudulent game ball I.

  In addition, since the tamperproof member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting recess 582b which is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rear cover 582, the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed. The upper piece portion 588b bent rearward can be configured not to protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the worker is injured during assembly by the upper piece portion 588b of the tamperproof member 588. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I, the upper upper piece portion 588b is bent backward with the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material. Since the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed, the cutting portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. It is possible to suppress the increase.

[1-2 J. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 22 and FIG. This glass unit 590 has an opening of substantially the same size as the gaming window 101, and an annular octagonal unit frame 592 molded with synthetic resin, and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592 respectively. And a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 108). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 has two stop pieces 592a disposed at the upper portions of the left and right sides and extending outward in the form of a plate, and a plate-like engagement extending in the lateral direction along the lower end and extending downward. And a stop piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end with the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be engaged from behind and above Then, the outer periphery of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support stepped portion 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the locking piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. The base unit 100 is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[1-2 K. Shaped decoration in the door frame]
Next, the shaped decoration in the door frame 5, that is, the shaped decoration will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 58. FIG. 58 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame at a substantially central position in the vertical direction. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls are vertically arranged below the vertically elongated oval shaped game window 101. , In a front view right side of the lower plate 302, for driving the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 disposed behind the transparent glass unit 590 for closing the gaming window 101. A handle device 500 is arranged. In addition, the door frame 5 surrounds the lower side of the game window 101 while the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the upper decoration unit 280 are disposed so as to surround the left and right and upper side of the game window 101. The tray unit 300 is disposed as shown.

  The door frame 5 has a greatly different appearance on both sides of the game window 101, and the right side has a natural rock-like appearance by the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. While the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 viewed from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 on the left side is a sharp and artificial metallic appearance ing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the door frame 5 has different amounts of forward projection between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side decoration unit 200 is the left side decoration unit. Protruding forward more than 240. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a loosely curved planar shape.

  Thereby, when the door frame 5 of this example is viewed from the right front, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 look like volumes similar to each other (see FIG. 19), but the left front When viewed from the top, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240 and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is hardly visible, and can give different impressions depending on the player's standing position with respect to the pachinko machine 1 It is supposed to be. That is, since the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1 and can be made to look like a pachinko machine with different models, the player etc. The appeal to the player can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted to the player's attention.

  In addition, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is left and right asymmetrical, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in multiple rows in the left and right direction in the island facility of the game hall, the appearance of the entire island facility looks super solid An alternative appearance (atmosphere) can be provided to give the player a rhythmic impression by alternately arranging right side decoration units 200 and left side decoration units 240 of different forms to suppress turning-off. It is possible to make the player's attention strongly by raising the appeal of the player.

  In addition, the door frame 5 causes the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, etc. provided in each unit 200, 240, 280, 300 to emit light, thereby the game window 101 The light emitting decoration can be made with any light emitting color so as to surround the. Also, among the LEDs mounted on the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214b, 216b arranged behind the side flash lenses 204, 246. , 254 b, 256 can be turned on or off to change the mode of the light emission decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[1-2 L. Luminescent decoration in the door frame]
Then, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 is mainly demonstrated with reference to FIG.59 and FIG.60. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of the light emitting decoration LEDs in the door frame. Moreover, FIG. 60 is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, and 300 is provided with a decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, and 322 on which an LED is mounted. The outer periphery of can be decorated with light emission.

  The right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery except the lower side of the game window 101 as described above. The lens units 210a and 250a are disposed along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centered around the lower portion in the left-right direction center of the game window 101 Are disposed between the circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

  In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed of a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces, while the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 The circumferential lens portion 250a is formed by one smooth and loose curved surface. In the door frame 5, on the rear side of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are disposed. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a between the circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 is disposed.

  Further, the door frame 5 is on the back side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the right side upper decoration substrate 214, the right side lower decoration substrate 216, and the left side upper decoration substrate 254. And the left side lower decoration substrate 256 is disposed, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front of each decoration substrate 214, 216, 254, 256 ing.

  The upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, and circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a LED 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a disposed at the corresponding position, and LED 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b disposed at the position corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246) . In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b have relatively high luminance. It is supposed to be an LED. In addition, two LEDs 214c disposed at the upper right end of the decoration substrate 214 on the right side are a green LED and a red LED.

  In this example, the surface of the upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the upper left side decorative substrate 254, and the lower left side decorative substrate 256 is white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing) ), White paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that light from the player is reflected by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and worsening in appearance, and at the same time, the board reflects the light from the LEDs 210a and 210b emitting light to the player. The lenses 210 and 250 can be illuminated and decorated more brightly.

  As described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the door frame 5 at the top of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center in the left-right direction. It is formed to decorate the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 has an upper central lens 284 disposed at the center in the left-right direction, an annular central annular lens portion 282 b disposed on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and an outer side outside the central annular lens portion 282 b. And four extending frame lens portions 282c extended thereto. The front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side in front view is covered by the upper lower decorative cover 294.

  The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central decorative substrate 288 disposed on the rear side of the central ring lens portion 282 b of the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and an upper lens 282 extending laterally beyond the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decorative substrate 290 disposed on the rear side of the upper central decorative substrate 288. The upper central decorative substrate 288 has a plurality of LEDs 288 a corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288 b corresponding to the central ring lens portion 282 b mounted on the front, and the upper central lens 284 and the central ring lens portion 282 b And can be separately lighted and decorated. Further, on the upper side decorative substrate 290, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c are mounted on the front face, and it is possible to make each extension frame lens portion 282c emit light and decorate respectively . The LEDs 288 a, 288 b and 290 a of the upper central decorative substrate 288 and the upper side decorative substrate 290 are full color LEDs.

  Subsequently, in the plate unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces, and the appearance is continuous with the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. In the dish unit 300, the upper dish decoration substrate 322 is disposed on the back side of the upper dish front decoration member 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper dish decoration substrate 322 An upper dish right upper decoration member 319 for decoration of the right side portion and the front outer periphery of the upper dish ball release button 341 can be luminously decorated. In this example, the LEDs 322a of the upper dish decoration substrate 322 are full color LEDs.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the pan unit 300 includes a translucent annular dial operation unit 401 and a translucent cylindrical press operation unit disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. A dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration substrate 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432 d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED of high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, and the same function and effect as those described above can be achieved.

  By the way, in the door frame 5 of this example, the right side decoration unit 200 covering the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101 and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 correspond. The second annular group 103 in which the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are disposed outside the first annular group 102 and the first annular group 102 (within the range of the hatch in FIGS. 59 and 60) close to the game window 101. (In the range of cross hatch in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60), the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are lighted appropriately, so as to surround the game window 101 approximately concentrically A plurality of (two in this example) light emitting decorations can be made. In other words, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 emit light, the hatch area near the game window 101 is annularly decorated to emit light, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 When all lights are emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is annularly decorated to emit light.

  Moreover, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (the radiation lenses 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 In FIG. 59 and FIG. 60, a radially extending group 104 (FIG. 59 and FIG. 60) radially extending around the lower center of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). By appropriately emitting the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the gaming window 101 can be decorated to emit light radially, and in addition, the annular group by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 The light emission decoration can be made to be divided in the circumferential direction.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c on the right-side upper decoration substrate 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right-side decoration unit 200 is used as a notification group 105, and this LED 214c is made to emit light as appropriate. It is possible to notify various information to a person or an employee of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 288a and 288b corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and the central ring lens portion 282b in the upper decoration unit 280 for decorating the upper center of the game window 101 The upper central group 106 is an upper central group 106 for light emission decoration. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 288 a and 288 b of the upper central group 106, the upper central portion of the game window 101 can be illuminated and decorated, and the criteria for annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 It can be made to emit light decoration that becomes a point. In addition, the LEDs 290 a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282 c in the upper decorative unit 280 are the upper central side group 107 for emitting and decorating the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundaries between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be illuminated and decorated.

  Furthermore, in the door frame 5, the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 corresponding to the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 arranged under the game window 101 It is considered as the dish group 108. Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operating unit 401 and the pressing operating unit 405 of the operation unit 400 disposed at the upper center of the tray unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 It is considered as an operation unit group 109 for emitting light and decorating. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated to emit light, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be obtained. It is possible to notify the player.

  The light emission decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108 and 109 to which they respectively belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the twenty LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are provided for each of the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 by 102a to 102j. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250, which are divided into 10 systems. It is done.

  Also, the twenty LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems of 104a to 104h for each of the side flash lenses 204, 246 (the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250). ing. The two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, the upper side 105a and the lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems of a central portion 106a, a right portion 106b, and a left portion 106c. Further, the seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems of the right side 107a and the left side 107b.

  Furthermore, the eleven LEDs 322a belonging to the upper tray group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d at the front and rear and left and right. In the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109, four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405, and the LEDs 430b form a pair. , And one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 are divided into three systems of one system. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are divided into 42 systems. ing.

  By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a and 432d are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a and 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c, to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong, are further provided with three independent RGB systems to emit full color light. In the light emission control, there are 84 systems that are three times as large. The LEDs 288a and 430b are high brightness white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light at high brightness, so Two systems are connected, and in actual light emission control, eight systems are doubled.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs with normal luminance and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. Moreover, LED214c is made into green LED and red LED, and belongs to two system 105a, 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system. Therefore, the same number of ten systems is used in actual light emission control.

  Accordingly, the actual number of systems in light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and the respective LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, Lighting and flickering are controlled by dynamic lighting for each system to which 430b and 432d belong, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control) . By this, it is possible to perform expressive light emission effects.

  As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (the same color or similar colors are sequentially emitted) so that the light spreads outward around the game window 101. On the other hand, light emitting effects such as converging from the outside toward the game window 101 by causing the second ring group 103 to sequentially emit light (in the same color or similar colors sequentially) from the second ring group 103 to the first ring group 102; Alternatively, by causing the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light simultaneously, it is possible to perform a light emission effect or the like that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

  Further, by cooperating with the LEDs (not shown in detail) provided on the game board 4, the LEDs of the game board 4, the LEDs of the first ring group 102 near the game window 101, and the first ring group 102 With the LEDs of the second ring group 103 disposed outside the display, it is possible to perform a more expressive luminous effect, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and to entertain the player and make it interesting. Can be suppressed.

  Also, in the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, and the lower group 108, the lines 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j are appropriately lit to emit the upper portion of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. It is possible to have a light effect such that light moves toward the central lens 284 or light moves from the upper central lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 are divided into ten groups 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions), but the present invention is not limited thereto. If it is divided into about eight systems (about eight divisions), it is possible to favorably perform light emission effect such that light circulates on the outer periphery of the game window 101.

  Furthermore, by emitting only the radial group 104, the light emission effect of emitting light radially around the game window 101 is performed, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. By making it emit light that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or making the radial group 104 emit light (light on / blink) while emitting light from the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 It is possible to give a light emission effect that gives an accent to the light emission decoration of Further, by causing each system 104 a to 104 h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to perform light emission effect such that the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiating lens portions 210 b and 250 b) circulate.

  In addition, by making the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105 emit light, the player is given a chance or a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability changing gaming state, a time saving gaming state, a probability changing time short playing status , Etc.) can be performed.

  Furthermore, by causing each system 108 a to 108 d of the lower group 108 to emit light appropriately, it is possible to perform light emission effect to embellish the upper plate 301 or to emit light in association with the operation group 109. A light emission effect can be performed to prompt the user to operate the unit 405. In addition, by causing the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 to emit light as appropriate, the operation of the dial operation unit 401 is prompted or the light emission effect for guiding the rotational operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is provided. can do. Furthermore, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that urges the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the system 109c of the operation group 109 are full color LEDs, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to perform light emission effects with different gradations such as light emission color and brightness for each of 109, and for each of the systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c. A rich luminous effect can be performed.

[1-3. Overall configuration of body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 67. FIG. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. Also, FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and seen from the front, FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and seen from the rear FIG. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side in a front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. In addition, the main unit frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and also has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4; Upper shaft support bracket 630 and lower shaft support bracket 640 for supporting the door frame 5 by being attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left side end portion of the front view 600 and supported by the outer frame 2; Ball hitting device 650 for hitting the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front of the game board, and attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 And the flow of game balls from the winning ball unit 700 to the tray unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is attached to the front of the main frame 3 Open ball exit It includes a unit 790, a.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards for controlling the electric parts provided on the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 And a back cover 900 covering the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main frame base 600, and a side crime prevention plate 950 covering the left end of the main frame base 600 in a front view And a lock device 1000 attached to the right side end in a front view of the main body frame base for opening and closing locking of the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and opening and closing locking of the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 68 and FIG. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of a main body frame base in the main body frame. FIG. 69 is a rear perspective view of a main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, and the outer shape in a front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 It is formed to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 65). Thus, when attaching the main body frame base 600 to the main body frame base 600 at the time of attaching the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, etc. The rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the height of the depth D in the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily mounted. Can be improved.

  As shown in the figure, the main frame base 600 has a gaming board holding opening capable of fittingly holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 by penetrating the inside of the range of about 3⁄4 of the whole from the top to the bottom in a rectangular shape 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming a front end outer periphery excluding the front side left side of the main body frame base 600, a recess from the front of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear; A door frame protrusion 110c that protrudes backward from the lower end of the lower frame, an upper bent protrusion 167 that protrudes backward from the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and an open side that protrudes backward from the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 And an engagement groove 603 into which the outer bent projection piece 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed downward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 A peripheral wall portion 605 which protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and which forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601 is provided. The free end portion (upper and lower left end portions in a front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 is connected by the peripheral wall portion 605, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is supposed to be.

  In addition, the main frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604 and the game board placement unit 606 on which the game board 4 is placed; Positioning projections 607 that project upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engage with the outer ball discharge grooves 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 and are formed at predetermined positions on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 in front view The game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the fastener 1120 is fastened, and the plate shape which descends downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 are provided. The positioning projection 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be engaged with the out ball discharging groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict movement of the lower end of the game board 4 in the left and right direction and backward. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict movement of the right side in a front view of the game board 4 in the front-rear direction by locking the game board fastener 1120 of the game board 4 There is. In addition, although the details will be described later, the movement of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the game board 4 in a front view.

  Furthermore, the body frame base 600 is a bracket attachment for attaching the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 to the rear surface of the free end (upper and lower left end in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame 602. Portion 610 (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 etc., the metal fitting mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the vertical and horizontal directions on the front side, and the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 should be attached with sufficient strength. It is possible to Further, the body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall 604 in front view, and formed in the lower left in front view of the cylinder lock through hole 611 The U-shaped fitting groove 612 which fits with the positioning projection 110d which protrudes backward from the door frame base main body 110 in the above, and the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting and firing device 650 formed on the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in front view And a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602. On the front side, the hitting and launching device 650 is attached from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting and launching device 650 is accommodated in the solenoid receiving recess 613. In a state where the hitting and launching apparatus 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 63 and FIG. 98 etc. A downwardly extending far space 626 is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned at the lower part of the foul space 626, and descends the foul space 626 A game ball is received at the ball entry 542 e of the far cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower tray 302 of the pan unit 300.

  Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are formed on the upper side of the opening 614 and on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left than the left and right center And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by the relay terminal board cover 692 (see FIG. 66 etc.), and the lower rear wall 604 through the opening 692 a of the relay terminal board cover 692. The main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear face of the rear face face the front side. The plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting the sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a barrier on the front side.

  In addition, the main unit frame base 600 rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 in the vicinity of the front upper end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 which protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 in a front view and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixture 690 includes a fixed piece 690a fanning around an axial center pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixed piece 690a. And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side to be the rear end when rotated in a clockwise direction in a front view). The game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600 and then operates the operation piece 690 b to rotate the game board fixture 690 clockwise in a front view. The fixed piece 690a protrudes upward beyond the game board placement unit 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placement unit 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. In addition, the game board fixture 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b abuts against the stopper 617, and by abutting against the stopper 617, the rotational end in the counterclockwise direction in front view is restricted. It has become.

  Furthermore, a door frame open switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressure is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. In addition, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the main body frame base 600 on the lower rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached. 69), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing thereof is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the three main body frame bases 600 penetrate longitudinally in the front and rear direction inside the engagement groove 603 on the right (open side) side in a front view of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 which is penetrated in the front and rear direction below the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and aligned in the left and right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and at substantially the center in the vertical direction. Locking projections 1004 provided on the upper and lower ends of the lock device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and middle door hook holes 620 and the lock lock holes 621, respectively. The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in the front view in the front view. Then, in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. A state 1010 is projected forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is gently and diagonally lowered from the upper right end toward the approximate center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in a rear view, and the lower rear wall 604 in the approximate center in the lateral direction. The game apparatus is provided with a main frame base ball removal passage 622 which is suspended from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly upward to allow the game balls to be distributed. The body frame base ball removal passage 622 is configured such that the rear side is closed by the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and the game balls distributed in the ball removal passage 741 d in the winning ball device 740 will be described later in detail. It is distributed.

  In addition, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are disposed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the back view, and back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supporting the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for attaching the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to the front left side of the opening 614 in the front of the lower rear wall portion 604 and a lock device 1000 on the right side (open side) of the peripheral wall 605 And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for attaching the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650, the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, etc. Is formed.

[1-3 B. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support fitting 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support fitting 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws respectively to the metal fitting attachment portions 610 on the left and right rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner.

  First, the upper shaft support bracket 630 is attached to the upper bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment portion 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like attachment portion extending forward from the upper end of the attachment portion 631. A front extension portion 632, a pivot pin 633 protruding upward from near the front end of the front extension portion 632, and a pivot pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the pivot pin 633 in a front view. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63 etc.) vertically penetrated into which the is inserted and the downward movement from the front end left end of the front extension portion 632 to the open side of the door frame 5 A stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 109) for restricting the end. In the upper shaft support fitting 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extension portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 includes a door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and a lower portion of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and supports the main frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. And a main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-like mounting portion 642a that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the front from the lower end A plate-like front extension portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extension portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted And a stopper 642d which is erected upward from the left end in a front view of the door 642a and which restricts the pivoting end of the door frame 5 to the opening side. The mounting portion 642a, the forward extension portion 642b, and the stopper 642d of the door frame shaft support fitting 642 are integrally formed by bending and forming a single metal plate.

  In addition, the main frame support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main frame base 600 and extends from the lower end of the mounting portion 644a to the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. A front extension portion 644b extending forward and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 644b are provided. Also in the body frame shaft support bracket 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extension portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  In the lower shaft support 640 of this example, the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body shaft support bracket 644 overlap (contact) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame The front extension portion 642b of the pivot support 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame support bracket 644 are attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. It is supposed to be.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are mounted on the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640. Are coaxially positioned, and the main frame support hole of the main frame support 644 in the lower support 640 is fitted and inserted into the support projection 21 d of the lower support 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, after the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is By inserting the upper support fitting 20 into the support hole 20 c of the upper support fitting 20, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, when the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640 The bracket 642 c is coaxially located, and the door pin of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642 c of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640. After the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is mounted on the front extension portion 642 b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed in the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting the door frame 5, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. In this example, the upper shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when inserting the upper shaft support fitting 630 into the door frame shaft support hole 634, the shaft pin 155 is Once the upper pivot support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper pivot support member 630 vertically overlap by sliding downward, the door is slid upward by sliding the pivot pin 155. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Ball hitting launcher]
Next, the hitting and launching apparatus 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the ball striking device launcher in the main body frame. FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the ball striking and launching apparatus in the main body frame. This ball striking device firing device 650 can strike the gaming balls supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 with the strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  In the hit and fired device 650 of the present embodiment, a firing base 652 of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600 and a rotational drive shaft 654 a project forward on the lower rear surface of the launching base 652 , A hitting ball 656 fixed integrally to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and a movement locus of the tip 658 Between the launch rail 660 attached to the front of the launch base 652 and the launch rail 660 attached to the front end of the launch rail 660 extending from the predetermined position at the top to the base end as the base end at the base end A ball stop that holds the game ball at the base end of the firing rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball can not pass at the same time as the 658 is made passable. The ball 662 (the tip 658) is controlled to rotate to the side of the firing rail 660 from the hitting position where it is possible to hit the game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 by the piece 662 and the ball stopper 662 And a stopper 664.

  Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 in the bat firing device 650 reciprocates and rotates the drive shaft 654a at a strength (speed) according to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. The hitting rod 656 of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 has a fixing portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, a gentle arc extending from the fixing portion 656a, and a tip end with respect to the axial center of the driving shaft 654a. It has a collar portion 656b with the tip facing the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c that can contact the stopper 664 extending to the opposite side of the collar portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball 656 abuts against the stopper 664, the tip of the tip end 658 is pivoted toward the firing rail 660 than the hitting position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view) It is supposed to be regulated.

  In addition, the firing rail 660 of the bat firing device 650 has a loose circular arc shape in which the lower part is recessed along the lower end extension of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98). On the other hand, the center is in a V-shaped recessed shape, and the game ball hit by the hit ball 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the firing rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  In addition, the hitting and firing apparatus 650 has a stopper cover 666 covering the front surface of the stopper 664 capable of restricting the rotation end of the hitting ball 656 to the hitting position side, and rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting position. And a stopper 668 for restricting an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction in a front view). The hitting and firing apparatus 650 of this example has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, and can absorb the impact when the hitting ball 656 abuts, and suppresses the generation of noise due to the abutment. It can be done.

  When the hitting and launching apparatus 650 of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, etc. It is positioned below the upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, below the gaming board placement portion 606 (the lower side of the gaming board holding port 601), and the outside of the gaming board 4 held in the gaming board holding port 601 Between the lower end of the rail 1111 and the lower end, a far space 626 which is downwardly extended with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed. The ball hitting and firing apparatus 650 of this example is to hit the gaming ball into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 by firing the gaming ball so as to jump over the far space 626 on the left side in front view than the firing rail 660. It is possible to As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball entry 542e of the far cover unit 540 is positioned at the lower part of the far space 626. A game ball that has become a foul ball without being driven in is dropped into the foul space 626, received into the foul ball inlet 542e, and discharged to the lower tray 302.

  In addition, the striking launcher 650 is configured such that the launch solenoid 654 is driven by the launch control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle unit 500 and the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580. It is designed to be driven in synchronization with the driving of the Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 for supplying the game balls to the hit ball firing device 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and from that state the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven. When the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 to the hit ball launch device 650 side when it is released (OFF), the shooting solenoid 654 is driven substantially simultaneously with the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580 By turning on (ON), the game balls can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the firing rail 660, and the game balls can be reliably fired by rotation of the hitting ball 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of a winning ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the winning ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the winning ball unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the winning ball unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the winning ball tank and the tank rail unit in the winning ball unit, as viewed from the rear. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of a winning ball device in the winning ball unit, as disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. Further, FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a flow passage of balls in the winning ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main unit frame 3 of the present embodiment stores predetermined gaming instructions after storing gaming balls supplied from the island equipment side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facilities in the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Based on the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 is provided with a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receiving and storing gaming balls supplied from the island equipment side. And a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and aligning the gaming balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sending it downstream, and a predetermined payout of the gaming balls aligned by the tank rail unit 730. The winning ball device 740 paying out based on the instruction and the gaming ball paid out by the winning ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the upper plate 301 is paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of gaming balls It mainly comprises a full tank branch unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

  In addition, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 for closing the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and an earth metal fitting for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. The external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the award ball base 710 and the external terminal board cover 786 covering the rear side of the external terminal board 784 are provided. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 has a back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 on its rear surface and a back cover 900 fastened to the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a in a back view. And a back cover fastening hole 780b (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are provided on the upper side. As well as being disposed, a vertically extending prize ball device 740 is disposed on the left side, and a full tank branching unit 770 is disposed below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal board 784 and an external terminal board cover 786 are disposed immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a front view reverse L shape substantially corresponding to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view. It is integrally molded of transparent synthetic resin. The award ball base 710 extends inward from the rear end of the circumferential wall 710a extending inward from the rear end of the circumferential wall 710a and is disposed substantially in the same plane. And a back wall 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall 710a is formed to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the back wall 710b is recessed from the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, it can form a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 ing.

  In addition, the prize ball base 710 is provided with a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, and a lateral terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate An external terminal plate attachment portion 712 for attaching the cover 786, a plurality of attachment locking portions 713 for attaching the tank rail unit 730 to the upper end lower end rear side of the rear wall 710b, and a vertical side rear side of the rear wall 710b A prize ball device mounting portion 714 for attaching the prize ball device 740 to the ball, a prize ball passage 715 for guiding the gaming ball dispensed from the prize ball device 740 downward adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714, and a rear wall And a mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full tank branching unit 770 at the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 is penetrated in the back and forth direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b, and a relief hole 717 for releasing the dispensing motor 744 etc. And a back cover engagement groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. In addition, although detailed description is omitted in the award ball base 710, an attachment hole, an attachment boss, etc. for attaching the award ball tank 720, the award ball device 740, etc. to the main body frame base 600, etc. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a laterally elongated box shape whose upper side is opened, and the bottom wall portion having a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view of a horizontally elongated 721, an outer peripheral wall 722 which rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall 721 and which protrudes only rearward on the right rear (the rear on the open side) in a rectangular shape in a plan view from the bottom wall 721; An outlet port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward than the bottom wall portion 721 of the right rear at 722 and opened downward, and a plate shape from the left side (axial support side) of the outlet port 723 in plan view to the left end of the award ball tank 720 Formed in the vicinity of the base end of the shaft portion 725 and on the front both ends of the outer peripheral wall portion 722 Award the tank 720 to the ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the winning balls tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  An outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of gaming balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. In addition, the winning ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the gaming balls on the bottom wall 721 roll toward the discharge port 723 It has become.

  Further, the prize ball tank 720 is provided with two ball straightening members 727 pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 in a rotatable manner. As shown in the figure, the ball straightening member 727 has one end pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight therein so that the other end hangs down by its own weight. . The ball straightening member 727 is suspended in a tank rail unit 730 described later, and the game balls flowing in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. The bowl portion 724 of the award ball tank 720 is formed to cover approximately the upper half of the tank rail unit 730 and can prevent the game ball from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730 and the tank It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the award ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lower toward the right in plan view, The right side (closer to the outlet 723) is formed to be inclined toward the rear outlet 723 in plan view. As a result, the flow of gaming balls can be made smooth, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown also in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 is provided with a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and elongated in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined depth open at the top, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is sloped so that The tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) opened downward at the left (axially supported) end, a partition wall 731b extending upward from the bottom substantially at the center in the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the front end And a plurality of locking projections 731c (see FIG. 74) which are further downwardly protruded and are locked from the upper side to the attachment locking portions 713 of the award ball base 710.

  The tank rail 731 is arranged such that the end on the right side (open side) in a front view is positioned directly below the discharge port 723 in the prize ball tank 720, and the gaming ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 is After being received, it can be rolled to the left and can be delivered from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. In addition, by locking the locking projection 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the award ball base 710, the tank rail 731 that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the award ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported at the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball retainer plate 734 for closing the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stopper which can be moved into and out of the tank rail 731 to stop the game balls in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. And an earth plate 736 disposed in the tank rail 731 and capable of contacting the gaming balls in the tank rail 731. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the gaming balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball holding plate 734 has an attachment portion 734a to which the ball stopper 735 is attached at the top, and two slits 734b which are vertically penetrated and through which the projection 735a of the ball stopper 735 can be inserted.

  In the tank rail unit 730, two ball straightening members 727 pivotally supported by the winning ball tank 720 are inserted from the upper side to the upstream side (open side) of the ball holding plate 734. The game balls discharged into the tank rail 731 from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. It can be done. Further, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game ball which has not been made one step higher by the ball straightening member 727 one more step, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower as it goes to the discharge port 731a side. Is attached to the tank rail 731.

  As illustrated, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. Thus, when the upper portion of the gaming ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the gaming balls arranged in two rows alternately receive prize balls one by one It is sent to the device 740.

  In the bottom portion of the tank rail 731 is formed a narrow groove penetrating vertically, so that foreign substances such as dust rolling in the tank rail 731 together with the gaming balls fall downward from the narrow groove. It has become. Further, although the ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not illustrated in detail, it is to be grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply substrate 851 via the grounding fitting 782 When the gaming ball contacts the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

  In addition, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stopper 735 rotatably attached to the mounting portion 734a of the ball holding plate 734, passes the projection 735a of the ball stopper 735 through the slit 734a, and is inside the tank rail 730. By inserting it, the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the projecting pieces 735a, and the supply of gaming balls to the prize ball device 740 can be stopped. There is.

  Furthermore, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the state of the game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 delivers the gaming balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. The prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710, as shown in FIGS. As shown, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is a supply passage which opens at the upper end on the rear side and extends slightly to a position slightly lower than the vertical center with a width slightly wider than the outline of the gaming ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and having a space of a predetermined size, and a lower end of the distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end on the left side (open side) of the distribution space 741b A prize ball passage 741c opened on the left side, and a ball extraction passage 741d communicating with the lower end of the distribution space 741b in the rear view right side (axial support side) and extending downward and opening on the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the award ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state of being opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a back cover 742 whose length in the vertical direction is shorter than the unit base 741 and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742 Dispensing motor 744 disposed on the front side of the plate 743 and the motor supporting plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotating shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor supporting plate 743, and is integral with the rotating shaft 744a of the dispensing motor 744 The first gear 745 rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, the second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745, and the second gear 746 meshed with the second gear 746 The third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and the payout rotation integrally rotating with the third gear 747 and disposed in the distribution space 741 b of the unit base 741 The body 748 and the dispensing rotating body 748 are integrally rotatably supported on the opposite side across the third gear 747, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. And 749.

  In addition, the winning ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of the gaming ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of gaming balls attached to the unit base 741 and circulating in the winning ball passage 741c. Sensor 751 for measuring the rotation angle, rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 which rotates integrally with the dispensing rotation body 748, and the rotation angle sensor 752 A sensor base 753 and a prize ball relay board 754 relaying the connection between the payout motor 744, the ball out switch 750, the count sensor 751, and the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110 and attached to the back surface of the back cover 742 Have.

  Furthermore, the award ball device 740 covers the award ball relay substrate 754 from the rear side, and a substrate cover 755 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742; a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749 And a gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the sensor substrate 753 covered from the rear side with the back cover 742 in between, and a supply channel earth that can contact gaming balls circulating in the supply channel 741 a of the unit base 741 A metal fitting 757, a screw 758 for fixing the dispensing motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween and for grounding the dispensing motor 744, and a back cover 742 so as to be detachably supported on the unit base 741 A detachable button 759 is provided.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 so that the open rear end of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d Is supposed to be closed. In addition, the unit base 741 has a position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a that is temporarily bulged backward, and the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be relaxed. It can be done. Further, the unit base 741 is partially notched on one side (left side in rear view) below the position where the supply passage 741 a bulges rearward and is outside the cut-out position of the supply passage 741 a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball breakage switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the count sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a longitudinal direction below the prize ball passage 741c. And a motor insertion hole 741g through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball breakage switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball breakage switch 750 forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a, and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the game ball, it is possible to detect the presence or absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741 a by the ball breakage switch 750. When the gaming ball in the supply passage 741a is not detected by the out-of-ball switch 750 (the out-of-ball state), the payout motor 744 does not rotate and the player or the hall It is reported to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between a bearing portion 741h for supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (the payout rotating body 748), and the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. Ground fitting attachment portion 741i for attaching the supply passage earth fitting 757, and a button support hole 741j disposed on the upper portion of the unit base 741 and having a detachable button 759 for mounting and demounting and supporting the back lid 742; Have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage earth fitting 757 can be in contact with the gaming balls in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage earth fitting 757 to the ground fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 is in contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped ground fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a via the supply passage ground fitting 757 is eliminated. It is possible to

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 is generally in the form of a vertically long plate, and the upper end is bulged rearward. At the top of the back cover 742 is a button insertion hole 742a for inserting the detachable button 759, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear face in the vertical direction A sensor substrate mounting portion 742c disposed below the portion 742b for mounting the sensor substrate 753, and a through hole 742d through which the dispensing rotating body 748 can pass. The relay substrate attachment portion 742 b of the back cover 742 is formed on the rear side of the earth metal fitting attachment portion 741 i of the unit base 741.

  Further, the motor support plate 743 of the award ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is in contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744 so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 can be It is possible to make it easy to dissipate heat.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three concave portions 748 a of a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and the payout rotating body By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated one by one in the recess 748a, and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749, which rotates integrally with the dispensing rotating body 748, are formed at positions corresponding to between the concave portions 748a of the dispensing rotating body 748, respectively. By detecting, it is possible to detect the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, a payout command from the main control substrate 4100, a lending command from the CR unit, etc. is input to the payout control substrate 4110, or the ball withdrawal switch 860b is operated or the payout motor 744 is performed. Is rotated, and a predetermined number of gaming balls can be paid out to the player side (upper tray 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotary shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745 is rotated, and the second gear 746 is further rotated. The third gear 747 meshing with the gear is rotated. In the third gear 747, the delivery rotating body 748 is fixed on the front side, and the rotation detection board 749 is integrally rotatably supported on the rear side, and together with the third gear 747, the delivery rotating body 748 and the rotation detection board 749 are It is supposed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in the prize ball device 740, the dispensing rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at substantially the center of the distribution space 741b. Then, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise in the rear view by the payout motor 744, the gaming balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c, and the payout rotation is performed. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741 c by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the clockwise direction from the rear view by the payout motor 744, the gaming balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the ball pulling passage 741d, and the payout rotating body 748 is The game balls paid out to the ball removal passage 741d side from the lower end of the ball removal passage 741d, the ball removal passage 778 of the full dispensing unit 770 described later, the body frame base ball removal passage 622 of the body frame base 600, the board unit The sheet can be discharged to the outside on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 at 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply substrate box holder 840.

  The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled on the main body frame 3, the award is made from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the award ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, etc. of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and defects such as a ball clog can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75 and 79. The full-tank sorting unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710 and guides the gaming balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741 c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. When the game balls are full on the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 can be distributed so as to pay out the game balls.

  The full-tan branch unit 770 is fixed to the lower end back surface of the award ball base 710 at the rear end upper portion and a locking portion 770 which is locked to the attachment locking portion 716 of the award ball base 710 substantially at the upper center in the front-rear direction. And a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is suspended from the rear side of the mounting lock portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a from the rear side to the mounting locking portion 716 of the winning ball base 710, and the winning ball base 770 By fixing the fixing portion 770b to a predetermined screw 710, the full-tan branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the winning ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box-like shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward substantially at the center in the left-right direction in the upper rear end. Prize ball socket 771 for receiving gaming balls having flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 disposed under the prize ball socket 771 and expanded in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79) The game ball having flowed through the normal passage 773 and the normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball from directly under the prize ball receiving opening 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side The normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the view and the full passage 775 for guiding the game ball toward the front side from the position farther to the right in the rear view than directly below the prize ball receptacle 771 in the branch space 772 (see FIG. 79) A), a fill-up passage 775 game ball that has flowed through the discharge forward a full sphere outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Furthermore, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball outlet 777 that receives the game ball that opens upward at the left end in a front view at the upper end of the rear end and flows down the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740; A ball removal passage 778 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game balls received in the removal opening 777 to the front side, and the game balls distributed through the ball removal passage 778 are released forward to the normal ball outlet 774 at the left end in front view And a ball outlet 779 opened at a position rearward of the full ball outlet 776.

  In the full tank branch unit 770 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 are the first of the far cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The gaming ball discharged from the ball outlet 774, which is in opposite communication with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c, passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the far cover unit 540, and The gaming balls supplied to the upper tray 301 and discharged from the full ball outlet 776 are supplied to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542 c of the far cover unit 540. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed to communicate with the upper right end of the main frame base ball escape passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 in a back view, and the gaming ball released from the ball outlet 779 is the main frame base 600 The main body frame base ball removal passage 622 is to be delivered.

  In this full tank branching unit 770, the gaming balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 are received by the prize ball receiving opening 771 through the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the gaming ball having entered the prize ball receptacle 771 drops the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 disposed immediately below the prize ball receptacle 771. Then, the gaming ball that has flowed down into the passage 773 normally enters the first ball inlet 542a of the far cover unit 540 from the outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and is placed on the dish unit 300 from the first ball outlet 544a. It will be supplied to the dish 301.

  By the way, when the game ball is further paid out from the winning ball unit 700 (the winning ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is full of gaming balls, the first ball outlet of the far cover unit 540 The game ball which can not go out to the upper plate 301 side from 544a stays in the first ball passage 542b of the far cover unit 540, and eventually, the inside of the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full branch unit 770 is also full. become. In this state, the gaming ball entering the branch space 772 from the winning ball receptacle 771 can not normally enter the passage 773 and starts moving laterally in the branch space 772 and moves laterally. The game ball enters into the full tank passage 775, and from below the full ball outlet 776 through the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540, under the dish unit 300. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  Note that the full-tan branch unit 770 of this example is entirely formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be viewed from the outside. This makes it possible to easily find foreign substances such as dust and dirt that have entered the full tank branch unit 770, clogging of the ball, etc. without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. .

  As described above, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301, the full tank branch unit 770 of this example automatically performs the game ball paid out from the winning ball device 740, until the full tank is cancelled. Since the lower tray 302 can be supplied to the lower tray 302, the upper tray becomes full and the ball release button of the upper tray is operated like the conventional pachinko machine, so that the game balls can not be supplied to the striking device. It is possible to avoid interruption of the hitting of the game ball, and it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience in the game and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

  Further, as described above, when the upper plate 301 is full, the full-tan branch unit 770 of this example branches the passage of the gaming ball paid out immediately below the winning ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Because the game balls staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are paid out to the upper tray 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 hit the ball launching device The storage ball of the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so the game ball of the same amount as the conventional is stored in the upper plate 301 Can. Therefore, by making the upper tray 301 smaller, it is possible to make the game window 101 in the door frame 5 relatively large (wide), and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 provided with the wider game area 1100 and play a game A pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided, and the player can be entertained by the large game area 1100.

  Furthermore, since the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate to receive the inlet (first ball inlet Even when only one 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are provided, the game balls can be sent to the door frame 5 without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays without changing the flow path (full tank branch unit 770) of the game ball in the main body frame 3. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frame 5 having different numbers of storage dishes.

  Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it is possible to cope without changing the main body frame 3, so the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 The cost of the machine can be reduced, and various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, the game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 through the normal passage 773 is preferentially hit into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray The game balls paid out from the winning ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from the payout to the storage can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced due to a lack of game balls for throwing in, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 in which the number of storage dishes is different. .

  In addition, unless the upper tray 301 is full, since the gaming balls paid out from the winning bowl device 740 are sent to the upper tray 301, the frequency of transferring the gaming balls stored in the lower tray 302 to the upper tray 301 is reduced. As a result, it is possible to concentrate the player on the operation of hitting the game ball and the like, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  Further, even when the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate, the first ball The position of the lower end of the inlet corresponding to the inlet 542a etc. can be made the same height as the first ball inlet 542a etc corresponding to the upper tray 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage trays, so It becomes possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, and the storage plate can be made deeper to secure a sufficient amount of storage for the game balls, and the player can be made to play without having to worry about the storage amount frequently. It is possible to correspond to the door frame 5 provided with different numbers of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the winning ball apparatus 740, and the upper tray 301 is full tank with game balls. Even if no game balls are released from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball outlet 774 to the branching position of the full passage 775 is increased as much as possible. It is possible to increase the storage amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 as much as possible. In the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray is filled with gaming balls and the gaming balls can not be ejected from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank ball outlet 776, Since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is disposed as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full tank passage 775. Can be stored, and the substantial storage amount of game balls stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage dishes provided on the door frame 5 is different, the storage amount of gaming balls in each door frame 5 can be maximized without changing the main frame 3 (full tank branch unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be made as much as possible, and can cope with different door frames 5 sufficiently.

  Further, the normal passage 773 and the full passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 have a size that allows the game balls to be distributed in a plurality of rows, and the retention amount of the game ball in the full tank branch unit 770 Even if the number of storage dishes provided in the door frame 5 is different, the number of storage dishes provided in the door frame 5 may be different, so that the substantial storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branching unit 770 is reduced. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having different numbers of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3.

  In addition, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. At the time, it is possible to easily find a clogged spot from the outside of the full tank branch unit 770, and it is possible to solve the problem early and to improve the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[1-3 E. Ball outlet opening and closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 80 to FIG. FIG. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Furthermore, FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the fal cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to the attachment portion 624 formed near the upper left end in the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened, the regular ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 are closed, and from the winning ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 Can block the flow of gaming balls.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to the mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end in the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to project beyond the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. The plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 held slidably in the vertical direction by the shutter base 791, the opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 via the opening / closing crank 793 And an open / close spring 794.

  The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791 a for slidably holding the opening / closing shutter 792 vertically upward so that the opening / closing shutter 792 protrudes upward beyond the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in the front-rear direction between a pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank disposed in front of the left end in front view and rotatably supporting an opening / closing crank 793 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side in a front view of the opening 791b, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of an upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction.

  Further, the open / close shutter 792 of the ball outlet open / close unit 790 is a flat shutter body 792a, and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) which slide from the front of the shutter body 792 and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. And a laterally long rectangular drive hole 792b disposed in a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding projections and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a shaft 793a rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by a crank support 791c of the shutter base 791; From the tip of the drive rod 793b extending rearwardly from the tip of the drive rod 793b and slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the open / close shutter 792 Drive pin 793c, an abutment portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and the tip end having a spherical shape, and the other end of the opening / closing spring 794 And the spring locking portion 793e for locking the

  In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening and closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are disposed behind the opening and closing shutter 792 even when the opening and closing shutter 792 is lifted. The normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 etc. in the full tank branch unit 770 are visible.

  In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 of this example, the drive pin 793c of the opening and closing crank 793 rotates up and down like an arc at the same time as the opening and closing crank 793 rotates about the axis extending in the front and rear direction. The open / close shutter 792 slides in the vertical direction via the drive hole 792b into which is inserted. In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790, the contact portion 793d of the opening and closing crank 793 contacts the opening and closing operation piece 542g of the door cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. The contact portion 793d is pivoted in the clockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 can be lowered to open the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793 d of the opening and closing crank 793 and the opening and closing operation piece 542 g of the full cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is released. Is pivoted in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the opening / closing shutter 792 is lifted to close the normal ball outlet 774 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 and the full tank outlet 776. It can be done.

  Thus, according to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 automatically automatically sets the normal ball outlet 774 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 and the full tank outlet 776 in the winning ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game balls remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game balls are prevented from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 It can be done.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 83 to FIG. FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit after being disassembled and viewed. FIG. 87 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the standing wall portion of the power supply substrate box in the substrate unit. FIG. 88 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit disassembled and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 89 (A) is a front view of the firing power supply substrate box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A shown in (A).

  The substrate unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a substrate unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 in front view, and the substrate unit base A firing power supply substrate box 830 attached to the right end rear surface of the front view 810, a power supply substrate box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 so as to surround the firing power supply substrate box 830 from the rear side A power supply substrate box 850 attached to the rear surface and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control substrate box 860 attached to the power substrate box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the front view 860; and a main relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral relay terminal board 882 attached to the front of the board unit base 810; Have.

  The substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of this example is configured to extend in the left-right direction as shown in the figure, and the substantially central part in the left-right direction inclines gently upward as it goes down one step toward the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall 811 projecting forward from the front, an opening 812 disposed on the upper side of the shielding wall 811 at a position one step lower than the middle in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction Board attachment portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view and for mounting the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and in a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front and rear direction in front view left side of the board attachment portion 813 A plurality of longitudinally elongated slit-shaped through holes in the longitudinal direction at positions corresponding to the penetrating tubular duct portion 814 and the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface A hole 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  In the substrate unit base 810, the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. The gaming balls can be prevented from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the substrate unit base 810 can be enhanced. In addition, the substrate base unit 810 sends the gaming balls having flowed down the main frame base ball escape passage 622 to the power supply substrate box holder 840 disposed on the rear side of the substrate unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. It can be done.

  Further, in the board unit base 810, the board attachment portion 813 for attaching the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is disposed at a position corresponding to the opening 614 opened in a rectangular shape in the main body frame base 600. When the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are on the front side from the opening 614 of the main frame base 600. It is supposed to come to Also, the substrate unit base 810 can transmit the sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side favorably by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Furthermore, the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box storage portion 843 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 in which the box storage portion 816 is disposed on the rear side. And a receiving recess for receiving the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the substrate unit 800 is literally provided with the speaker 821 mounted facing the front side. The speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner, and at the same time, a horizontally long rectangular opening port 822 is formed on the left side of the speaker 821 in a front view. Although not shown in detail, the open port 822 communicates with the space on the rear side of the speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, thereby reversing the phase of the sound on the rear side of the speaker 821 and moving forward. The speaker box is designed as a bass reflex type speaker box capable of emitting a deep bass to the aperture of the speaker 821. The duct portion 814 in the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound emitted from the opening 822 can be favorably transmitted forward. ing.

  The firing power supply substrate box 830 in the substrate unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear, and includes a firing power supply substrate 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. In the firing power supply substrate box 830, various electronic components attached to the firing power supply substrate 831 are accommodated internally, and heat from the electronic components etc. is provided through the slits 830a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released to the outside.

  The firing power supply substrate box 830 is detached from above in the upwardly open accommodation recess formed by the box accommodation portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810 and the front box accommodation portion 843 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 described later. It is supposed to be accommodated. Thereby, in the assembled state of the main body frame 3, when a problem occurs in the firing power supply substrate box 830, the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be easily detached, replaced, or repaired from the front side of the main body frame 3. (See FIG. 63).

  Further, when the launch power supply substrate box 830 is described in detail, as shown in FIG. 89, the launch power supply substrate 831 is provided with a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 charging and discharging electric power from the DC / DC converter 831a. And a combined current combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is driven by causing a current to flow to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking and launching apparatus 650. In this firing power supply substrate box 830, slits 830a as heat dissipation holes are formed on the upper and lower surfaces in order to release the heat emitted from the DC / DC converter 831a mounted on the firing power supply substrate 831 and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the outside. ing.

  Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply substrate box 830 on which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed is a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, in the firing power supply substrate box 830, a partition wall 830b, which divides the internal space into two spaces of a space for housing the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, has an upper inner wall And the bottom inner wall are integrally formed from the bottom to the end opening edge. Thus, when the firing power supply substrate 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply substrate box 830 and the inner space of the firing power supply substrate box 830 is closed, the inner space of the firing power supply substrate box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Partition wall 830b for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, and a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a. The housing space 830 d for housing the DC / DC converter 831 a functions as a heat insulating wall that blocks the heat from entering and exiting.

  The heat in the housing space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is housed, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is a slit as a heat dissipation hole formed on the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface for communicating the housing space 830c with the outside air. The released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is stored by being released to the outside through 830a. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the housing space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is housed, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a, is a heat radiation hole formed on the upper surface and the lower surface communicating the housing space 830d with the outside air. By being released to the outside through the slits 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In this embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for producing combined current to be supplied to the launch solenoid 654 of the striking launcher 650 are not provided on the power supply substrate 851, but are separately emitted from the power supply substrate 851. By being provided on the power supply substrate 831, the size of the launch power supply substrate 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply substrate 851. Therefore, the size reduction of the firing power supply substrate 831 facilitates handling, the replacement work of the firing power supply substrate 831 is facilitated, and the time spent on the replacement work can be shortened. In this replacement work, it is also possible to replace the firing power supply substrate box 830 while the firing power supply substrate 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply substrate box 830.

  Also, even if the pachinko machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches its life, and even if the driving by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game has to be interrupted, replacement work of the firing power substrate 831 is easy The interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage by being able to Therefore, the impossibility of firing due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be eliminated very easily, interruption of the game due to the impossibility of firing can be resolved at an early stage, the game can be resumed, and the interest of the player decreases. Can be suppressed.

  The electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 is deteriorated prematurely by repeated charging and discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time driving and firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654. The power supply substrate 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of the island facility such as a game hall, but in the case where charging and discharging are repeated at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 As compared with the launch power supply substrate 831, its life is extremely long. In other words, the life of power supply substrate 851 reaches its life due to aging, while the life of power supply substrate 831 reaches its life relatively early due to deterioration caused by charging and discharging of electrolytic capacitor SC0. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are not provided on the power supply substrate 851 but are provided separately on the power supply substrate 851 and not on the power supply substrate 851 for producing combined current flowing to the emission solenoid 654. Can be concentrated on the power supply substrate 851. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electronic component associated with the long-term aging change from being replaced together with the short-lived electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the bat firing device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, the capacity is changed to change the driving characteristics. It is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to detach the launch power supply substrate 831 even if the fraud is changed to different electrolytic capacitors SC0 different from each other, and replacement of the launch power supply substrate 831 is difficult It is possible to make it difficult to make fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that deliberately changes the impact strength that has been optimized by making unauthorized modifications to the launch power supply substrate 831 and to make it difficult to do fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can be configured to be capable of preventing a player who has learned frustration etc. from developing into injustice such as injustice.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 is made removable so that it can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply substrate 831 is cheated, the firing power substrate 831 is immediately replaced to make cheating. It is possible to eliminate the interruption period of the game as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of frustration and feeling unhappy due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Furthermore, the launch power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch control unit 4120 for controlling the strike launcher 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main frame 3 holding the game board 4 When replacing the game board 4 due to a model change, etc., the firing power supply substrate 831 (firing power supply substrate box 830) of the firing control unit 4120 can also be easily replaced, so it matched the concept of the new model to be replaced etc. By replacing the launch power supply substrate 831 with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a that can realize the launch characteristics, the launch characteristics of the bat striking launch device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 is a new game It can be matched to the board 4. Therefore, since the hit characteristics of the game ball can be easily matched to the concept of the game board 4, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the game by the game board 4 of the new model and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest can do.

  In addition, since the launch power supply substrate 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be detached from the front side, when replacing the launch power supply substrate 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 for island facilities such as game halls, While the effort required for replacement can be simplified, it can be replaced in a short time, and an increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed. Further, since the firing power supply substrate 831 (the firing power supply substrate box 830) is made removable so that it can be replaced, the change of the implantation characteristics is made as compared with the case where the entire firing control unit 4120 (the delivery control substrate 4110) is replaced. The cost of reducing the cost can be reduced, and the burden on the hole side can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when changing the model etc., only the game board 4 is replaced, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 etc. can be used as they are before. If the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply substrate 831 is deteriorated, as described above, since the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side, the firing power supply substrate 831 is immediately It can be replaced to solve the problem, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and the interruption of the game can be eliminated early as if feeling frustration or feeling disappointing It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced.

  In addition, the shooting power supply substrate 831 (the shooting power supply substrate box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the game power holding board 601 is held by the game board holding port 601 Because it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for fraudulent action is made to enter from the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, an illegal tool reaches the firing power substrate 831 by the game board 4. While being able to prevent that a fraudulent act is performed with respect to the injection | emission electric power source board | substrate 831, it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high defense power against a fraudulent act.

  Furthermore, since the firing power supply substrate box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601 and the position for supporting the firing power supply substrate box 830 is on the rear side of the front surface of the main body frame 3, the firing power supply A space for supporting the substrate box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the launch power supply substrate box 830 and achieves the above-described effects can be embodied with certainty.

  Also, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided on the firing power supply substrate 831 and the firing power supply substrate 831 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3. Therefore, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is easily deteriorated, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (fired power supply substrate 831) can be easily replaced, so that the problem can be eliminated early and the game is interrupted. While being able to shorten time as much as possible, it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which reliably plays the effect mentioned above.

  In addition, the power supply substrate box holder 840 in the substrate unit 800 is a discharge ball receiver that receives the game balls released upward from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 to the upper left on the left front than the left and right center in front view Portion 841, a discharge passage 842 for guiding the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward and discharging it, a front side of the discharge passage 842 and a side (right side in front view) of the discharge ball receiving portion 841 forward and A front box accommodating portion 843 opened upward and capable of accommodating the rear side of the firing power supply substrate box 830 and an entire rear surface of the power supply substrate box holder 840 are formed to be recessed forward and can accommodate the front end of the power supply substrate box 850 And a rear box accommodating portion 844.

  The power supply substrate box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 faces the discharge passage 842. The rear side of the substrate unit base 810 is formed, and flows through the main frame base ball removal passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810. The game balls flowed down and the game balls discharged from the out ball discharge unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841, which will be described later in detail, pass through the discharge passage 842 behind the pachinko machine 1 Can be discharged into the

  Further, the power supply substrate box holder 840 is formed at a position where the front box accommodation portion 843 corresponds to the box accommodation portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810, and the box accommodation portion 816 and the front box accommodation portion 843 It is possible to form a receiving recess for receiving the box 830.

  Furthermore, the power supply substrate box 850 in the substrate unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose front is open, and includes a power supply substrate 851 attached so as to close its front end opening. The power supply substrate box 850 is adapted to receive various electronic components attached to the power supply substrate 851, and externally transmits the heat from the electronic components through the plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released into the Here, as shown in FIG. 86, a power switch 852 attached to the power supply substrate 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply substrate box 850.

  In addition, power supply substrate box 850 is a standing wall projecting rearward along the lower side of the opening facing power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) mounted on the lower side of power supply switch 852 in power supply substrate 851. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c protruding backward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b and the outer periphery of the power supply substrate box 850 And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply substrate 851 has a locking piece for locking with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece And the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

  The power supply board box 850 is slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the standing wall portion 850b connects the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851 as shown in FIG. It is formed to project into In the power supply substrate box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 is hooked from the lower front side of the power supply substrate box 850 to the rear end of the upright wall 850b. The terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, after connecting the connector terminal which the wiring cord extended to the connection terminal attached to the substrate and then pulling the wiring cord to the substrate side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. Since the connector terminal is pressed to the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply substrate box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the opposite side to the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply substrate 851 side (front side with respect to the main frame 3). Since the wiring cord 854 is wound around (folded back) behind the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b that protrudes rearward relative to the connector terminal 855 even if it is pulled, the connector from the wiring cord 854 It is possible to prevent application of a force such that the terminal 855 is pressed to the power supply terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  In addition, since power supply substrate box 850 is provided with protruding portions 850c protruding backward on both sides of the rear end of standing wall portion 850b, even if wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of standing wall portion 850b, the rear end The projections 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and can prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the upright wall portion 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply substrate box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b can be brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b side. The wire cord 854 can be brought close to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d immediately after the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, so that a series of operations can be continuously performed. It is possible to simplify the work process involved in assembly.

  The power supply substrate box 850 and the power supply substrate box holder 840 are formed so that the dimensions in the front-rear direction in the assembled state are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. The rear surface of the power supply substrate box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

  Further, in this example, after connecting the connector terminal 855 to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply substrate box 850 covering the power supply substrate 851, the connector is formed by the standing wall portion 850 b projecting rearward than the rear end of the connector terminal 855 Since the wiring cord 854 extended from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is a power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It becomes possible to act in such a direction as releasing the connection with the 853 and can prevent the connector terminal 855 from becoming unremovable by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851. Can be easily removed to easily perform maintenance such as substrate replacement.

  Also, the wiring cord 854 is turned back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply substrate box 850, and the degree of bending of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where the standing wall portion 850b is not provided. Unreasonable force can be prevented from acting on the 854 itself, and disconnection of the wiring cord 854 due to the unreasonable force can be prevented from occurring.

  Furthermore, the standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply substrate box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853 and, since the standing wall portion 850b is adjacent to the power supply terminal 853, it is connected to the power supply terminal 853. It becomes possible to extend the wiring cord 854 extended from the connector terminal 855 as straight as possible backward with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken. It is possible to prevent the force from acting and to prevent the occurrence of problems such as disconnection.

  Further, since the power supply substrate box 850 covering the power supply substrate 851 is provided with the upright wall portion 850b, there is no need to provide the power supply substrate 851 with the upright wall portion 850b, and the assembly operation of the power supply substrate 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply substrate 851 is covered with the power supply substrate box 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dirt, and the like that cause the occurrence of defects from adhering to the power supply substrate 851, and it is mounted on the power supply substrate 851. Electronic components (eg, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) so that it is difficult to touch or replace them, and it is possible to increase the defense against fraud. It has become.

  The direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power terminal 853 in the power supply substrate 851 is substantially perpendicular (front-back direction) to the substrate surface, and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply substrate 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851, shear force can be prevented from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent breakage of the power supply substrate 851 and breakage of the power supply substrate 851 and breakage of the power supply substrate 851. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention can be configured such that a defect does not easily occur.

  Furthermore, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means by the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850 b and the wiring cord 854 is Even when a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in a direction to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. The connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent the occurrence of problems such as contact failure and conduction failure.

  Further, since the protruding portions 850c that project backward are provided at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply substrate box 850 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back in the standing wall portion 850b. Even when sliding along the side, the protruding portions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can not be detached from the standing wall portion 850b. A pachinko machine 1 that can be prevented and reliably exerts the above-described effects can be embodied.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 folded at the standing wall portion 850b is brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply substrate box 850, the wiring cord 854 is made difficult to be detached from the standing wall portion 850b. While the wire cord 854 is turned back by the standing wall portion 850b, the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. Thus, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the assembly process can be simplified to suppress an increase in cost.

  Further, the delivery control board box 860 in the board unit 800 has a thin box-like box base 861 that is wide and open at the rear, and a thin box-like cover that fits into the box base 861 from the rear side and opens at the front. A delivery control board 4110 (see FIG. 153) attached to the back surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862 is provided. Further, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separation / cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 can not be separated without being cut off, and the trace thereof is left when the delivery control substrate box 860 is opened. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been improperly opened and closed. In this example, the delivery control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In this payout control board box 860, an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 are faced rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, terminals for various connections for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like are arranged to face rearward through the cover 862.

  Furthermore, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820, and the board attachment part 871a formed on the upper left rear face in rear view and the board cover attachment part 871b formed on the rear right end rear face A peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 mounted from the rear side to the substrate mounting portion 871a of the substrate base 871 and a peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface, and a substrate cover mounting portion 871b of the substrate base 871 A connection terminal board cover 873 attached from the rear side and having an opening 873b extending vertically in the rear wall 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a facing rearward from the opening 873a of the connection terminal board cover 873 are attached to the rear surface CR unit connection terminal board 8 supported in the connection terminal board cover 873 And 4, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871, together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a power indicator for displaying the operating state etc. of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island equipment side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The substrate base 871, the connection terminal plate cover 873, and the substrate box cover 875 in the terminal substrate box 870 are respectively formed of transparent synthetic resin, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the CR unit connection terminal are provided from the outside. The plate 874 or the like can be visually recognized. Also, on the rear surface of the substrate box cover 875, when a problem such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the contents of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator or CR unit installed on the island facility are displayed The displayed status display seal 876 is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in the substrate base 871 of the terminal substrate box 870, the substrate attachment portion 871a is formed in a thin box shape whose rear end is open. The substrate base 871 is formed on the inner upper portion of the substrate attachment portion 871a and fixed to the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 (not shown), and is formed on the lower inner portion of the substrate attachment portion 871a A locking claw 871i for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871i. ing.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is formed in a thin box shape with the substrate cover attachment portion 871b opened to the rear side, and the size of the inner periphery thereof is made such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted. The inner peripheral wall is made into the outer piece part 871c extended in the front-back direction. The substrate base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b and abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction, and a locking hole 871f disposed on the left outside of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b in a rear view in the back and forth direction. The protrusion 871e of the substrate base 871 has a rearward protrusion amount slightly smaller than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in FIG. It is arranged to be close to the

  Further, the substrate base 871 is disposed on the rear surface right rear surface of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b so as to be vertically separated, and has a pair of bearings 871g for pivotally supporting the substrate box cover 875; And a rectangular tubular locking portion 871h disposed on the rear surface near the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting part 871b surrounded by the outer piece part 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall 873a closing the rear end of the outer wall 873c, a rectangular opening 873b extending vertically through the rear wall 873a, and a rear wall substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 873b The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the front end of the inner wall 873d extending from the 873a to the front (substrate base 871 side) and the front end of the inner wall 873d abut the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 And a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873 e formed in 873 c.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 is disposed at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating the rear wall portion 873a, and substantially in the vertical direction. A box-shaped protection portion 873g which covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is open in the left side in a rear view, and extends outward (right direction) from the rear end in the outer wall portion 873c A pair of fixing pieces 873h which can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d, and an elastic claw-like engagement formed at the left end portion of the outer wall portion 873c in the rear view and lockable to the locking holes 871f of the substrate base 871. And a hooking piece 873i. Although not shown, an inner wall 873d extending forward is formed above and below the inner periphery of the central opening 873f having the protective portion 873g.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape whose front side is opened by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. In addition, the connection terminal plate cover 873 may restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 backward by the front end of the inner wall 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. While being able to control the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 to move forward by the pair of substrate holders 873e, it is possible to detachably hold the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 inserts the fixing piece 873h into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and then the locking claw 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871 to obtain the substrate. The base cover mounting portion 871b of the base 871 can be detachably mounted.

  The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit installed on the island facility side of the game hall on its front surface side (rear surface side). In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360 and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as illustrated, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. There is.

  Further, the substrate box cover 875 in the terminal substrate box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size substantially covering the entire rear surface of the substrate base 871 and opened entirely to the front, and disposed on the right side surface in rear view. A pair of shaft portions 875a pivotally supported by the bearing portions 871g, a through hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and front from both left and right ends of the through hole 875b A partition wall 875c extending to the end, and a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

  The substrate box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 so as to be capable of opening and closing by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft portions 875a on the bearing portion 871g of the substrate base 871. There is. The board box cover 875 has a length such that the partition wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft 875a (the side supported by the shaft) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and the partition wall on the side farther from the shaft 875a The length 875 c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the substrate box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the partition walls 875c substantially abut on the rear surfaces of the substrate base 871 and the connection terminal plate cover 873. It is supposed to be.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is used as a D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is exposed to the outside also on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The internal connection terminals 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 are square two-piece connectors, and are attached so as to be able to be fitted and connected from the rear as illustrated.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, as shown in FIG. 88, in the assembled state, the outer wall 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. In the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer rim 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal cover 873 and the shaft 875a of the board box cover 875 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since each side has an opposing wall 875c, a multiple-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 becomes a meandering crank shape It has become. Therefore, even if an unauthorized flexible tool is introduced between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary), the tool is not bent along the boundary and the CR unit connection terminal An unauthorized tool can be reliably prevented from entering from the direction along the surface of the plate 874, and the unauthorized action on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be surely prevented. It has become.

  Further, in the terminal board box 870, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit attached as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even with the D-sub connector having a gap formed with the connection terminal plate 874, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, which can prevent the fraudulent act from being performed. It is supposed to be.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft parts 875a on the shaft part 875a side of the through hole 875b where the CR unit connection terminal 874a faces the substrate box cover 875 pivotally supported rotatably on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. Since the partition wall 875c has a length extending between them, and the partition wall 875c can increase the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875, a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if it is attempted to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the substrate box cover 875 from being distorted and to prevent the gap from being formed, making it difficult to conduct fraudulent action and suppressing It can be made expensive.

  Furthermore, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b in the vicinity of the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate box cover 875. Therefore, with the connection terminal on the wiring cord fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b, which is a two-piece connector, insert a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even in this case, the insertion of the electrode can be prevented by the protection portion 873g and the substrate box cover 875, and an illegal act on the internal connection terminal 874b can also be prevented.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the terminal board box 870 accommodating the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if the incorrect tool is inserted through the gap etc. and the tip of the incorrect tool is made to enter the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the CR board connection terminal plate 874 housed is protected by the terminal board box 870. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent the fraudulent act on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874.

  When CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in terminal substrate box 870, outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate extend in the direction along the front surface (rear surface of the substrate) of CR unit connection terminal plate 874. In the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the projection 871e and the outer piece 871c of the base 871 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal cover 873 and the substrate Since the partition walls 875c of the box cover 875 exist, respectively, the multiple barriers will be constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 will be a crank shape meandering. In addition, an attempt is made to infiltrate a flexible tool having an excellent flexibility between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary). Also, since the tool does not bend along the boundary, it is possible to reliably prevent unauthorized tool entry from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 The pachinko machine 1 can be configured to be capable of reliably preventing fraudulent acts on the unit connection terminals 874a and the internal connection terminals 874b.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed as a CR unit connection terminal 874a with the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and it is possible to reliably prevent the fraudulent act.

  Further, one end of the terminal base box 870 is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 so as to rotatably cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and to open and close the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873 And the board box cover 875 having a plate-like partition wall 875c extending forward from the side end on the pivotally supported side of the through hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if an attempt is made to insert a screwdriver or the like between the parts of the box cover 875 pivotally supported to the substrate base 871 to form a gap and allow an unauthorized tool to enter, the incorrect tool is a connection terminal by the partition wall 875c. It is possible to prevent the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) from reaching the side, and to prevent fraudulent acts being performed. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal substrate box 870, the connection terminal plate cover 873 must be opened after opening the substrate box cover 875, making it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And can increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be enhanced by the partition wall 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the substrate box cover 875 Can be prevented from being distorted to prevent the formation of a gap, and it is possible to make it difficult to conduct fraud and to have high deterrence.

  Furthermore, even if it is attempted to tamper with insertion of needle-like electrodes through the gap between the connector main body and the wiring cord in the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 The protection portion 873g and the substrate box cover 875 cover the rear side of the opening portion 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body, so the outside of the terminal substrate box 870 ( A needle-like electrode can not be inserted into the gap of the main body of the connector from the rear side), and it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act on the terminal of the connected wiring cord, and it is possible to have a high crime prevention capability It can be done.

  Further, the outer wall 873 c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873 e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall 873 c is extended to the front side relative to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap to perform an improper action, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves backward with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). CR unit connection terminals on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be kept protected by Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal substrate box 870 is formed of a transparent resin, and the inside of the terminal substrate box 870 can be viewed from the outside, the terminal substrate box 870 can be viewed from the outside of the terminal substrate box 870 without disassembling. Is an illegal tool inserted into CR unit connection terminal board 874, peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, etc. housed inside, or CR unit connection terminal board 874, etc. has not been replaced with an illegal one? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether the electronic components (for example, ROM, IC, resistor, capacitor, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, etc. are replaced with unauthorized ones, etc. Can make it easier to detect cheating, and it also makes it easier to detect cheating. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  In addition, since terminal board box 870 is mounted on the back surface side of main body frame 3 so that the front surface of CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like is directed to the rear side, the outer frame 2 can be When the main body frame 3 is pivoted to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 3 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870 face the worker side (player side). The unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like and the terminal board box 870 can be easily checked.

  A main side relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral side relay terminal board 882 in the board unit 800 are a door control and a peripheral control unit 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, It is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, the decoration substrate, the operation unit 400 and the like provided in the fifth embodiment. The main side relay terminal boards 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal boards 882 have a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and a substrate formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810 By attaching them to the attachment portion 813, the connection terminals face the front side from the front face of the main body frame base 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 and 63, main side relay terminal board 880 and peripheral side relay terminal board 882 are covered on the front side by relay terminal board cover 692 attached to the front of main body frame base 600. As well as connecting terminals for connecting with the door frame 5 side only through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692, the wiring cord 196 is connected to those connecting terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

  In addition, main side relay terminal board 880 is the ball position button 361 of return ball unit 360 of ball storage unit 360 in dish unit 300 which is arranged on the door frame 5 side, return button 362, remaining display portion 363 and rotational position detection sensor A relay 512 is used to relay the connection between the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full detection sensor 550 of the far cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side. In addition, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is provided on the door frame 5 side with the decoration units 200, 240, 280 and the dish unit 300 and the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288 provided in the operation unit 400. , 290, 322, 430, 432, and the dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b, and 432c provided in the operation unit 400, and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 disposed on the body frame 3 side It is for relaying.

[1-3 G. Back cover]
Subsequently, the back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. 90 (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 91 is an enlarged sectional view showing a part of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover disassembled and viewed from the rear side. The back cover 900 in this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and can visually recognize the inside of the main body frame 3 from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main unit frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (game unit 4 attached to the main unit frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main unit frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. . The back cover 900 includes a plate-like main portion 902 closing the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 extending forward from the right side of the main portion 902 in a front view, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of support pins 906 arranged in the vertical direction and protruding downward and pivotally supported by the back cover support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600 and formed in the upper and lower portions of the left side of the main portion 902 in front view An engagement piece 908 engaged with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, and a back cover 900 near the lower engagement piece 908 3 and a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in an unopenable manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, etc., the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction on the left side in a rear view of the lower engaging piece 908 in the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. 921 and a longitudinally long rectangular lock port 922 disposed at a predetermined distance on the left side in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lock that is elastically locked from the rear side to the lock port 922 A plate-like guide member 923 having a piece 923a at one end and a laterally elongated long hole 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 at the other end, and the long hole 923b of the guide 923 are inserted from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having an external thread 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 923 on the external thread 924a of the fastening member 924. Includes a retaining member 925 attached so as to sandwich, the. In addition, the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is loosely fitted to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. It is possible to play at In the fastening mechanism 920, the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. While being slidable in the left-right direction, it does not drop out of the long hole 923 b. The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that when the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body portion 902, the locking member 924 of the fastening member 924 projecting forward through the long hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924 a is in a state of being inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

  The back cover 900 in this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main frame 3 by pivoting the pivot pin 906 to the back cover pivot 623 of the main frame base 600. By engaging the engagement piece 908 with the main frame base 600 and the back cover engagement groove 718, 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780, the closed state can be achieved. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially in agreement.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a stops at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923 b of the guide member 923 locked to the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off the back cover 900. A state of being positioned behind the main body 902 is maintained.

  Then, by inserting the end of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b from this state and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed). Note that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example, when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, even if the guide member 923 supporting the fastening member 924 is oblique to the main body 902, the fastening member 924 is Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male screw portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axial center of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be favorably transferred to the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, fastening or fastening can be performed easily simply by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. It can be released, and the time and effort for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified to improve the maintainability.

  In addition, the back cover 900 has a connecting notch 910 which is notched upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 in a rectangular shape, and a confirmation opening which passes through in a rectangular shape on the upper side of the connecting notch 910. 912 and a confirmation notch 914 notched in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 in a front view.

  The back cover 900 is, as shown in FIG. 5, closed with respect to the main frame 3, through the connection notch 910, the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4, the test terminal 4100f, etc. Is supposed to be on the back side. In addition, the back cover 900 is configured such that the board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the back surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the back side through the confirmation opening 912 and the back cover 900 The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 is exposed through the notch portion 914. As a result, even if the back cover 900 is not opened relative to the main body frame 3, operation check, appearance check, control state check, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 can be performed.

  Further, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 penetrating thinly in the main body portion 902 and the side portion 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 or the like through the slits 916 is of the main frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the rear outside. As shown in the drawing, a plurality of through holes 918 arranged at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction that are wide and elongated in the vertical direction are provided at a position slightly leftward in a front view from the center. These through holes 918 close the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3, and store and hold the game board 4 in the main body frame 3, behind the main liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4. It is located behind the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided on the side, so that the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be exhausted well. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is smaller than the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

  Thereby, in the present example, a fastening member 924 for fastening the back cover 900 closing the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 with respect to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900 When the game board 4 is held by the main unit frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main unit frame 3 to perform maintenance or the like on the rear side of the game unit 4. Even when the fastening member 924 fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released to separate the fastening member 924 from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is the guide member 923 Can be prevented from losing the fastening member 924 or leaving it in the pachinko machine 1 from the back cover 900. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, since it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off from the open back cover 900, there is no need to store the fastening member 924 whose fastening has been released at a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. The rear cover 900 can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

  Further, since the long hole 923 b of the guide member 923 is extended at least to the opposite side to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a is assured correctly in the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be concluded. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Furthermore, since the holding member 925, which cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 and holds the fastening member 924 in a movable manner with respect to the guide member 923, is attached to the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head portion and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off the long hole 923b of the guide member 923. Thus, the fastening member 924 can be movably held with respect to the guide member 923 due to the gap between them and the long hole 923 b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating the holding member 925 is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 passes through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900. When fastening to the cover fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be accommodated in the accommodation recess, so the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are in close contact. The protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of problems. As well as being able to make it look good.

  In addition, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is screwed to the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924 with the female screw portion, the screw is fastened only by pulling compared with the engagement by the simple locking claw. The back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, and the security effect by the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly effective in deterring fraud.

  Furthermore, since the guide member 923 has flexibility, and the guide member 923 can be bent, it is possible to further increase the freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921). It is easy to position the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924 in a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 or to move the male screw 924 straight against the back cover fastening hole 770b. Thus, the male screw portion 924a can be reliably fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  Further, in a state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along an inner wall extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking opening 922 of the back cover 900, the locking opening Since it is elastically locked to 922, an axis extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the distal end side (long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 attached movably to the insertion hole 921 It can be moved so as to turn around the center, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported relative to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held by the long hole 923b on the tip end side of the guide member 923 may be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Since this can be performed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening operation by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

  Furthermore, after further providing a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a at a position different from the back cover fastening hole 780b in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 elastically engages with the back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a, respectively. In addition, a plurality of engagement pieces 908 are provided, and by engaging the engagement pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780 a of the main body frame 3, fastening by the fastening member 924 is Since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 separately, the number of fastening operations can be reduced as much as possible with only one fastening portion using the fastening member 924, and work such as assembly and maintenance Can be enhanced. Further, as described above, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement between the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement groove 718, 780a separately from the fastening member 924, a wide closed range is provided. Even with the back cover 900, the rear side (the rear side of the game board 4) of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening portions by the fastening members 924.

  In addition, the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported relative to the body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pins 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the body frame 3 (body frame base 600). Since the rear cover 900 is turned in the closing direction and the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the rear cover 900 and the rear cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The holes 780b can be easily aligned with each other, and the fastening members 924 held by the back cover 900 can easily be fastened to the back cover fastening holes 780b through the insertion holes 921. Further, since the back cover 900 is pivotally supported on the main body frame 3, the back of the back cover 900 is released even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and maintenance is performed. The cover 900 can be kept in the state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, there is no need to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time required for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Side crime prevention board]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 66 and FIG. The side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms a left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side crime prevention plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 extruded in a shallow U shape in plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 fixed to the upper and lower portions near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 And a positioning member 956 fixed inside the main body 952 and engaged with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  The main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction with substantially the same length as the height of the main body frame 600 and has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a front end right from the front end of the side plate 952a Front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c disposed so as to form a predetermined gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and having a smaller amount of projection than the front end piece 952b, and a front face from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a And a rear end piece 952d extending longer in the rightward direction than the front end piece 952b (see FIG. 108). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U shape by the side plate piece 952a, the front end piece 952b, and the rear end piece 952d, and the front component 1110 of the game board 4 is interposed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. The left side in a front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 108).

  In the side security plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 600. When the side crime prevention plate 950 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is the axial support side of the axial support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. To be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped protruding piece 166, and to prevent insertion of a tool for cheating between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view (See FIG. 108). In addition, the main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion type material, and a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and a middle piece arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 are enhanced, and the strength of the entire body frame 3 can be enhanced to support the game board 4 and the door frame 5 etc. favorably. It has become.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is formed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side crime prevention plate 950. The rear side piece of the substantially U-shaped axially supported U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the case is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952 b In this state, the pivoting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 is in contact with the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3 even if the door frame 5 is forced open with respect to the main body frame 3. It becomes possible to abut and prevent the pivotal support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 from moving away from the main body frame 3 and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened up Can be used to open the door frame 5 against the main frame 3 It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

  Further, since the side crime prevention plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is The strength and the rigidity of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by the unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced. In addition, after the main frame base 600 supporting the game board 4 is formed of a synthetic resin, the side crime prevention plate 950 on the side (shaft support side) on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported is formed of metal, The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced as compared to the case where the entire body frame 3 is formed of metal.

  Furthermore, although details will be described later, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 for locking the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 may be reinforced in one portion between the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower ends. Because the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041 so as to be locked with the hook cover 165 of Even if the open side is scolded by an unauthorized tool such as a crowbar or the like, it can be favorably prevented that the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is expanded, and the door frame 5 is prevented from being forced open. it can.

  In addition, the rear end of the side plate piece 952a in the side crime prevention plate 950 is made to extend rearward than the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, so that the dimension in the front and back direction of the side plate piece 952a becomes longer. Since the bending rigidity to the load applied in the front-rear direction becomes stronger, the strength and rigidity of the entire side crime prevention plate 950 can be further enhanced, and the side crime prevention plate 950 can be prevented from being forcibly bent and cheating being performed .

  Further, since the side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of a metal extrusion type material, the side crime prevention plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined sectional shape with the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily made While being able to form, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, and defects such as strength reduction that occur during processing as compared to the case where the metal plate is bent The side crime prevention plate 950 can be made as small as possible and high in durability and strength.

[1-3 I. Lock device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 93 to FIG. FIG. 93 (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and FIG. 93 (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 94 (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 94 (B) is a slide lever for a door frame and a slide lever for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a rear perspective view which shows these, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device disassembled and seen from the rear, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory view showing operations of the sliding door for the door frame and the sliding door for the main body frame in the locking device. FIG. 97 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the tamper-proof member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3. A door hook hole 620 formed at the top of the right side (open side) of the front end frame portion 602 of the main frame base 600 and a lock retaining hole 621 formed at the lower portion, and a peripheral wall of the main frame base 600 It can be attached to a plurality of lock attachment portions 625 formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 in a front view.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding wedge 1040, the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame can not be illegally slid. A first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032 attached to the lower part of the base 1001 are provided.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame and the sliding frame 1050 for the main body frame are formed therein. And are arranged slidably. The U-shaped base 1001 is extremely thin in comparison with a lock device integrated in a conventional L-shaped cross section. This makes it possible to make the size in the left and right direction of the lock device 1000 as thin as possible, and the size in the left and right direction of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively enlarged. It is possible to provide a large 1,400 game board 4.

  The U-shaped base 1001 can be attached in a state where the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame The open side of the base 1001 is closed to the main frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base 1001 form the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has an anti-tampering structure which makes it difficult for the user to tamper with the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape in which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can penetrate up and down on the closed side (front side) up and down opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002 and a screw fixing portion 1003 protruding outward in the middle and the upper portion of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side Protruding forward from the lower end of the upper end and the middle part of the open side (front side) of the side 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side 1001b where the 1003 is provided and the lower side of the open sides 1001a and 1001b And a locking projection 1004.

  The screwing portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking projection 1004 is a hook hole 620 for the door of the main body frame base 600. The screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock attaching portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 coincide with each other when inserted upward from the rear side into the lock locking hole 621 and moved upward. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (the main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625 via the same.

  The lock device 1000 is attached with screws not only at the upper and middle screw stop portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw lock portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 described later and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 The lock mounting portion 625 is also fixed to the main frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower side of the lock device 1000 can also be mounted.

  In addition, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the lock projections 1004 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001, the hook hole 620 for the door in the upper and the lock lock hole 621 is inserted and positioned and locked, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with a screw. It can be fixed firmly to (body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated into a very thin U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the lock device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing on the front and back sides of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projections 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be the fixing structure) project from the side surface 1001 a not in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, The screwing portion 1003 constituting the rear side fixing structure is configured to protrude from the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001 from the side surface 1001b to the peripheral wall portion 605 side. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that rattling does not occur as compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is in contact with the side surface 1001b.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left and right direction at the upper part, middle part, and lower part of both side faces 1001 a and 1001 b, By inserting a rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and caulking the main frame sliding gutter 1050, the door frame sliding gutter 1040 and the main frame sliding gutter 1050 can be inserted into the U-shaped base 1001. Can be mounted slidably in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), while the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper end portion of the rivet long hole 1042 formed at three places at the top, middle, bottom of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end portion of the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 respectively formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding wedge 1050. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 can be moved upward, and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be moved downward.

  Furthermore, the U-shaped base 1001 protrudes laterally from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the side wall portion 605 in the tamper-proof notch 1007 formed in the lower closed side surface and the open side main body frame base 600. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 and an insertion longitudinal opening 1020, a spring engagement piece 1021 and a relief horizontal hole 1022 penetrating the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 are formed respectively. The fraud prevention notch portion 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001, which will be described in detail later, advances and retracts the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is located on the side surface 1001 b below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the body frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009, which is projected laterally from the front end, through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and an attachment hole 1013 formed on the lock attachment substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 with two screws 1012 An attachment hole 1014 is formed in the lower case, and a screw stop 1003 is formed in order to attach the lower portion of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3.

  In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion longitudinal opening 1020 in which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 for urging the second fraud preventing member 1032 upward, and a relief lateral hole 1022 for forming a relief hole so as not to disturb the movement of the connecting pin 1034; Is equipped.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for mounting to the lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical cylinder lock main body, and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock main body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. An engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed into a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement protrusion 1017 engaged with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 at the time of rotation, The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 when it is rotated.

  The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted from the rear side into the lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and then mounting holes 1013 formed at two upper and lower positions of the lock mounting substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through the above.

  The tamperproof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 do not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key, for example, with a piano wire, a wire, etc. To prevent lowering of the As shown in FIG. 95, the fraud preventing members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud preventing member 1023 and a second fraud preventing member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is a vertically long plate-like member and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base 1001 around a swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first tamper resistant member 1023 is the highest through the swinging shaft hole 1025 together with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base 1001. The lower insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is opened longitudinally at a position overlapping the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the plate-like surface, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. Provided with the projecting piece insertion hole 1026. The second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 to slide the door frame sliding wedge 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. The second engaging protrusion 1018 is engaged with the second engaging protrusion 1018. In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely to be able to abut the rear surface side of the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates on the outer side of the front upper side of the protrusion insertion hole 1026. Provided with the inclined portion 1024, and the inclined portion 1024 abuts on the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 centers on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 97 (B), it swings (clockwise direction in FIG. 97).

  Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 from the outer lower side of the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and a position where the stopper piece 1027 protrudes. A downward projecting restriction protrusion 1031 and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 which are vertically penetrated in the left and right direction on the front side of the restriction protrusion 1031 are provided. The stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is engaged with and engaged with the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 when the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is locked. Thus, the main frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding improperly. In addition, the control projection 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the second fraud prevention member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035 so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

  Further, in the pin hole 1029 of the first tamper resistant member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud protective member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first anti-corrosion member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001 b of the U-shaped base 1001 by being engaged with the horizontal opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. It is possible to Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for pivotally connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connection pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted "-" shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 at its upper end, and a spring engagement hole 1036 at its upper other end. And are provided with abutments 1037 at their lower ends. The second fraud prevention member 1032 may be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be rotatable relative to the first fraud prevention member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second tampering prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Furthermore, the second tampering prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutment portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001, and is formed of a vertically long metal plate member. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 is provided with a door frame hook portion 1041 that protrudes forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped substrate 1001 with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 housed in the U-shaped substrate 1001. When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, it protrudes forward from the door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68, etc.) formed in the main body frame base 600. The hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the frame 5 can be locked. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging hook shape as shown in the figure, whereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are raised by raising the door frame sliding lever 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  In addition, the sliding frame for door frame 1040 is provided at the lower middle of the longitudinally long rivet long hole 1042 which is drilled at the center of the side in the upper, middle and lower and through which the rivet 1006 is inserted and the rivet long hole 1042 at the top The lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040 is provided with a guide protrusion 1043 which protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the sliding door 1040 for a door frame. The rivet long hole 1042 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is configured such that a rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is a door frame sliding It is formed to be vertically long so as not to disturb the lifting operation of the crucible 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 passing through the upper end portion of the rivet long hole 1042 is in contact with the upper end portion. In the door frame sliding wedge 1040, the guide projection 1043 is inserted into the projection moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050. The sliding movement between the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed at its upper end with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the main frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 slides the door frame. The wedges 1040 are biased downward, and the main frame sliding wedges 1050 are biased upward, respectively. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 is provided with a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is punched out from one side surface of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 by press molding It is formed in a convex shape. The abutting elastic piece 1047 abuts against the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and it is possible to suppress rattling of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is supposed to be.

  Furthermore, the sliding door for a door frame 1040 is provided with a vertically-long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 does not interfere with the rotational movement of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, and the tip end of the first engagement projection 1017 The unit constitutes a movable space. In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the raising engagement hole 1045 causes the sliding rim 1040 for the door frame to ascend by the turning operation of the engagement cam 1016. To engage. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is cut out in the vertical direction at the lower part of the lower side of the vertical side in the vertical direction. In the escape notch portion 1049, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is in the way so that the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 reliably engages with the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066. In order not to do so, the relevant part is cut off.

  On the other hand, the main frame sliding weir 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire weir 1053 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052; Is equipped. In other words, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is not constituted by one metal longitudinal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by a press, and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 made of metal are connected by a thin metal connection wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be efficiently stored in the space of the narrow U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding wedge 1050 has a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion, and a rivet long hole 1055 penetrating in the left-right direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054 A protrusion moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left and right direction below the rivet elongated hole 1055; a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a front longitudinal side of the protrusion moving hole 1056; And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided at the upper inside of the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw is formed upward.

  The rivet elongated hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed on the upper portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of the rivet long hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the guide projecting piece 1043 on the upper side of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is inserted, and the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the 1050.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to be engaged with the other end of the spring 1048. Further, the upper end of the connecting wire wedge 1053 is bent and inserted into the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051. Furthermore, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding action of the upper hook member 1051 It can slide smoothly without rattling.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is for a rivet which penetrates in the lateral direction in the vicinity of the upper end of the hook portion 1065 projecting backward from the lower end and the plate surface of the lower hook member 1052 A long hole 1061, a downward engaging hole 1062 disposed below the long hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062, and a downward direction of the idle hole 1063 A protrusion moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connection hole 1060 bored on the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement formed in the lower lower side of the rear side of the lower hook member 1052. It has a joint portion 1066 and an abutting portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the lower hook through opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw is formed upward. Further, the rivet long hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet long hole 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding wedge 1040, and the rivet long hole 1061 is riveted In a normal state where the through hole 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating through the lowermost end of the rivet elongated hole 1061. Thus, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

  In addition, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotated, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. To engage. In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 does not interfere with the pivoting operation of the second engagement protrusion 1018. The tip of the can form a movable space. In addition, the guide piece 1043 under the sliding door 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the moving part 1042 of the lower hook member 1052, and the sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the slide for the main frame It is possible to guide mutual movement with the torso 1050.

  In addition, the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when being stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can slide smoothly without rattling.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are connected by the connecting wire ridge 1053, and in that state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 Insert the piece 1043 into the protrusion moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 and align and overlap the rivet long holes 1042 and the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061 with each other. For the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main body frame, while making the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 pass through the hook through opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 After inserting the sliding rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005 .

  When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet long holes 1055, 1061 and 1042. When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swinging shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud preventing member 1023 and simultaneously attach the first fraud preventing member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001. In addition, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is a pin hole. It is necessary to further insert a guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after fixing it to the opening 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Furthermore, with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the body frame sliding wedge 1050 housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivet 1006, the spring 1048 is bridged between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door The frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are biased in opposite directions from each other, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud The member 1032 is in contact with the restriction projection 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024 and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 such that the tip end of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  As described above, in order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting it, the hooking protrusion 1004 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the locking hole 621 of the body frame base 600 and moved upward, and the screwing portion 1003 projecting horizontally in that state is moved in that state. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by aligning the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. The screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001 b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so that rattling does not occur as compared with the case where the side surface 1001 b is formed.

  Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. Of the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the door frame 5 in which the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding frame 1050 for the main frame are engaged. The hook cover 165 is in a locked state. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in a direction to enter the insertion longitudinal opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the first engagement projection piece 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 to push down the lower hook member 1052 against the biasing force of the spring 1048 and connect it The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and descended. Thereby, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is released, and the main frame 3 is pulled out by pulling the main frame 3 to the front side. The frame 2 can be opened.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054, 1065 are in a state of being lifted by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same elevated position as shown in FIG. 96A). Since the upper side of 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, the upper side inclined portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the closing plates 24 and 25 are forcedly pressed against the outer frame 2. Since it abuts on the lower end, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 descends downward, and the upward claws of the hook portions 1054, 1065 are engaged again with the closing plates 24, 25 and the main frame sliding The wedge 1050 is raised to return to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in the direction to enter the insertion longitudinal opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the two-engaging projecting piece 1018 engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the sliding door 1040 for the door frame, and pushes up the sliding door 1040 for the door frame against the biasing force of the spring 1048 and raises it. Therefore, since the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 are released from the locked state, the door frame 5 can be released by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. It can be opened to the main body frame 3.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same position as shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 is the hook cover 165 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The sliding lid 1040 for the door frame ascends upward by coming into contact with the upper end portion of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 165 are locked again The pivot 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding weir 1040 in this embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the side surface of the main body frame 3 in the longitudinal direction. A door frame hook portion 1041 which is attached over the entire length and which is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three places of an upper end portion, a central portion and a lower end portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the entire length of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the vertical direction, and forcefully open the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert illegal equipment such as a piano wire from the interval. I can not do the act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment unlocks the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction. The locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released by rotating. In addition, the lock device 1000 of this example performs a fraudulent action such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and lowering the same. Can not be The first of the structures for preventing such fraudulent action is a lock mechanism constituted by the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the sliding door 1050 for the main frame are housed in the closed space of the above.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 abut It is in a state of In this state, the biasing force of the spring 1035 causes the first fraud prevention member 1023 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction, and the stopper piece 1027 intrudes into the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is the fraud prevention notch An engagement notch portion 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame slide lever 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked to the main frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to unfairly pull down (unlock) and it is not possible to conduct an unfair act of opening the main body frame 3.

  On the other hand, when inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and unlocking the main body frame 3 properly, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is pivoted to penetrate into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 has a pivot shaft hole. The rotation of the stopper piece portion 1027 starts to move in the clockwise direction in the drawing around 1025, and the stopper piece portion 1027 is also moved so as to withdraw from the tamper-proof notch portion 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is at a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017 as well, the leading end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding frame 1050 for the main frame is lowered, the locked state between the hooks 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main frame 3 is released to the outer frame 2. It can be done.

  In addition, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a state of being in contact with the control projection 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with the position 1032 is substantially the same as that shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud preventing member 1032 abut from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is obtained. Thereby, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when closing the main body frame 3. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 from being performed illegally, the main body If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened illegally, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to cheat the sliding rod with a piano wire etc. For this reason, it is devised that unauthorized operation on the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can not be performed.

  Further, even with the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is impossible to invalidate the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, in the case where the lock function of the lock mechanism is incapacitated by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (the main body frame base 600), the inside The door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 provided in the housing are completely covered by being enclosed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065. Since it is in the state, even if it is attempted to pull down the main frame sliding wedge 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire etc., both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. Prevents unauthorized tools from entering the enclosed space, making it a structure that can not be easily tampered with.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has the sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the slide frame 1040 inside the U-shaped base 1001 which is extremely thin as compared with the lock device in which the width dimension is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The attachment position of the cylinder lock 1010 to the U-shaped base 1001 for operating the lock device 1000 with the main frame slide lever 1050 slidably set to a position below the lower edge of the game board 4 Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left and right direction and the up and down direction is made extremely large and the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 605 of the body frame 3 is made large, It can be installed.

  In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base 1001 faces the back surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 arranged in the above are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065. It is possible not to easily carry out an unauthorized action such as pulling a piano wire or the like and pulling down the main frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside.

  Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621. The structure is such that the positioning and locking is performed and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three places on the upper, middle and lower of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) with the above structure.

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001 is screwed to the screw mounting portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and in the vicinity of the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3. The structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, but instead of this, the tip of the screw 1012 is attached using a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008. It is good also as a structure which forms the lock attachment hole screwed by penetrating the piece 1008 in the upper and lower sides of the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, the locking device 1000 can be used as the main body frame 3 (the main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000 and the lock attaching portion 625 without screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001). It can be sufficiently firmly fixed to the back of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this embodiment, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are slidably attached to the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. A sliding door 1040 for a door frame and a sliding door for a main body frame in a closed space formed by an L-shaped base (lock base) and the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base (lock base) and the first side wall 540 It is good also as a structure which accommodates 1050, and can exhibit the same effect as lock device 1000 mentioned above.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment, the transparent award ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710 a extending rearward (front-rear direction) on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper side of the award ball base 710 On the back wall of the prize ball base 710, the prize ball tank 720 for storing gaming balls supplied from the island equipment side of the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the gaming balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are aligned. A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of 710 b and a gaming ball discharged from the tank rail unit 730 to the upper tray 301 of the door frame 5 on the basis of a predetermined payout instruction. It has a partially transparent prize ball device 740 attached to the rear side of the 710b and a side part 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600 with a tank rail unit 730 and a prize ball device 74. And the transparent back cover 900 disposed substantially in the same plane as the rear face of the game board, the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. The rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized, and the rear side of the game board 4 can be inspected (visually inspected) easily without opening the back cover 900 covering the rear side of the game board 4 It can be a pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, since the rear side of the game board 4 as well as the rear side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent award ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When you remove the game board 4 from the front to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, etc. It is easy to find out that it is possible to prevent any problems from being caused by the residue.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be viewed from the outside, an unauthorized device, tool, etc. for performing cheating on the rear side or the side of the game board 4 are attached Even if it has been, it can be easily found, and it is possible to prevent fraud from being conducted, and it is also possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside. It is possible to make the installation of an unauthorized device or the like hesitate, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly effective in deterring fraud.

  In addition, since the back side of the game board 4 is covered with the award ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facilities where the game machine 4 is installed may contact the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side of the game board, and to maintain the gaming board 4 in a good state and to suppress the occurrence of problems.

  Further, the rear surface of the award ball tank 720 is positioned approximately twice as deep from the front end of the main body frame base 600 with respect to the depth D of the main body frame base 600 (see FIG. 65). Since the depth D of the frame base 600 is about half that of the main frame 3, the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. The effects can be reliably achieved. In addition, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to make a flat shape. The mounting operation can be facilitated by attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

  Furthermore, the rear surface (main body 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. Therefore, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made substantially flat, and it is possible to catch or abut on other members in the installed island equipment by eliminating the protrusion to the rear. It can prevent and it can prevent that a failure generate | occur | produces. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when transporting the pachinko machine 1, a buffer material with a simple shape can be used, and the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency) can be increased. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

  Also, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be directly viewed through the slits 916 etc. The rear side of 4 and the like can be further easily viewed, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the back side of the game board 4 held by the main frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, the heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900 and the like. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from being accumulated, and the control of the game becomes unstable due to the heat, or the member such as the synthetic resin is deformed or the occurrence of a problem is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 have a size that the game ball can not pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, It is possible to prevent the game ball from intruding into the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect due to the intrusion of the game ball.

[1-4. Basic configuration of the game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 98 to FIG. FIG. 98 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the back FIG. Further, FIG. 102 (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit on the game board in a state of being attached to a pachinko machine, and FIG. 102 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

  Further, FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the gaming board using the gaming panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 etc., and FIG. 104 is a gaming viewed from the rear of FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction. Further, FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board using the front component of the embodiment different from that of the example of FIG. 103 etc. and seen from the front, and FIG. 107 is a gaming board showing FIG. FIG.

  The gaming board 4 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, is a front configuration in which the outer circumference of the gaming area 1100 where the gaming ball is struck by the player operating the handle device 500 is partitioned and the outer shape is substantially rectangular in front. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 disposed on the rear side of the front component 1110 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 disposed on the rear lower portion of the game panel 1150, and a substrate holder 1160 And a main control board box 1170 for containing a main control board 4100 for controlling a game content to be played by putting a game ball into the game area 1100 and a predetermined control signal from the main control board 4100. A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying a game situation and visibly attached to the player at a predetermined position of the front component 1110; To have. Although this game board 4 is not shown in FIGS. 98 to 105 and will be described in detail later, a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the back of the game panel 1150 It is further provided (see FIGS. 110 to 117 and the like).

  The basic configuration of the game board 4 of this embodiment is formed by the front component 1110, the game panel 1150, the substrate holder 1160, the main control board box 1170, and the function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. The detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4) is formed by the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170. Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

1-4A. Front component]
Subsequently, the front component 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in the front and rear direction in a substantially circular shape The inner periphery of the inner shape divides the outer periphery of the game area 1100. The front component 1110 is an outer rail 1111 extending in a circular arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower end toward the left from the center in the lateral direction in front view, and extending to the upper right corner passing the upper end in the lateral direction in the front view. The inner rail 1112 is disposed inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left and right direction to the upper left diagonal upper portion, and smoothly continuous from the lower end of the inner rail 1112 Inner circumferential rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position lower than the end (upper end) of outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise in a front view, the end (upper end) of inner circumferential rail 1113 and outer rail 1111 A stop 1114 that allows the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 to connect with the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111 and the inner rail 1113 And is rotatably supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and closed between the outer rail 1111. Thus, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where it is pivoted in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front and opened between the outer rail 1111 A backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

  In this front component 1110, when the game board 4 is attached to the main frame 3, as shown in FIG. 98 and the like, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 An extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650 is located. A space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, and the game ball launched along the firing rail 660 of the bat firing device 650 is Over the space, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is driven into between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball inserted between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls up along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 By turning the opening position side against the biasing force, it is possible to enter into the game area 1100.

  In addition, when the game ball is hit hard in the ball firing device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 abuts on the stopper 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the gaming ball can be compulsorily changed by bringing the gaming ball into contact with the stopper 1114, and the gaming ball is continuously rotated from the outer rail 1111 to the inner circumferential rail 1113. It is possible to prevent movement. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (entered into) the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 is returned to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents backflow of the gaming balls.

  In addition, if the game ball hit into the game area 1100 is not accepted by the winning opening (general winning opening, starting opening, big winning opening, prize winning opening, etc.) of the table unit 2000, which will be described later, It flows down to the lower end of the area 1100 and is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 and from the out port 1151 to the rear lower side of the game board 4 To be discharged.

  On the other hand, if the game ball launched from the hit ball launcher 650 can not enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the end of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the roll of the space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is performed. It falls and is received by the ball entry 542 e of the far cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the far space 626 and discharged to the lower tray 302 in the pan unit 300.

  A metal plate is attached to the surface of the outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110, so that the wear resistance due to the rolling of the gaming ball is enhanced and the gaming ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, elastic members such as rubber and synthetic resin are arranged on the surface of the stopper 1114, and even if the game balls roll vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and make a collision, the shock is mitigated. As well as being able to repel the gaming ball inward.

  In addition, the front component 1110 has a wall-like security projection 1117 projecting forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially central portion in the vertical direction along the inner circumferential rail 1113 from the lower side of the out-out guide surface 1115 A groove-like rail security groove 1118 is provided which extends up to the front end and is recessed by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the crime prevention protrusion 1117 in the front component 1110 overlaps vertically with the crime prevention rear end projection 183 of the crime prevention cover 180 in the door frame 5. Therefore, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot support side (left side in front view), the illegal tool can be made to reach within the game area 1100. Can not be

  Further, in the front component 1110 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the protrusion 182 of the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118. To be inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so that the protrusion 182 after crime prevention substantially contacts the outer surface of the inner rail 1112 (opposite to the game area 1100). Even with the inner rail 1112 and the rail crime prevention groove 1118 and the crime prevention post 182, illegal tools such as a piano wire made to enter from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reach the inside of the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the front component 1110 is vertically spaced at the left end in the front view and recessed from the front to the rear and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 opened at the left end, and spaced apart in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view A pair of game board fasteners 1120 arranged in a row, a fixed recess 1121 disposed on the left side in front view from the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward and having an upper side formed in an arc and recessed from the front side; In the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower end, there is provided a rectangular-shaped notched ball passage cutout portion 1122 which extends in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component 1110 is engaged with the positioning member 956 attached to the inner side of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 so that the front end of the game board 4 inserted in the game board holding port 601 However, it is possible to regulate movement in the back and forth direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably engaged with the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 can be used as a game board By locking the locking portion 608, the front end right end of the gaming board 4 inserted into the gaming board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  Also, with the fixed recess 1121 of the front component 1110 inserted in the gaming board holding port 601 of the main frame 3, the gaming board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front of the main frame 3 can be viewed from the front When turned clockwise, the fixed piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the game board fixture 690 restricts the lower end of the game board 4 from moving forward. It is supposed to be. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is used as the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152.

  Furthermore, the front component 1110 has a laterally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front and rear direction near the right end in the front view at the lower end portion and a thickness in the front and rear direction from the center in the left and right direction at the lower side of the through hole 1123 A fastening portion 1124 thinly formed, and a stamped paper sticking portion 1125 which is disposed on the left side in a front view of the through hole 1123 and to which a certificate stamp for certification confirmation is stuck. Although the fastening portion 1124 in the front component 1110 is not shown in detail, when the game board 4 is attached to the previous main frame, a predetermined fastening band is fixed to the fastening hole formed in the previous main frame. Can be made difficult to remove by removing the game board 4 from each other, and unauthorized removal of the game board 4 can be prevented.

  Further, in the front component 1110, a display portion 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed on the lower right of the front view on the outside of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner circumferential rail 1113. The front component 1110 also includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 that project rearward from left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 that project rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixing boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and screws a predetermined screw from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixing boss 1162 to the mounting boss 1126. By being worn, the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. Further, the positioning projection 1127 can be fixed to the predetermined position of the game panel 1150 by fitting it to the inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150.

[1-4 B. Game panel]
Subsequently, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 has an out port 1151 penetrating in the front and rear direction at a position corresponding to the out port guiding surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at the lower center of the front view in the left and right direction. And a ball passage notch 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110, and a rear projection of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the lower right corner in a front view And an insertion hole 1153 into which the 1182 is inserted.

  Further, in the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110 near the left and right ends of the lower part and the positioning projections 1127 of the front component 1110 are inserted and fixed A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155, and a groove-like out-ball discharge groove 1156 which is recessed downward from the rear surface by a predetermined amount on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and the lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 101) And a notch 1157 which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component 1110 and which penetrates in the front-rear direction from the right end of the front view. In addition, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 of this example is capable of partitioning the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110, and within the range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front, A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a table unit 2000 is attached. In addition, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. In addition, the gaming panel 1150 is formed such that the out port 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100 in the front component 1110 when assembled to the gaming board 4. The game ball guided backward by the out-out guide surface 1115 is made to enter the out-port 1151 and be discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open. The substrate holder 1160 has an out-ball discharge portion 1161 formed to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall substantially at the center in the left-right direction in a front view, and the upper surface of the bottom wall is an out-ball The game ball which is formed to be lower toward the discharge unit 1161 and is discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit or the back unit, and supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the substrate holder 1160 is The ball is discharged downward from the out ball discharging portion 1161. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is positioned immediately above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3. The game balls discharged from the above are all discharged downward to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the substrate unit 800.

  Further, the substrate holder 1160 is provided with a plurality of fixing bosses 1162 projecting forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are adapted to be fitted with the rear end of the mounting boss 1126 of the front component 1110 after the tip is inserted into the boss insertion hole 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520 With the boss 1126 fitted, the inside of the fixing boss 1162 is penetrated from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126, whereby the substrate holder 1160 with respect to the front component 1110 is It can be assembled, and the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 101, the substrate holder 1160 has a fixing portion 1163 and a fixing portion capable of fitting the fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 from the side at the left end portion of the rear surface in the rear wall in a rear view. An elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 disposed so as to face the portion 1163; and a locking portion 1164 which can be locked from the rear. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 by the fixing portion 1163 and the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Subsequently, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control substrate box 1170 is a thin horizontal box-shaped substrate base 1171 open on the rear side, and a thin horizontal box-like shape covering the rear surface of the substrate base 1171 open on the front side and fitted into the substrate base 1171 from the rear side. And a main control board 4100 having electronic components, terminals and the like mounted on the rear side of the front end of the board cover 1171. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end of the substrate base 1171 in a rear view, and a fixing piece 1174 which fits with the fixing portion 1163 of the substrate holder 1160, and the right end of the substrate cover 1172 from a rear view. And a resilient fixing piece that is resiliently engaged with a locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 that protrudes rearward.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed at the right end portion of the rear view two at a time, with the elastic fixing piece 1175 interposed therebetween, sealing the opening and closing of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 117 Seal (not shown) which is applied across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower end of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal covering the surface of the sealed seal A protective cover 1177 and a substrate management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 1172 are provided. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control substrate box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation and cutting portion 863 of the delivery control substrate box 860 in the substrate unit 800, and caulking fixation is performed on any one of the four sealing portions 1176. It is done. In order to separate the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, the main control substrate box 1170 needs to cut the caulked fixed sealing portion 1176 so that the trace of the opening and closing of the main control substrate box 1170 remains. It has become. Thus, whether or not the main control board box 1170 is improperly opened can be clearly determined visually from the outside.

  In addition, since four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided in this example, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed three times. Further, in the main control substrate box 1170 of this example, a hermetic seal is attached across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and when the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut. It is necessary to peel off, and even in this hermetic seal, a trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally remodeled or replaced with an incorrect main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). Even if it can be confirmed visually from the outside, it can be prevented that those fraudulent acts are performed.

  In the main control board box 1170, an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 is formed at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c or the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening. Various connection terminals and the like for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like come to the rear side. Incidentally, by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100 f facing from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170, Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 or the sealing seal is cleverly worked, the presence or absence of an unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed other than by visual observation, and a pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention performance is provided. It can be done.

[1-4 E. Function Display Unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is attached and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component 1110, and the display unit 1181 is disposed on the front of the front component 1110 so as to be visible from the player side, and the front component 1110. And a rear protrusion 1182 protruding rearward than the rear surface.

  In the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 102A, the game state changed by the game balls driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end in front view Play status indicator 1183 consisting of a single LED, and two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the game status indicator 1183 to display the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting opening 2201 For the first special symbol memory indicator 1184 and for the first special lottery result which is placed on the right of the first special symbol memory indicator 1184 and received by the game ball to the first starting opening 2201 the first special symbol The first special symbol display 1185 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying as and the second starting opening 258 disposed on the upper right of the first special symbol display 1185 The second special symbol indicator 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery result drawn by acceptance of the game ball to b as the second special symbol, and the second special symbol indicator 1186 And a second special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of reservations regarding the reception of the game ball to the second starting opening 2587b, which is composed of two LEDs lined up and down on the right side.

  In addition, on the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180, there are an ordinary symbol storage indicator 1188 consisting of four LEDs for displaying the number of reservations regarding passage of the gate portion 2585a by the gaming ball, and an ordinary symbol storage indicator 1188 An ordinary symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED for displaying an ordinary lottery result, which is arranged on the side and the gaming ball passes through the gate 2585a, as an ordinary symbol, and a diagonal upper right corner of the ordinary symbol memory indicator 1188 Display the number of times (the number of rounds) the opening and closing pattern of the first large winning opening 2102 and the second large winning opening 2509 arranged side by side when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" etc. And a round indicator 1190 consisting of two LEDs.

  The game state indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a red, green, orange, and color LED capable of changing its light emission color, and the light emission color to be emitted and the on / off blink By the combination, various game states (for example, probability fluctuation state, time shortening state, positive short time state, big hit gaming state, small hit gaming state, etc.) can be displayed.

  In addition, when the first special symbol memory display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 can not variably display the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1185, the gaming ball is received in the first starting opening 2201 In this case, the number of reservations (the number of memories) of the first special symbol whose start of the variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol memory display 1184 has two first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b consisting of predetermined LEDs, and is held by the lighting and blinking patterns of the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b. The number can be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a, 1184b Lights together, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a flashes and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b lights when the number of reservations is three, and the number of first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b both when the number of reservations is four It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  In addition, when the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 can not variably display the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 1186, the gaming ball is received in the second starting opening 2587b In this case, the number of reservations (the number of memories) of the second special symbol whose start of the variable display is held (stored) is displayed. This second special symbol memory display 1187 has two second special symbol memory lamps 1187 and 1187b consisting of a predetermined LED, and is held by the lighting / flashing pattern of the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b. The number can be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b Turns on together, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a flashes and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b lights when the number of reservations is three, and when the number of reservations is four, both the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b both It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Furthermore, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b, the first special lottery The result and the second special lottery result are displayed, and after the 7 segment LED fluctuates for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, it stops after the change and the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7 segment LED The player can recognize the special lottery result and the second special lottery result.

  The normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a red, green, orange, and color LED capable of changing its light emission color, and is a combination of the light emission color to be emitted and the light on / flashing. Thus, it is possible to display an ordinary lottery result which is drawn when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after being variably displayed for a predetermined time as in the special symbol.

  Also, when the gaming ball passes through the gate portion 2585a when the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 in the function display unit 1180 can not variably display the normal symbol in the normal symbol indicator 1189, the start of the variation display is suspended It is to display the number of reservations (the number of memories) of the stored standard symbols. This ordinary symbol memory display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the ordinary symbol memory lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holdings. The number of reserved symbols can normally be displayed by sequentially turning on 1188 d. In the present example, up to four variable symbols of normal symbols are reserved (stored).

  Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 is provided with a two-round indicator lamp 1190a consisting of a predetermined LED and a fifteen-round indicator lamp 1190b, and the respective lamps are turned on to round the "big hit" game. The number can be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (A), the function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 in a state where the game board 4 is attached to the pachinko machine 1 It has become. In addition, the game state indicator 1183 of the function display unit 1180, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187, the ordinary symbol memory The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are attached to the front of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 153). A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component 1110 of the game board 4, the function is compared with the case where it is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150. The display unit 1180 can be used as a basic configuration of the game board 4, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 which can be embodied by the back unit 3000 and which can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different, the position of the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change. The store clerk or the like in the hall can be made to recognize the position of the display portion 1181 without confusion To have.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may have a form as shown in FIG. 102 (B). In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 configured by seven-segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. Further, the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are each constituted by four LED groups, and the ordinary symbol memory display 1188 is constituted by two LEDs.

  Since the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are composed of eight LED groups in addition to the same function and effect as described above can be achieved by the function display unit 1180 as well. It is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player as compared with the case of using the segment LED. Therefore, since the contents displayed on the function display unit 1180 are hard to understand, it is possible to prevent the display on the function display unit 1180 from being concerned during the game and making it difficult to concentrate on the game, the movement of the game ball, The game can be made more enjoyable by concentrating on movable effects, effect images and the like.

1-4F. Second embodiment of game panel]
Subsequently, a game panel 1200 having a form different from the game panel 1150 in the above-described game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. The front component 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 103 to 105 have the same configuration as those described above, and the detailed description thereof is omitted here. The game panel 1200 of this embodiment is thinner than the above-described game panel 1150, and has a plate shape capable of dividing the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is divided by the front component 1110, according to the outer shape of the front component 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1220 attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110 and detachably holding the panel plate 1210 from the front side.

  The panel board 1210 in the game panel 1200 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the game area 1100, and is made of acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, a synthetic resin plate such as methacrylic resin, glass, metal, etc. Is formed of a mineral board. The thickness of this panel board 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail is planted on the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel board 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

  The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery and made up of circular holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1212 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left part and penetrating in the front-rear direction and vertically. Is equipped. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are disposed outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement steps 1213 having a front side recessed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engagement step 1213 is cut out to about half of the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100, like the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 in the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Furthermore, although the details will be described later, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000 such as the attacker unit 2100 and the center character 2500 etc. From this point on, the attacker unit 2100 and the like are inserted and fixed (not shown).

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the gaming panel 1200 has a size including the panel plate 1210 and a substantially rectangular outer shape, and has a thickness substantially the same as the thickness of the gaming panel 1150 made of wood described above (in this example, about 20 mm) and made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). In the panel holder 1220, a holding step 1221 detachably holding a panel plate 1210 and recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and a size substantially equal to that of the game area 1100 inside the holding step 1221 It mainly comprises a through hole 1222 penetrating in the direction.

  The depth of the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210 from the front surface, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220 It becomes almost the same plane as. Further, the front inner peripheral surface of the holding step portion 1221 is sized such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. By this clearance, even if the panel board 1210 relatively expands and contracts due to a temperature change and a temporal change, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. The clearance may be filled with an elastic member such as rubber.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, from the front of the holding step portion 1221 A plurality of projecting pins 1223 which can be extended and fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these projecting pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Furthermore, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engagement claw 1224 and an engagement piece 1225 which engage with the engagement step 1213 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claws 1224 are disposed on the upper holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, correspond to the upper engaging step 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and extend from the front of the holding step 1221 to the front. It protrudes toward and resiliently engages with the engagement step 1213. The engagement claw 1224 is sized such that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engaging piece 1225 is disposed in the lower holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step 1213 in the panel plate 1210, and is between the front surface of the holding step 1221 and the panel In a state in which a predetermined gap having a size that allows the engagement step 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed, the plate 1210 is configured to extend a predetermined amount toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220. The panel plate 1210 is detachably held on the panel holder 1220 by engaging the engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engagement claws 1224 and the engagement pieces 1225.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the mounting boss 1126 provided on the front component 1110 can be inserted. The boss insertion hole 1226 is a mounting boss of the front component 1110 By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component 1110 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 in a form recessed on the front side by a predetermined amount so as to leave an outer peripheral edge lower than the center slightly below in the vertical direction. ing. The rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end by a predetermined range from the lower end by the attachment support portion 1227 so that the outer peripheral portion on the rear surface protrudes rearward, and the amount of depression ( The depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) which can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 3010 c (see FIG. 114 etc.) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the mounting support 1227. And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 1227, the fixing portion 3010 c can be prevented from projecting rearward beyond the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, ie, the game board 4, can be used as the main unit frame 3. It can be securely installed and installed in the game board holding port 601 of (pachinko machine 1).

  Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 which are disposed in the mounting support 1227 on the rear surface side and into which predetermined screws can be screwed. In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion formed on a member to be attached and fixed using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning protrusion (shown in the figure, projecting forward from a fixing portion 3010 c formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 3010). Is omitted)) is inserted. In the present example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) in a rear view.

  An attachment hole of an appropriate diameter according to the size, weight, etc. of a predetermined member to be attached and fixed such that the inner diameter of the hole is a mixture of a large diameter and a small diameter with respect to the attachment hole 1228 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portion 1230 It has become. Note that, as shown in FIG. 103, these thinned portions 1230 are not formed within a predetermined range from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height, and within that range, the panel holder 1220 is Since the front surface is a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component 1110 disposed on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the gaming balls fired from the striking device 650 are smoothly guided. It has become so. Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a lightening portion 1230 so that the mounting hole 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and they are supported and the strength of the panel holder 1220 is maintained. The box-like rib is formed for the purpose of

  The panel holder 1220 is provided with a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) or an assembly jig, and the game panel 1150 is held by the obstacle nail planting device. It is possible to set in the state of In the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 penetrating in the front and back direction at a position corresponding to the out port guiding surface 1115 of the front component 1110 And a ball passage notch 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110, and a rear projection 1182 of the function display unit 1180 inserted in the front-rear direction through the lower right corner in front view And an insertion hole 1234.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is a groove-like out-ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface toward the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and open at the lower end side. A notch 1236 is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and is cut away so as to penetrate from the right end in the front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the out ball discharging groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is formed on the main body frame 3 (upper surface of the game board placement portion 606 in the main body frame base 600). It is adapted to be fitted with the provided positioning projection 607, and by the out ball discharging groove 1235 being fitted with the positioning projection 607, the game board 4 is moved relative to the main frame 3 in the left and right direction. It is supposed to be regulated.

  In the game panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engagement claw 1224 and the engagement piece 1225 engage with the engagement step portion 1213. By combining them, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front sides of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 become substantially flush, and a conventionally used obstacle nail planting It is possible to set the panel board 1210 in the conventional obstacle nail implanting apparatus while holding the panel plate 1210 in the panel holder 1220 without remodeling the installation apparatus, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost for implanting the obstacle nail It can be done.

  In addition, although the game panel 1200 of this example is not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within the range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. And the front unit 2000 can be attached. In addition, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thus, in the thin panel board 1210, only the front unit 2000 is supported, so that the panel board 1210 can be prevented from being distorted by the load of the front unit 2000.

  Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1200 is configured to be divided by the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, an increase in weight of the entire gaming panel 1200 can be suppressed even when the panel plate 1210 is a transparent plate, and a transparent panel The pachinko machine 1 which can be seen by the player from the rear side of the game area 1100 can be embodied through the board 1210, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to attract the player's attention strongly.

  Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220, the panel board 1210 whose position such as the obstacle nail or the winning opening changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part The panel holder 1220 can be a common part, and by replacing only the panel plate 1210, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with the game board 4 compatible with various models.

  Further, since a plurality of mounting holes 1228 are provided in advance in the panel holder 1220 in a predetermined arrangement, mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 and the like mounted and fixed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 The panel holder 1220 can be a common part of the pachinko machine 1 which does not depend on the model by designing the fixing portions of various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228 even if they are at different positions. It has become.

[1-4G. Second embodiment of front component member]
Next, a front component 1110A different from the front component 1110 in the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. In the game panel 1200, the substrate holder 1160 and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 106 and 108, the outer shape of the panel plate 1210 and the inner shape of the through hole 1222 of the panel holder 1220 are the embodiments of FIGS. The configuration is the same as that of the example shown in FIGS. 103 to 105, except for the difference.

  The front component 1110A shown in FIGS. 106 and 107 is different from the above-described front component 1110 in that it has a function display unit 1180 other than a part of the inner circumferential shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The points are very different. The other configuration is the same as that of the front component 1110, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description will be omitted. Further, in the game board 4 using the front component 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit Prepared for 2000).

  As shown in the figure, the front component 1110A has a frame-like inner circumferential shape extending clockwise in a front view from the out-out guide surface 1115 up to the stop 1114 of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. The shape is formed in the same shape as the above-mentioned front component 1110, and the shape from the stopper 1114 to the out-port guiding surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from the above-mentioned front component 1110 ing. More specifically, the section from the stopper 1114 to a position immediately above the right sticker sheet sticking portion 1125 disposed immediately below the stopper 1114 is formed in a gentle arc, and from the lower end of the arc to the outlet. It is formed in the shape of a straight line inclined so that the distance up to the guiding surface 1115 is lower toward the out-port guiding surface 1115.

  The front component 1110A of this example can secure the game area 1100 more widely as compared with the above-mentioned front component 1110, and the player can be more entertained by the wide game area 1100. It can be done.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the game panel 1200 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1110A, but the present invention is not limited to this. FIGS. 100 and 100 are shown on the rear side of the front component 1110A. A game panel 1150 consisting of a single plate as shown at 101 may be attached.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machine]
Subsequently, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 108 and FIG. FIG. 108 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 109 is a perspective view seen from the back with the game board accommodated in the main frame.

  First, as shown in FIG. 108, the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is a side surface on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. And a metal reinforcing unit 150 mounted on the rear surface of a door frame base 110 made of synthetic resin in the door frame 5. As shown in FIG.

  As described above, the side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion type material, and the dimension in the vertical direction is substantially the same as the dimension in the vertical direction of the main body frame base 600 In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component 1110 (1110A) and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 are combined. The side crime prevention plate 950 is a plate-like side plate piece 952a extending in the vertical direction and extending in the front-rear direction to form a side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end extending inward in a substantially right angle direction (open side) A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending from the side plate piece 952a along the front end piece 952b so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance on the rear side of the front end piece 952b And a rear end piece 952d. Thus, the front end of the side security plate 950 is formed in a substantially U-shaped cross section opening inward (open side) by the front end piece 952 b and the middle piece 952 c.

  The side crime prevention plate 950 (main body 952) has strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 by the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d disposed in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. It is enhanced, and the strength of the entire body frame 3 can be enhanced to support the game board 4 and the door frame 5 and the like well.

  On the other hand, as described above, the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed into a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 using spot welding, rivets, etc. In the outer side of the support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the support side, a support U-shaped protruding piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened to the outside (the support side) is provided. In the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced by the axially supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 is less likely to bend. .

  By the way, in this example, the door frame 5 is mounted and supported only at the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the main frame 3 and the main frame 3, the support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main frame 3 becomes large. There is a risk of fraud. On the other hand, in the crime prevention structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, between the front end piece 952 b and the middle piece 952 c formed inside the front end of the side crime prevention plate 950 A rear-side piece of the pivoting-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (advanced), and the front end piece 952b is pivotally supported. It is in a state of being sandwiched by the side U-shaped projecting pieces 166. As a result, even if the door frame 5 is forcedly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the pivotally U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 abuts on the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the pivoting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 from moving away from the main body frame 3, so that it is possible to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being broken open. It is possible to prevent the fraudulent action such as opening the door frame 5 against 3 being performed.

  Further, since the side crime prevention plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is The strength and the rigidity of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the security performance can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, since the rear end of the side plate piece 952a in the side crime prevention plate 950 is extended rearward than the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side plate piece 952a is assumed. Even if is destroyed, illegal tools such as a piano wire can not penetrate into the game area 1100 on the front of the game board 4 (game panel 1150) from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a, and cheating is performed. Can be reliably prevented. In addition, as shown in FIG. 108, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outside of the side crime prevention plate 950 so as to cover the outside, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It is possible to sufficiently fight against the vandalism of Also, in general, in the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1. From the (front) side, it is almost impossible to allow the unauthorized tool to enter behind the rear end of the side plate piece 952c, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

  Subsequently, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 109, a prize ball base 710, a tank rail 731 and a prize ball device 740 in the main frame 3 accommodating the game board Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the game board 4 can be used as the rear or side of the game board 4 housed in the main frame 3. It is possible to visually recognize from the rear side of the main body frame 3 without removing it from the main body frame 3 or opening the back cover 900. As a result, even if an illegal device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily found, and it can be prevented that an illegal act is performed. In addition, since an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside, it is possible to make the installation of the unauthorized device fooling, and it becomes possible to increase the deterrence against fraud. ing.

  Further, since the rear side and the side of the game board 4 can be viewed through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. from the rear side of the main body frame 3, the main body frame for maintenance or model change. When you remove the game board 4 against 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt, etc. remain between the main unit frame 3 and the game board 4, those should be outside. As a result, it is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring and to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of the game board]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 110 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine, FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the game board viewed obliquely from the front right, and FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the game board viewed obliquely from the left front. FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and viewed from the rear FIG. FIG. 116 is a cross-sectional view of the game board cut at substantially the center in the vertical direction and seen from the upper side, and FIG. 117 is a cross-sectional view of the game board cut at the center in the horizontal direction and seen from the right.

  The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and the game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium when the player operates the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component 1110A for partitioning and forming the inner periphery of the game area 1100 to be driven, and a rear of the front component 1110A are attached to close the game area 1100 and have a predetermined shape corresponding to the game area 1100 And a plate-shaped game panel 1150 having a plurality of openings 1158 (see FIGS. 114 and 115 and the like) penetrating in the front-rear direction and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100.

  The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of wood plywood such as a plywood.

  In addition, the game board 4 is attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side, the back unit 3000 attached to the back of the game panel 1150, and the back unit 3000 from the player side The main liquid crystal display device 1900 attached visibly and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a substrate holder 1160 attached to the lower portion of the back surface of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 from the back side And a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of this example is disposed at the lower part in the gaming area 1100, the attacker unit 2100 disposed in the upper right of the out-port 1151 and in the left side of the attacker unit 2100 directly above the out-port 1151. A starting opening unit 2200, a front side unit 2300 extending in an arc along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2200, and a function display unit 1180 attached to the front side unit 2300 and capable of displaying the gaming state And a frame-shaped center character 2500 disposed substantially in the center of the game area 1100.

  Also, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is attached to the back side of the game panel 1150 and the front side is opened, and an opening 3010 b through which the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 faces in the front and back direction is formed in the back wall 3010 a. And a relay board 3020 attached to the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010, a lamp driving board 3021, a motor driving board 3023, and a front lamp relay board 3025.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is mounted in the back box 3010 and has a back liquid effect display device 3111, and a back bottom left effect unit 3200 attached to the left and right sides of the back light effect unit 3100 and back. A lower right rendering unit 3300, a lower back rendering unit 3200 attached to the front of the lower back left rendering unit 3200 and a lower back right rendering unit 3300, a lower back rendering unit 3500 attached to the left and right sides in the lower box 3010, and a lower back A back left rendering unit 3600 and a back right rendering unit 3700 respectively disposed on the front side of the rear rendering unit 3500, and a back up rendering unit 3800 mounted on the front side of the back rear rendering unit 3500 are provided.

  Also, on the rear side of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, although the details will be described later, peripheral control that accommodates a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 153) having a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150. A substrate box 1910 is provided.

  In the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a frame-shaped center character 2500 is attached to the game panel 1150 so that the main liquid crystal display device 1900 faces the player at substantially the center of the game area 1100. There is. At least a part of each of the left and right ends of the center character 2500 extends to the inner periphery of the game area 1100, and the game area 1100 is divided up and down. Although details will be described later, the game balls driven into the game area 1100 can flow down the left and right outside of the window 2501 of the center character 2500. Then, in the game area 1100, the area from the top left of the center character 2500 in front view and the area from the lower side to the approximate center in the vertical direction on the left side are formed in a relatively wide area where the game ball can flow In these areas, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement.

  The game board 4 of this embodiment has a plurality of protrusions of the center character 2500 when the game ball is hit to the left in the front view, that is, the left route 1100L side than the highest part of the peripheral wall 2502 of the center character 2500. It flows between the parts 2512 and flows down the left side of the center work 2500. Then, when entering the warp inlet 2503 opened in the peripheral wall 2502 of the center character 2500, the sorting member is distributed to either the warp outlet 2505 side supplying to the stage 2506 or the outlet 2508 side returning to the inside of the game area 1100. It is supplied to 2520 and distributed to either. In this way, the player can be snarled and pounded by making sure that the gaming ball having entered the warp entrance 2503 can be distributed to the warp exit 2505 side (stage 2506 side) by the distribution member 2520. The player can enjoy the movement of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the game balls are distributed to the warp outlet 2505 with high probability.

  The game balls distributed to the warp outlet 2505 by the distribution member 2520 are supplied to the stage 2506. The game balls supplied to the stage 2506 are rolled in the left and right direction on the stage 2506 and then released into the game area 1100, so that the movement different from the movement caused by the obstacle nail can be enjoyed and When the gaming ball is released into the gaming area 1100 from 2506 d, it is possible to win a prize at the first starting opening 2201 of the starting opening unit 2200 with high probability.

  In addition, when the gaming ball driven to the left route 1100 L side does not enter the warp entrance 2503, it enters the entrance 2507 and enters the gaming area 1100 from the outlet 2508 lower than the distributing member 2520. Released. The game ball driven into the left route 1100 L side of the game area 1100 and released from the outlet 2508 of the center character 2500 is guided by the left shelf 2302 of the front side unit 2300 to the center side of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction. There is a possibility of winning to the general winning opening 2301 of the front side unit 2300.

  On the other hand, when the game ball is hit to the right in the front view, that is, the right route 1100R side than the highest part of the peripheral wall 2502 of the center character 2500, the right outer circumference of the center character 2500 and the inner circumference of the game area 1100 Through the narrow gap of the front component 1110A and into the attacker passage 2509a opened near the stopper 1114 of the front component 1110A and discharged right above the gate 2585a of the second starting port unit 2580. That is, by performing a right strike, the game ball can be passed through the gate unit 2585a with extremely high probability.

  Further, although details will be described later, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a and is detected by the gate sensor 2586, the ordinary lottery result is randomly selected and executed in a very short time. If the result is "normal hit", the door member 2589 is pivoted to allow the game ball to be received in the second start port 2587b, and the game ball entering the gate portion 2585a is made to win in the second start port 2587b. be able to. If the result of the normal lottery is “normal loss”, the gaming ball having passed through the gate portion 2585a flows down the front surface of the door member 2589 for closing the second starting opening 2587b and causes the guiding member 2584 to perform the second attacking unit 2100 One big winning opening 2102 is released. Therefore, it is possible to play a game directly aiming at the second start opening 2587 b and the first large winning opening 2102 by right-handed.

  Furthermore, when the game ball is won in the first start port 2201 and the second start port 2587b, a lottery of the special lottery result is performed, and the special lottery result in which the special advantageous gaming state in which the player such as the big hit game is advantageous occurs When the player wins the lottery, the first large winning opening 2102 and the second large winning opening 2509 disposed in the attack passage 2509a can receive the game balls in a predetermined pattern. Then, when the first large winning opening 2102 or the second large winning opening 2509 becomes acceptable, by right-handling, the game ball is sent to the first large winning opening 2102 or the second large winning opening 2509 with extremely high probability. You can win a prize.

  As described above, in the gaming board 4 of the present embodiment, different impressions can be played on the right and left sides of the center character 2500, so that various games can be provided to make it hard to get bored. Can.

[2-1. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119. FIG. FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board viewed from the front, and FIG. 119 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board viewed from the rear.

  The front unit 2000 of the game board 4 is disposed at the lower right of the game area 1100 at the lower center of the game area 1100 at the upper right side of the out port 1151 and is supported by the front of the game panel 1150. A start opening unit 2200 disposed directly above the out opening 1151 at the center and attached to the front of the game panel 1150, and a front side disposed on the left of the start opening unit 2200 and extending substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 1100. A unit 2300, a function display unit 1180 attached to the front of the front side unit 2300 at substantially the center in the vertical direction, and a frame-shaped center character 2500 disposed substantially at the center of the game area 1100 and supported by the game panel 1150 And.

  The attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 has a general winning opening 2101 capable of always receiving gaming balls driven into the gaming area 1100, and a first large opening as a variable winning opening disposed below the general winning opening 2101. A winning opening 2102 is provided. Although the first big winning opening 2102 of the attacking unit 2100 will be described in detail later, the reception of the game ball is made according to the special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b. It becomes possible.

  In addition, although the details will be described later, the starting opening unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 is provided with a first starting opening 2201 that can be opened upward and can always receive gaming balls. The first starting opening 2201 is disposed substantially right at the center in the horizontal direction in the game area 1100 and directly below the chance exit 2506 d in the stage 2506 of the center character 2500 and has a high probability that the gaming ball released from the chance exit 2506 d is high. Can be accepted.

  Further, the front side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is provided with three general winning openings 2301 which can receive a game ball at all times, which will be described in detail later. Further, the front side unit 2300 has a left shelf 2302 for guiding the gaming ball to the center side on the top surface of the function display bonnet 2307 to which the function display unit 1180 is attached.

  The center character 2500 of the front unit 2000, which will be described in detail later, is attached to a large opening 1158 formed substantially at the center of the game panel 1150, and the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 disposed on the rear side. Are formed in a frame shape having a window 2501 from which the player can visually recognize from the player side. The center character 2500 enters a peripheral wall 2502 that prevents game balls from entering the frame, a warp inlet 2503 opened at a predetermined position on the left side outer surface of the peripheral wall 2502, and a warp inlet 2503. The warp passage 2504 through which the game balls are distributed, the warp outlet 2505 capable of releasing the game balls distributed through the warp passage 2504, and the game ball 1100 after rolling the game balls discharged from the warp outlet 2505 in the left and right direction And a distribution member 2520 for distributing the game ball to the warp inlet 2503 to either the warp outlet 2505 side or the discharge port 2508 side for discharging the game ball into the game area 1100. There is.

  In addition, the center character 2500 is opened on the right outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall 2502 in a front view right, and an attacker passage 2509a through which game balls can flow, and a second winning opening 2509 disposed in the attacker passage 2509a as a variable winning opening A gate portion 2585a disposed immediately below the downstream end of the attacking passage 2509a and capable of detecting passage of gaming balls, and a second starting opening 2587b disposed immediately below the gate portion 2585a as a variable winning opening. The second starting opening 2587b of the center combination 2500 can receive the game balls according to the result of the normal lottery that the game balls pass through the gate portion 2585a. In addition, the second large winning opening 2509 of the center character 2500 becomes possible to receive the game ball according to the special lottery result which is drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b. .

[2-2. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 120 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the attachment unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the attachment unit as viewed from the rear.

  The attacker unit 2100 of the gaming board 4 in the front unit 2000 of the present example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 formed on the right side of the center of the lower part of the gaming panel 1150 in the horizontal direction. It is fixed to the front of the The attacker unit 2100 includes a general winning opening 2101 in which the game balls driven into the game area 1100 can be received, and a first big winning opening 2102 disposed below the general winning opening 2101. . The first large winning opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long plate-like opening and closing member 2104 described later.

  As shown in the figure, the general winning opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and is in a state where it can always receive the gaming ball. The first large winning opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 is a horizontally long rectangular shape having a length of 4 to 6 times the front view left and right direction with respect to the diameter of the game ball and an upper and lower direction slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball It is open, and the open opening can be opened and closed by a plate-like opening and closing member 2104. The opening and closing member 2104 of the first large winning opening 2102 is rotatable about the lower side as a rotation axis, and when the opening and closing member 2104 is in a substantially vertical state, the game ball can not be received and the opening and closing member 2104 is substantially In the horizontal state, it is possible to receive the game ball, and it is considered as a so-called variable winning opening.

  The attacker unit 2100 of the present embodiment will be described in more detail. The attacker unit 2100 is attached to the top of the elongated plate-like base plate 2104a which is in contact with the front of the game panel 1150 and through which the first large winning opening 2102 penetrates and the base plate 2104a and constitutes a general winning opening 2101 An attacker base 2104 having a box-shaped receiving portion 2104b which protrudes forward from the front and is open upward and backward, and a bowl portion 2104c which can be directed backward from the lower end of the rear end of the receiving portion 2104b to guide gaming balls; A horizontally long plate-like opening / closing member 2104 capable of closing the first large winning opening 2102 opened in the base plate 2104a of the base 2104 is provided. The bowl portion 2103 c of the attacker base 2103 can deliver the gaming ball received to the general winning opening 2101 to a ball discharging unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 described later.

  The opening and closing member 2104 includes a shaft portion 2103a extending outward from the lower portion at both left and right ends, and an action pin 2103b extending in the right direction from a position obliquely below the shaft portion 2103a at the right end in front view . The opening and closing member 2104 can open and close the first large winning opening 2102 by the shaft portion 2103a being rotatably supported by an upper case 2105 and a lower case 2106 described later.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2100 has a pair of bearing upper portions 2105a capable of supporting the shaft portion 2104a of the opening / closing member 2104, a horizontally elongated box-like storage upper portion 2105b corresponding to the first large winning opening 2102 and open forward and downward. And an upper passing hole 2105c which is formed almost directly behind the hook portion 2103c of the attacker base 2103 on the rear side of the housing upper portion 2105b and which vertically penetrates through which game balls can pass, and the base plate 2104a of the attacker base 2104 The upper case 2105 is attached to the rear side of the

  Further, the attacker unit 2100 is opposed to the pair of lower bearing portions 2106 a that rotatably support the shaft portion 2104 a of the opening / closing member 2104 in cooperation with the upper bearing 2105 a of the upper case 2105, and the upper housing 2105 b of the upper case 2105. A lower box-shaped lower housing portion 2106b whose front and upper side are open, a lower rear hole 2106c of the upper case 2105 which communicates with the upper hole 2105c of the upper case 2105 on the rear side of the lower housing portion 2106b And a through hole 2106d which penetrates the bottom wall of the lower housing 2106b in the vertical direction at a position on the left of the passage lower 2106c in front view and through which game balls can pass, and is assembled from the lower side to the upper case 2105 And a lower case 2106 attached to the rear side of the base plate 2104a of the base 2104. The lower case 2106 is inclined such that the bottom wall of the lower portion 2106 b of the housing portion becomes lower toward the through hole 2106 d.

  By combining the upper case 2105 and the lower case 2106 of the attacker unit 2100, the shaft 2104a of the opening and closing member 2104 can be rotatably supported by the upper bearing 2105a and the lower bearing 2106a, and the opening and closing member 2104 is The first large winning opening 2102 can be opened and closed by turning. Also, the upper case 2105 and the lower case 2106 upper part 2105 b and lower part 2106 b of the lower case 2106 can form a space capable of accommodating the gaming ball on the rear side of the first large winning opening 2102 and penetrates the accommodated gaming ball It can be discharged downward through hole 2106d. The upper case 2105 and the lower case 2106 are formed of a light transmitting material.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2100 has a plunger 2107a which is held between the upper case 2105 and the lower case 2106 and can move back and forth in the left and right direction. And a link member 2108 for rotating the member 2104. The first attachment solenoid 2107 is disposed on the right of the upper side of the passage hole 2105 c and the lower side of the passage hole 2106 c so that the plunger 2107 a moves forward and backward from the right end.

  Further, the link member 2108 is disposed in the vicinity of the tip end of the advancing and retracting plunger 2107 a of the first attachment unit 2107 and is rotatably supported by an upper case 2105 and a lower case 2106 with respect to an axial center extending in the front and rear direction. An engaged portion 2108b disposed at a position eccentric to the shaft 2108a and the axial center of the rotational shaft 2108a and integrally rotating with the rotational shaft 2108a and engaged with the tip of the plunger 2107a, and an engaged portion 2108b , And a pair of operation pins 2108c which are integrally rotated with the rotation shaft 2108a and separated in the circumferential direction. The pair of operating pins 2108c of the link member 2108 extends forward, and the working pin 2104b of the opening and closing member 2104 is located between the pair of operating pins 2108c when the attacker unit 2100 is assembled.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2100 is mounted on the lower surface of the lower case 2106 and receives the game balls passed through the through holes 2106 d, and then releases the passage members 2109 downward on the rear side of the through holes 2106 d. The first sensor mounted on the upper surface directly above the passage hole 2105c and capable of detecting the game ball, and the first count which is mounted on the through hole 2106d of the lower case 2106 and detects the game ball received in the first big winning opening 2102 And a sensor 2111.

  In the present embodiment, no gaming ball is supplied to the spare sensor 2110 of the attacker unit 2100.

  Furthermore, it is attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 2112 attached to the rear surface of the base plate 2103a of the attacker base 2103 so as to straddle the rear side of the attacker unit 2100, upper case 2105 and lower case 2106, and to the rear surface of the substrate cover 2112 And a first attachment solenoid 2107, a spare sensor 2110, a first count sensor 2111, and a panel relay substrate 3020 attached to the upper surface of the upper case 2105. The relay unit relay terminal board 2114 relays the connection of the above. The first big winning opening decorative substrate 2113 is connected to the lamp driving substrate 3021 of the back unit 3000.

  Under normal conditions, the plunger 2107a of the first attachment solenoid 2107 is in an extended state in the present embodiment. In this state, the action pin 2104b of the opening and closing member 2104 is pushed downward by one of the operation pins 2108c of the link member 2108, and the plate-like opening and closing member 2104 is erected. It is in a closed state.

  From this normal state, when the first attachment solenoid 2107 is energized by a big hit game or the like, the plunger 2107 a moves in the left direction of the front view and is in a state of being immersed. When the plunger 2107a moves leftward in a front view, the link member 2108 is centered on the axis of the pivot shaft 2108a by the engaged portion 2108b of the link member 2108 engaged with the tip of the plunger 2107a. It will turn around. When the link member 2108 pivots in the front clockwise direction, the pair of actuation pins 2108c of the link member 2108 revolves in the upward direction, and the actuation pin 2104b of the opening / closing member 2104 is lifted with the elevation of the actuation pin 2108c. It turns around the shaft 2104 a in the direction. As a result, the opening / closing member 2104 rotates so that the upper side thereof moves forward about the shaft portion 2104 a, and the game ball can be received into the first large winning opening 2102.

  In addition, by causing the LED provided on the first special winning opening decoration substrate 2113 to emit light, the attacker unit 2100 can make the first special winning opening 2102 emit light and decorate with the light transmitting / closing member 2104.

[2-3. Starting port unit]
Subsequently, the starting opening unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. FIG. 124 is a perspective view of the start port unit of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 125 is a perspective view of the start port unit of the front unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the starting opening unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the starting opening unit as viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the starting opening unit 2200 of this example is disposed right above the out opening 1151 at the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 1100, and is the first starting that can receive the game ball opened upward. A mouth 2201 is provided.

  The start opening unit 2200 in this example is, as shown, a plate-shaped start opening base 2202 attached to the front of the game panel 1150, and is attached to the front of the start opening base 2202 and bulges forwardly to the first start A start opening bonnet 2203 in which the opening 2201 is disposed, a translucent lens member 2204 attached to the rear side of the start opening base 2202, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the lens member 2204 A first starting opening decorative substrate 2205, a cylindrical reflector 2206 disposed between the first starting opening decorative substrate 2205 and the starting opening bonnet 2203 and extending in the front-rear direction, and a rear side of the first starting opening decorative substrate 2205 And a substrate cover 2207 attached to the rear side of the lens member 2204.

  The starting opening base 2202 of the starting opening unit 2200 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface and a plated layer having a metallic luster. In addition, the starting opening base 2202 penetrates in the front-rear direction at a substantially central position, and penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position on the front view outer side of the starting opening bonnet 2203 and the lens member 2204 faces the insertion hole 2202a through which the reflector 2206 can pass. And a plurality of openings 2202b.

  In addition, the start opening bonnet 2203 of the start opening unit 2200 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is opened, and a predetermined decoration is provided on the front side. In addition, the start opening bonnet 2203 is provided with a box-shaped receiving portion 2203 a which forms the first start opening 2201 and is opened upward and backward at the top. The entire start opening bonnet 2203 is formed of a translucent material, and a plated layer having metallic luster is formed on a portion of the front surface excluding the approximate center below the receiving portion 2203a. There is.

  The lens member 2204 of the starting opening unit 2200 has a collar 2204a formed at the upper end and guiding the gaming ball received in the first starting opening 2201 backward, and an insertion hole 2202a of the starting opening base 2202 below the collar 2204a. It has an insertion hole 2204b which penetrates in the front-rear direction so that the reflector 2206 can pass therethrough substantially, and a decorative portion 2204c which faces the player from the opening 2202b of the start opening base 2202 which bulges forward. The lens member 2204 can guide the light from the LED provided in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the first starting opening decorative substrate 2205 to emit light and decorate the opening 2202 b of the starting opening base 2202 and the side surface of the starting opening bonnet 2203.

  The reflector 2206 of the start port unit 2200 is formed of a low light transmitting material and is attached to the rear surface of the lens member 2204. The reflector 2206 can prevent the light from the LED provided near the center of the first starting opening decorative substrate 2 from leaking to the outside, and is provided near the outer periphery of the first starting opening decorative substrate 2205 The light from the LED can be prevented from leaking inward, and only the front center of the start opening bonnet 2203 can be illuminated and decorated.

  When the game ball is received by the receiving portion 2203a of the starting opening bonnet 2203 forming the first starting opening 2201, the starting opening unit 2200 of this embodiment receives the hook portion 2204a of the rear side lens member 2204 from the starting opening bonnet 2203. It can be delivered to the ball discharging unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later.

[2-4. Table side unit]
Subsequently, the front side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130. FIG. 128 (a) is a perspective view of the front side unit of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 128 (b) is a perspective view of the front side unit of the front unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the front side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the front side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

  The front side unit 2300 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 is the inner periphery of the game area 1100 at a position closer to the lower side from the center in the vertical direction on the left than the center in the horizontal direction in the game area 1100 on the panel board 1210 of the game panel 1150 It is fixed to the front of the game panel 1150 so as to be in contact with (the right side surface in a front view of the inner rail 1112). The front side unit 2300 has an outer shape in a front view formed in an arc along the inner periphery of the game area 1100.

  The front side unit 2300 of this embodiment has three general winning openings 2301 which can always receive gaming balls and arranged in an arc along the inner periphery of the gaming area 1100, and a front surface more than three general winning openings 2301. The left shelf 2302 is disposed on the left side and the upper side, and the game ball can be rolled so that the right side is lowered, and the right side is disposed across the two general winning openings 2301 near the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction. And a right shelf portion 2303 on which the game ball inclined so as to be lowered can be rolled.

  Further, the front side unit 2300 is attached to the front of the game panel 1150 and is formed in an arc shape as a whole, and has a front side base 2304 having three general winning openings 2301 and a front side disposed on the rear side of the front side base 2304 Front side decoration substrate 2305 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a substrate cover 2306 which covers the rear side of the front side decoration substrate 2305 and is attached to the rear side of the front side base 2304 and the front side than the top general winning opening 2301 And a shallow box-like function display bonnet 2307 attached to the front of the front side base 2304 on the left side and the upper side and opened rearward. In the front side unit 2300 of the present embodiment, a function display board 1191 is attached to the rear side of the function display bonnet 2307.

  The front side base 2304 of the front side unit 2300 protrudes from the front, and is disposed below the upper receiving portion 2304a and the upper receiving portion 2304a, which are disposed slightly lower from the approximate center in the vertical direction and form one general winning opening 2301. The lower receiving portion 2304b which is disposed on the side to form two general winning openings 2301, and the upper receiving portion 2304a and the lower receiving portion 2304b respectively extend backward from the rear side and the gaming balls received in the respective general winning openings 2301 are rear And a buttock 2304c for guiding the user. The upper receiving portion 2304a is formed such that one general winning opening 2301 opens upward. The lower receiving portion 2304c is formed such that the general winning opening 2301 closer to the upper receiving portion 2304a in a front view opens obliquely to the upper left, and the general winning opening 2301 at a side farther from the upper receiving portion 2304a is It is formed to open to the right. Further, the upper surface of the base portion 2304c is inclined so that the right side is lower, and is made a right shelf portion 2303 capable of guiding the game ball.

  Further, the front side base 2304 is provided with a fan-shaped frame-like bonnet attachment portion 2304 d for attaching the function indication bonnet 2307 to the left side in a front view of the upper support portion 2304 a. The front side base 2304 has a light transmitting predetermined decoration on the front surface except the bonnet mounting portion 2304 d.

  The function display bonnet 2307 of the front side unit 2300 is formed in a fan shape with a front view shape having a circular arc along the inner periphery of the game area 1100, and the upper surface inclined so that the right side is lower and the left shelf 2302 It is done. In addition, the function display bonnet 2307 has a plurality of openings 2307 a corresponding to a plurality of LEDs mounted on the function display substrate 1191 on the front surface. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the function display bonnet 2307 extends rearward so as to surround each opening 2307a on the rear side, and the light from the LED of the function display substrate 1191 corresponding to one opening 2307a is the other A reflector piece is provided to prevent leakage into the opening 2307a. In the present embodiment, the function display unit 1180 is configured by the function display substrate 1191 and the function display bonnet 2307.

  The front side unit 2300 of the present embodiment is the left side of the center character 2500 in the game area 1100, and more specifically, the game ball released from the outlet 2508 and flowing down is moved to the right by the left shelf 2302 and the right shelf 2303. It is possible to guide in the direction (the center of the play area 1100 in the left and right direction). Also, the front side unit 2300 sends the game balls received in the three general winning openings 2301 of the front side unit 2300 to the back side of the game panel 1150 by the respective hooks 2304c, and the balls of the back unit 3000 described later. It can be delivered to the discharge unit 3400.

[2-5. Center feature]
Subsequently, the center product 2500 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 148. FIG. 131 is a front view of the center character of the front unit, FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the center character from the front, and FIG. 133 is a perspective view of the center character from the rear. FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the center part disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the center parts separated into each main members and viewed from the rear is there. Further, FIG. 136 is a perspective view of the distribution member of the center part seen from the front, and FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the distribution member of the center part seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 138 is a front cross-sectional view showing the left route in the center product with a part of the warp passage. FIG. 139 is a perspective view showing the lower warp passage member and the stage member in the center product. FIG. 140 (a) is a front perspective view of a second attacher unit of the center product, and FIG. 140 (b) is a rear perspective view of the second attacher unit. Furthermore, FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the second attachment unit of the center product disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the second attachment unit of the center product disassembled and seen from the rear is there.

  FIG. 143 (a) is a front perspective view of the second starting opening unit of the center product, and FIG. 143 (b) is a rear perspective view of the second starting opening unit of the center product. Further, FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the second starting opening unit of the center product disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the second starting opening unit of the center product disassembled and seen from the rear FIG. Further, FIG. 146 (a) is a front cross-sectional view showing the right route in the center part, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in (a). Further, FIG. 147 (a) is an enlarged front sectional view showing the main part of the right route when the second starting opening of the center part is open, and FIG. 147 (b) is the second starting opening in (a) It is side sectional drawing cut | disconnected in the site | part of. Further, FIG. 148 is an enlarged front cross-sectional view of the main part of the right route when the second big winning opening in the center combination is open.

  The center character 2500 of this embodiment is inserted from the front side to the opening 1158 which penetrates the substantial center of the game panel 1150, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1150. Can be divided up and down. As shown in FIG. 110 and the like, this center role product 2500 is provided with a window 2501 that allows the player to visually recognize the rear side, and the entire window 2501 is formed in a frame shape.

  The center character 2500 is in a state of being attached to the game panel 1150. The peripheral wall 2502 can prevent the game ball from intruding into the window 2501 and the front of the peripheral wall 2502 in a state of being bulging forward than the game panel 1150. Warp entrance 2503 opened on the left side outer peripheral surface where the game ball can enter, warp passage 2504 where the game ball entering the warp entrance 2503 can flow, and release of the game ball having circulated the warp passage 2504 The warp outlet 2505 opened in the inner circumferential surface of the 2502 (in the window 2501) and the gaming ball discharged from the warp outlet 2505 are supplied and disposed at the lower portion in the window 2501 and supplied And a stage 2506 for releasing the liquid into the game area 1100 after being rolled.

  The stage 2506 of the center product 2500 has a warp outlet 2505 disposed at the left end in a front view and a first stage 2506a which is curved in the left-right direction and can release game balls forward, and the front side of the first stage 2506a The second stage 2506b is disposed on the lower side and curved in the left and right direction so that the game balls can be released into the front play area 1100, and corresponds directly above the first start opening 2201 of the first stage 2506a. And the game ball which has entered the chance entrance 2506c is released into the game area 1100 and immediately above the first starting opening 2201 in front of and below the second stage 2506b. And a chance outlet 2506d opened at a corresponding position.

  The first stage 2506 a and the second stage 2506 b of the stage 2506 have a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed, and the center role 2500 is mounted on the game panel 1150 at positions corresponding to directly above the first starting opening 2201 respectively. In this state, the substantially central position in the left-right direction is formed in a wave shape so as to be slightly higher than the left and right sides. Further, the lowest part of the first stage 2506 a is formed to be outside in the left-right direction than the lowest part of the second stage 2506 b.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 139 and the like, the stage 2506 is provided at a predetermined position of the first stage 2506 a and the second stage 2506 b, and has a plurality of guiding portions 2506 e inclined downward toward the front, And a bank portion 2506f disposed at the front end excluding the portion where the guide portion 2506e is disposed in the second stage 2506b and protruding upward. The guide portion 2506e of the stage 2506 is provided at the lowest position of the first stage 2506a and the second stage 2506b, and at a position corresponding to the position directly above the first starting opening 2201 in the second stage 2506b.

  The center character 2500 has the upper outer peripheral shape of the peripheral wall 2502 from the position on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view to the right from the position on the game area 1100 corresponding to the stop 1114 of the front component 1110A. It is formed in an arc shape along the inner circumference, and on the left side of the arc-shaped portion, it is recessed downward by a predetermined distance and is formed to be inclined downward to the left. . Thus, the gaming ball driven into the upper portion of the game area 1100 through the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 of the front component 1110A passes the left side of the window 2501 in a front view by the peripheral wall 2502 It circulates either 1100L and the right route 1100R passing through the right side of the window 2501 in a front view.

  Further, as shown in the figure, in the center character 2500, part of the left and right ends extend to the inner periphery of the game area 1100, and near the inner periphery of the game area 1100 in the front view left of the warp entrance 2503 The entrance 2507 opened to the bottom, the outlet 2508 released to the lower position of the distributing member 2520 which releases the gaming ball which entered the entrance 2507 into the gaming area 1100, and the right side of the window 2501 as viewed from the front The game ball is guided from the right end of the arc shaped portion along the inner periphery of the game area 1100 at the top of the peripheral wall portion 2502 to the upstream side of the attacker unit 2100 and the second large winning opening 2509 (Fig. 146 etc. And an attacker passage 2509a in which the reference is disposed. Thus, the game balls driven into the game area 1100 circulate in the center character 2500 regardless of whether the left route 1100L or the right route 1100R is circulated.

  As shown in FIG. 134 and FIG. 135 etc., the center character 2500 is attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side, and has a frame shape including a part of the peripheral wall 2502 and forming the rear wall of the warp passage 2504. A center base 2510, a distribution member 2520 mounted in the warp passage 2504 on the front surface of the center base 2510, a left passage cover 2530 covering the front side of the distribution member 2520 and forming a front wall of the warp passage 2504, and a distribution member A left aisle back cover 2540 attached to the rear of the center base 2510 at a position rearward of 2520 and capable of guiding gaming balls, and a warp aisle 2504 attached to the rear of the center base 2510 downstream of the distributing member 2520 A lower warp passage member 2550 which constitutes a part and has a warp outlet 2505; And a stage member 2560 having a stage 2506 is mounted on the lower rear side of the Besu 2510.

  In addition, the center part 2500 is disposed below the second attachment unit 2570 attached to the second attachment unit 2570 attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 on the right side in a front view, and attached to the bottom end of the right side of the center base 2510 And a right passage cover 2600 attached to the front side right side front view of the center base 2510 and capable of covering a part of the second attachment unit 2570, and a center base located under the right passage cover 2600 A lower right channel cover 2605 attached to the front of the 2510 and capable of covering a part of each of the second attachment unit 2570 and the second start port unit 2580, and attached to the rear side of the second attachment unit 2570 forward light toward the front Center right light emitting unit 2610 capable of irradiating And a branch sensor 2620 attached from the rear side to 2510.

  Further, the center part 2500 is a cylindrical reflector 2630 attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 above the distribution member 2520 and extending in the front-rear direction, and spreads on the outer periphery of the reflector 2630 and on the rear side of the center base 2510 A center left decorative substrate 2632 disposed on the front and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, a center left substrate cover 2634 covering the rear side of the center left decorative substrate 2632 and attached to the rear side of the center base 2510, a center base 2510 and a reflector 2630 And a magnetic detection sensor 2636 capable of detecting magnetism. The center left decorative substrate 2632 and the center left substrate cover 2634 have holes through which the rear end of the reflector 2630 can be inserted.

  In addition, the center character 2500 is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 so as to be adjacent to the left side in a front view of the second attachment unit 2570, and a center right emission decoration unit 2640 capable of emitting light and a center right emission decoration unit 2640 and A transparent plate-shaped protective cover 2650 attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 and preventing the game balls from invading the rear side through the window 2501, and light is emitted toward the left side of the protective cover 2650 in a front view Substrate cover mounted on the rear side of the center base 2510 holding the rear end of the protective cover left decorative substrate 2652 mounted with a plurality of possible LEDs and extending in a plate shape in the front and rear direction and the vertical direction and the protective cover left decorative substrate 2652 2654, and.

  Furthermore, the center character 2500 is attached to the upper part in the frame on the front side of the center base 2510, is provided with a decoration on the logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and has an on-center rendering unit 2660 movable according to the gaming state. .

  Next, each member constituting the center character 2500 will be described in detail. In the center base 2510 of the center product 2500, a peripheral wall portion 2502 that bulges forward with respect to the game panel 1150 is disposed substantially around the entire circumference except for a portion to which the lower stage member 2560 is attached. Further, the lower side to which the stage member 2560 is attached is formed in a plate shape along the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the chance outlet 2506d is opened at a position corresponding to the position directly above the first starting opening 2201. There is.

  The center base 2510 of this embodiment forms a rear wall of the passage from the warp inlet 2503 to the distributing member 2520 in the warp passage 2504, extends vertically along the left end of the window 2501 in a front view, and is recessed backward. A recess 2510a, a plate-like left extension 2510b extending leftward from the left end of the passage recess 2510a, a left extension 2510b and a passage recess 2510a are formed on the lower side of the passage recess 2510a and are recessed rearward while being laterally long A distribution space recess 2510c to which the distribution member 2520 is attached, a right opening 2510d which opens downward at the bottom right end in the front view in the distribution space recess 2510c and through which game balls can pass, and a distribution larger than the right opening 2510d And a left opening 2510 e that opens rearward at a position on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the space recess 2510 c.

  Further, the center base 2510 extends from the upper end of the left extension 2510b in a plate-like shape and has a shelf 2510f inclined so that the left end is low, and a lower side of the left end of the shelf 2510f and above the distribution space recess 2510c At the position of the left extending portion 2510b in the front-rear direction to allow passage of gaming balls through the passage opening 2510g, and the guide piece 2510h inclined so as to extend forward from the lower end of the passage opening 2510g and become lower toward the rear; The left extension 2510 b is provided with a passage hole 2510 i which penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position below the shelf 2510 f and through which the reflector 2630 can pass.

  Further, the center base 2510 forms a part of the peripheral wall 2502 on the right side of the window 2501 in a front view, forms an attacker passage 2509a through which gaming balls can flow, and includes a plate-like passage wall 2510j extending forward. ing. This center base 2510 guides the game ball which has flowed down to the right in a front view along the arc-shaped upper part of the peripheral wall 2502 as shown in detail in FIG. The branch entrance passage 2510k formed, the branch space 2510l having a predetermined width formed by the passage wall 2510j which is in communication with the lower end of the branch entrance passage 2510k and disposed directly under the lower end of the branch entrance passage 2510k and is formed by the passage wall 2510j A communication passage 2510m which is in communication with the lower right corner of the space 2510l and which is formed by the passage wall 2510j and which guides the gaming ball downward, communicates with the lower end of the communication passage 2510m and the lower end communicates with the gaming area 1100 Second large winning opening 2509 is disposed and formed by passage wall 2510 j And a second attacker space 2510n predetermined size.

  The center base 2510 communicates with the upper portion of the second attachment space 2510n and passes through the left side of the second attachment space 2510n in a front view, the lower end communicates with the inside of the gaming area 1100, and the gaming ball formed by the passage wall 2510j flows A guiding portion 2510p that forms a part of the possible bypass passage 2510o and the inner wall of the second attachment space 2510n and inclines so as to become lower toward the second large winning opening 2509 and circulates the communication passage 2510m. The right end of the front view forms the upper end of the second large winning opening 2509, the left end forms the inlet end of the bypass passage 2510o, and the inclined portion 2510q is inclined so that the right end is lower and the lower side of the inclined portion 2510q. And an insertion hole 2510 r which penetrates in the front-rear direction and in which a part of the second attachment unit 2570 is inserted from the rear side Eteiru. The guiding portion 2510p of the center base 2510 is formed such that an extension of the inclined surface passes through the second large winning opening 2509.

  Further, the center base 2510 is a plate-like upper extension extending outward along the front surface of the game panel 1150 from the rear end of a portion recessed downward from the center in the left-right direction in the upper part of the peripheral wall portion 2502 in the left-right direction. A center portion on which a plurality of (three in this example) protruding portions 2512 protruding forward from the protruding portion 2511, the upper extending portion 2511, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the upper extending portion 2511 An upper left decorative substrate 2513 and a substrate cover 2514 that covers the rear side of the center upper left decorative substrate 2513 and is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 are provided.

  The sorting member 2520 of the center character 2500 is mounted in the sorting space recess 2510 c of the center base 2510, and the gaming ball entering the warp inlet 2503 is either to the side of the warp outlet 2505 or to the side of the outlet 2508. It is a sort of thing. As shown in FIGS. 136 and 137, the distributing member 2520 is extended so as to extend in the left-right direction and is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is low, and a rolling surface 2521 on which gaming balls can roll, and a rolling surface 2521 A fan-shaped discharge portion 2522 disposed at the lowest position of the lower portion and expanding rearward and downward in the lateral direction, and a ridge portion 2523 disposed on the rear side and lower side of the discharge portion 2522 and extending in the front-rear direction; A guiding surface 2524 extending obliquely downward from the left and right sides of the collar 2523 and capable of guiding the gaming ball, and a projection 2525 projecting upward from the rear end of the rolling surface 2521 excluding the release portion 2522 And.

  The rolling surface 2521 extending in the left-right direction of the distributing member 2520 is formed so that the position closer to the right from the center in the left-right direction in the front view becomes lowest. The rolling surface 2521 of the distributing member 2520 is formed such that the inclination angle from the horizontal is larger at the right side in the front view than at the left side with respect to the lowest position.

  The left passage cover 2530 of the center work 2500 is disposed on the front side of the passage recess 2510 a of the center base 2510 and forms the warp inlet 2503 and the upper front side of the warp passage 2504 and has a translucent upper warp passage cover 2531 A translucent guide path cover 2532 which is disposed to be separated from the warp path cover 2531 to the left in front view and guides the game ball entering the entrance 2507 and the entrance 2507 to the guide piece 2510 h of the center base 2510; A transparent plate-like distribution space cover 2533 which is disposed under the guide passage cover 2532 and the upper warp passage cover 2531 and closes the front side of the distribution space recess 2510 c of the center base 2510, and above the distribution space cover 2533 Arranged between the upper warp passage cover 2531 and the guide passage cover 2532 And a center left decorative body 2534 having a light-transmitting property with bulging semispherical towards.

  The upper warp passage cover 2531 of the left passage cover 2530 is formed in a box shape whose upper, lower, and rear sides are open and which extends in the vertical direction, and cooperates with the passage recess 2510 a of the center base 2510. The gaming ball having entered the warp inlet 2503 can be made to flow downward in the back and forth direction in a zigzag manner. In addition, the guide passage cover 2532 is formed in a box shape that is open in the upper and lower directions while the upper side, the lower side, and the rear side are opened, and the rear side is closed by the left extension 2510 b of the center base 2510. A guide passage 2532a for guiding the game balls can be formed.

  In addition, the center left decorative body 2534 of the left passage cover 2530 is formed with a transparent hemispherical front surface on a smooth surface, and a rear surface side is formed with multiple triangular surfaces with different sizes and shapes. . As a result, the plate thickness of the hemispherical portion becomes nonuniform, the lens is formed for each triangular portion, and the transmitted light can be irregularly refracted. In addition, the center left decoration 2534 has a relief-like decoration with metallic luster on the hemispherical front outer periphery. The center left decorative body 2534 is disposed in front of the passage hole 2510i of the center base 2510, and the back left movable of the back left presentation unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 disposed on the rear side through the inside of the cylinder of the reflector 2630 The light can be decorated by emitting light from the decoration unit 3610.

  The left passage rear cover 2540 of the center product 2500 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and can cover the rear side of the left opening 2510 e and the passage port 2510 g in the center base 2510. The left passage cover 2540 is guided by the induction piece 2510 h of the center base 2510 so that the game ball guided to the rear side of the center base 2510 through the passage opening 2510 g can It has a guiding wall 2541 for guiding to the height of the lower side of 2510 e, and a gently sloping discharge slope 2542 for guiding the gaming ball guided by the guiding wall 2541 forward.

  The release slope 2542 of the left aisle back cover 2540 extends from the rear side to the lower side of the left opening 2510 e in the center base 2510, and the gaming ball guided to the release slope 2542 by the guide wall 2541 inclines the release slope 2542. Thus, it is rolled forward and discharged from the outlet 2508 into the play area 1100 through the left opening 2510 e.

  The lower warp passage member 2550 of the center character 2500 is formed in a rectangular tube shape having translucency and extending in the vertical direction, and as shown in FIG. 139, an opening 2551 through which game balls can pass is formed at the top. While being formed, the warp outlet 2505 is opened at the lower part of the right side in a front view. The opening 2551 of the lower warp passage member 2550 coincides with the right opening 2510 d of the center base 2510 in an assembled state, and gaming balls passing through the right opening 2510 d can flow in the lower warp passage member 2550.

  The stage member 2560 of the center product 2500 includes a transparent stage main body 2561 having a first stage 2506 a and a second stage 2506 b, a transparent stage back cover 2562 covering the back and lower sides of the stage main body 2561, and a stage back. A stage decoration substrate 2563 is disposed between the cover 2562 and the stage main body 2561 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on its front surface.

  The stage main body 2561 of the stage member 2560 is provided with a rear wall portion 2561 a which extends upward in a plate shape from the rear end of the first stage 2506 a excluding the chance inlet 2506 c. The rear wall portion 2561 a of the stage main body 2561 can prevent the game balls supplied to the stage 2506 from being dropped to the rear side of the stage 2506. The stage main body 2561 has a cross section on the back side of the first stage 2506a, the second stage 2506b, and a portion extending vertically between the first stage 2506a and the second stage 2506b, although detailed illustration is omitted. A plurality of lens portions 2561 b which are semicircular and extend in the front-rear direction and the top-bottom direction are provided. These lens portions 2561 b can make it difficult to visually recognize the lower side of the stage 2506, and the entire stage 2506 can be illuminated and decorated with light from the LED of the stage decoration substrate 2563.

  In addition, the stage back cover 2562 of the stage member 2560 includes a chance passage 2562a for connecting the chance inlet 2506c and the chance outlet 2506d, and a return portion 2562b projecting forward from the upper end of the rear wall portion 2561a of the stage main body 2561. There is. Furthermore, the stage decoration substrate 2563 of the stage member 2560 is disposed on the rear side of the stage 2506 and below the first stage 2506a, although the detailed illustration is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 140 to 142, the second attachment unit 2570 of the center product 2500 extends in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position on the front lower portion of the unit base 2571 attached to the rear side of the center base 2510. The second opening and closing member 2572 rotatably supported around the same axis, a transparent plate-like front cover 2573 disposed on the front side of the second opening and closing member 2572 and attached to the front of the unit base 2571, and the unit base 2571 Of the second attachment solenoid 2574a disposed on the rear side of the second attachment and movable plunger 2574a, and attached to the tip of the plunger 2574a of the second attachment solenoid 2574 to transmit the advancement and retraction of the plunger 2574a to rotate the second opening / closing member 2572 And the link member 2575

  In addition, the second attacking unit 2570 houses and supports the second attacking solenoid 2574 from the rear side and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 2571 and a front surface of the second attacking solenoid 2574 mounted on the front side of the solenoid base 2576 Is detected by the second count sensor 2578 and the second count sensor 2578, which can detect the game ball attached from the rear side to the unit base 2571 and received from the second large winning opening 2509. And a passage cover 2579 attached to the rear side of the unit base 2571 by guiding the gaming ball guided to the rear side of the 2571 downward.

  The unit base 2571 of the second attachment unit 2570 is formed in a crescent shape whose lower end is expanded in a front view, and is formed in a shallow box shape whose rear side is opened. The unit base 2571 has a plate-like insertion surface 2571a slightly projecting forward from the front of the lower part and the outer shape corresponding to the insertion hole 2510r of the center base 2510, and penetrating in the front and rear direction substantially at the center of the insertion surface 2571a An axial hole 2571 b rotatably supporting the member 2572, an opening 2571 c penetrating in a circular arc along the outer periphery of the axial hole 2571 b and through which an action pin 2572 c of the second opening / closing member 2572 described later is inserted The game ball which is penetrated in the front and rear direction in a rectangular shape at a position on the left side of the front view and which is received by the second large winning opening 2509 can pass through the passage opening 2571d through which the game ball can pass The receiving portion 2571e and the guide portion extended outward from the left and right upper ends of the receiving portion 2571e and inclined downward into the receiving portion 2571e, respectively. 571f, a sensor holding unit 2571g formed on the left and right sides of the receiving unit 2571e opposite the induction unit 2571f and holding the second count sensor 2578, extending upward from the bottom of the receiving unit 2571e and moving backward And a triangular induction piece 2571h inclined to be low.

  The unit base 2571 is a second opening / closing member which is formed respectively in the lower right projecting portion 2571i which protrudes forward from the position of the shaft hole 2571b in the lower right position in front view, the lower right projecting portion 2571i and the guiding portion 2571f in the front view right side. A pair of stopper portions 2571 j for restricting the rotation range of 2572 and plate-like ribs 2571 k extending from the lower end of the lower right protrusion 2571 i to the approximate center and lower end of the right side surface of the receiving portion 2571 e in front view . The front ends of the lower right protruding portion 2571i, the stopper portion 2571j, and the rib 2571k protrude forward to the same position as the front end of the receiving portion 2571e. A front cover 2573 is attached so as to cover the front sides of the receiving portion 2571e, the guiding portion 2571f, the lower right protruding portion 2571i, and the rib 2571k.

  The unit base 2571 further includes a ball passage 2571 l extending rearward from the rear surface and being opened rearward and guiding the gaming ball having passed through the passage opening 2571 d to the right in front view. A passage cover 2579 is attached to the rear end of the ball passage 2571l so that an opening through which the game ball can pass is formed at the right end in front view of the rear end.

  When the second attachment unit 2570 is attached to the center base 2510, the insertion surface 2571a of the unit base 2571 protrudes forward so that the front surface thereof substantially coincides with the rear surface of the second attachment space 2510n in the front-rear direction. Further, the right end of the guiding portion 2571 f on the right side in a front view of the unit base 2571 forms the lower end of the second large winning opening 2509. Further, the stopper portions 2571 j formed respectively on the right guiding portion 2571 f and the lower right protruding portion 2571 i are arranged to face each other along a circular arc centered on the axial center of the axial hole 2571 b, and the axial hole It is spaced apart at an angle of about 90 degrees about the axis of 2571b. While the stopper range 2572c of the second opening and closing member 2572 abuts on the pair of stopper portions 2571j, the rotation range of the second opening and closing member 2572 can be regulated, and the second opening and closing member 2572 is opened and closed. It can be positioned on

  The second opening and closing member 2572 of the second attacking unit 2570 is a drop-shaped vane portion 2572a for opening and closing the second large winning opening 2509, and a shaft hole 2571b of the unit base 2571 extending rearward from the base end of the wing portion 2572a. The shaft portion 2572b to be inserted and supported, and the action pin 2572c extending rearward from the rear side of the blade portion 2572a at the eccentric position of the shaft portion 2572b, and the tip of the blade portion 2572a from the base portion of the blade portion 2572a And a stopper piece 2572 d extending to the opposite side across the portion 2572 b.

  The second opening / closing member 2572 is rotated by inserting the shaft portion 2572b into the shaft hole 2572b of the unit base 2571 so that the action pin 2572c penetrates the opening 2571c of the unit base 2571 from the front side of the unit base 2571. The predetermined angle range is supported by the stopper piece 2572d being positioned between the pair of stopper portions 2571j of the unit base 2571 while being supported, and the stopper piece 2572d rotating with the blade portion 2572a abutting on the stopper portion 2571j. It can only rotate inside.

  In the second opening and closing member 2572, the rear end of the action pin 2572 c is slidably inserted into the slit 2575 c of the link member 2575. Thus, when the link member 2572 is moved back and forth in the left and right direction by the plunger 2574a of the second attachment solenoid 2574, the rear end of the action pin 2572c slides vertically in the slit 2575c of the link member 2575, and the second opening and closing member 2572 It pivots around the shaft 2572b.

  Further, the second opening and closing member 2572 is positioned between the pair of stopper portions 2571 j of the unit base 2571 when the stopper piece 2572 d is assembled, and the wing portion 2572 a stands approximately vertically to make the second large winning opening 2509 When the stopper piece 2572d abuts against the stopper portion 2571j of the lower right projecting portion 2571i when in the closed state, and the tip of the wing portion 2572a moves in the right direction in a front view, and the second large winning opening 2509 is opened The rotational range of the second opening and closing member 2572 is restricted by the contact of the 2572 d with the lower stopper portion 2571 j of the right guiding portion 2571 f.

  The second attacher solenoid 2574 of the second attacher unit 2570 is disposed in the direction in which the plunger 2574a extends in the right direction in a front view. The link member 2575 of the second attacher unit 2570 extends in a plate shape from the front end of the plunger attachment portion 2575a attached to the tip of the plunger 2574a of the second attachmenter solenoid 2574 and the front end of the plunger attachment portion 2575a. An extending piece 2575b and a slit 2575c which penetrates the extending piece 2575b in the front-rear direction and extends in the vertical direction and into which the action pin 2572c of the second opening / closing member 2572 is slidably inserted.

  The solenoid base 2576 of the second attacher unit 2570 is formed in a box shape with an open front, accommodates the second attacher solenoid 2574, and can slide the link member 2575 in the left-right direction in cooperation with the solenoid cover 2577. Hold on.

  The second attacker unit 2570 of the present embodiment is attached to the center base 2510 to form a second large winning opening 2509 by the inclined portion 2510 q of the center base 2510 and the induction portion 2571 f of the unit base 2571. The gaming ball received to the second large winning opening 2509 is guided into the receiving portion 2571 e by the guiding portion 2571 f of the unit base 2571, and is detected by the second count sensor 2578, and then is guided rearward by the guiding piece 2571 h . The gaming ball guided backward by the guiding piece 2571h enters the rear ball passage 2571l through the passage opening 2571d of the unit base 2571 and is discharged rearward from the right end in a front view of the ball passage 2571l.

  Further, in the normal state, the second attachment unit 2570 is in a state where the plunger 2574a of the second attachment solenoid 2574 is advanced to the right in front view by the biasing force of a spring not shown, and the link member 2575 is advanced by the advancement of the plunger 2574a. The blade portion 2572a of the second opening / closing member 2572 is in a state of rising substantially vertically. As a result, the second large winning opening 2509 is closed by the second opening and closing member 2572. On the other hand, when the second attachment solenoid 2574 is energized by a big hit game or the like, the plunger 2574a retracts into the second attachment solenoid 2574, and the second opening / closing member 2572 rotates clockwise in a front view via the link member 2575. Do. As a result, the second large winning opening 2509 is opened.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 to 145, the second starting opening unit 2580 of the center character 2500 is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 below the second attachment unit 2570 and penetrates in the front-rear direction substantially in the left-right direction. A unit base plate 2581 having an opening 2581a extending vertically and a reverse right lower front cover 2582 attached to the front of the unit base plate 2581 from the approximate center of the front view of the unit base plate 2581 to the left front; A normal symbol display board 1191a on the front side of which the normal symbol display 1189 consisting of LEDs is mounted on the front surface, and a substrate mounted on the rear side of the lower right front cover 2582 holding the normal symbol display board 1191a from the rear side An opening 2 in the front surface of the unit base plate 2581 on the left side of the holder 2583 and the lower right front cover 2582 in front view 81a and a guide member 2584 attached to the bottom of.

  Further, the second starting port unit 2580 is a gate member attached to the rear side of the unit base plate 2581 and having gate portions 2585a and barrier portions 2585b protruding forward through the openings 2581a of the unit base plate 2581 and arranged vertically. 2585, a gate sensor 2586 attached to the gate portion 2585a of the gate member 2585 for detecting passage of gaming balls, and a gaming sensor that is attached to the rear side of the gate member 2585 and guided through the gate portion 2582a to the front It has a guide passage 2587a for guiding the vehicle, a second starting opening 2587b opened to the lower side of the guiding passage 2587a, and a discharge passage 2587c through which gaming balls having passed through the second starting opening 2587b flow It is attached to the box-like passage member 2587 and the right end of the passage member 2587 as viewed from the front. And a plate-shaped channel lid 2588 attached to the rear side of the member 2585.

  Furthermore, the second starting port unit 2580 is rotatably supported by the passage member 2587 and the passage lid 2588 and is mounted on the rear side of the guiding passage 2587a in the passage member 2587, and a door member 2589 which opens and closes the second starting opening 2587b. Start port solenoid 2590 having a plunger 2590a which can be advanced and retracted in the vertical direction, a first link member 2591 which moves up and down along with advancement and retraction of the plunger 2590a of the start port solenoid 2590, and vertical direction of the first link member 2591 Second link member 2592 that transmits the movement of the door member 2589 to rotate the door member 2589, and a game ball supported behind the second starting opening 2587b of the passage member 2587 and detecting the gaming ball that has passed through the second starting opening 2587b The second link member 2592 is mounted on the right side in front view of the start opening sensor 2593 and the passage cover 2588. And a link cover 2594 which covers.

  Also, the second starting opening unit 2580 is disposed on the rear side of the passage member 2587 and the passage cover 2588 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a second starting opening decoration substrate 2595 and A first substrate cover 2596 that covers the side and is attached to the rear of the unit base plate 2581, and an inverted L-shaped front lower right decorative substrate 2597 disposed on the rear side of the unit base 2581 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front , A reflector 2598 disposed between the front lower right decorative substrate 2597 and the unit base plate 2581, and a second substrate cover 2599 attached to the rear side of the unit base plate 2581 covering the rear side of the front lower right decorative substrate 2597 And have.

  The unit base plate 2581 of the second starting opening unit 2580 is formed of a translucent material, and penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the lower right front cover 2582 in the front view right side of the opening 2581 a It has a mouth 2581b. Further, the unit base plate 2581 is decorated on the front side on the left side in a front view with respect to the portion where the lower right front cover 2582 is attached.

  The lower right front cover 2582 of the second starting opening unit 2580 corresponds to the inclined surface 2582a which forms the bottom of the second attachment space 2510n on the upper surface and is inclined so that the left on the front view is lower and the gate 2585a of the gate member 2585 A display hole 2582b through which the normal symbol display 1189 of the normal symbol display substrate 1191a faces forward at a height position, and a through hole 2582c extending in an arc along the right side of the front view and a through hole 2582c And a plate-like partition piece 2582d for dividing the inside of the through hole 2582c into a plurality of parts in the vertical direction.

  The guide member 2584 of the second starting opening unit 2580 is formed in a substantially L shape in a front view, and can guide the game ball which has not been received by the second starting opening 2587b in the left direction of the front view.

  The gate member 2585 of the second starting opening unit 2580 is disposed under the gate 2585a, which protrudes forward through the opening 2581a of the unit base plate 2581 and receives the game ball and guides it backward. A barrier portion 2585b which protrudes in a frame shape through the opening 2581a, a through hole 2585c which extends from the lower end of the gate portion 2585a to a lower side than the barrier portion 2585b and penetrates in the front and rear direction, and left and right of the through hole 2585c A holding member 2585d is provided, which extends backward from both sides and holds the passage member 2587 and the passage cover 2588. Further, the gate member 2585 is provided with a sensor holding unit 2585e that holds the gate sensor 2586 from the rear side above the gate unit 2585a. The gate member 2585 is formed of a transparent material, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the gate portion 2585a and the second start port 2587b.

  The passage member 2587 of the second starting opening unit 2580 guides the gaming ball guided rearward by the gate portion 2585a of the gate member 2585 to the front and bulges backward in a circular arc shape and a guide passage 2587a below the guide passage 2587a. The second start opening 2587b which is opened in the front and rear direction by the side and the gaming ball is allowed to pass, and the discharge passage 2587c which guides the gaming ball having passed the second start opening 2587b backward and discharges it downward; A sensor holding portion 2587d for holding a second start opening sensor 2593 for detecting a game ball having passed through the start opening 2587b, and a solenoid holding portion 2587e for holding a start opening solenoid 2590 are provided. The passage member 2587 can hold the start port solenoid 2590 by means of the solenoid holder 2587e such that the plunger 2590a advances and retracts downward from the lower surface.

  The passage lid 2588 of the second starting opening unit 2580 is a first opening 2588a which penetrates in the left-right direction and into which the extension portion 2591b of the first link member 2591 and the rear end of the second link member 2592 are inserted. And a second opening 2588b through which the extending piece 2589b of the door member 2589 is inserted.

  The door member 2589 of the second starting opening unit 2580 includes a door 2589a capable of closing the second starting opening 2587b from the front side, an extending piece 2589b extending rearward from the lower end of the door 2589a and the right end in front view, and extending And a transmission pin 2589c protruding rightward from the rear end of the protrusion 2589b. The left and right sides of the lower end of the door 2589a are pivotally supported by the passage member 2587 and the passage cover 2588 at the position of the lower end of the second start port 2587a. . Further, the extension piece 2589 b of the door member 2589 passes through the second opening 2588 b of the passage cover 2588 and the rear end extends to the right side of the passage cover 2588 in a front view. Furthermore, the transmission pin 2589 c is slidably inserted into the transmission slit 2592 d of the second link member 2592.

  The first link member 2591 of the second start port unit 2580 has a plunger attachment portion 2591a to which the tip end of the plunger 2590a of the start opening solenoid 2590 is attached and supported movably in the vertical direction by the passage cover 2588; It includes an extending portion 2591b extending downward from the right end in the front view, and a link pin 2591c protruding from the lower end of the extending portion 2591b to the right in the front view. The lower end of the extension portion 2591 b of the first link member 2591 extends to the right side in a front view of the passage cover 2588 through the first opening 2588 a of the passage cover 2588. The link pin 2591 c is slidably inserted into the link slit 2592 c of the second link member 2592.

  The second link member 2592 of the second starting opening unit 2580 is formed on the rear end of the main body 2592a extending in the form of a band plate in the front-rear direction and the rear end of the main body 2592a A shaft portion 2592b rotatably supported about an axis extending in the left-right direction by the passage member 2587 and the passage lid 2588 at a position, and formed at a position near the front end from the shaft portion 2592b and penetrating the main body 2592a A longitudinally extending elongated hole shaped link slit 2592c into which the link pin 2591c of the first link member 2591 is slidably inserted, and a front end of the main body 2592a penetrate the main body 2592a and extend in the longitudinal direction of the main body 2592a Transmission slit 25 in which the transmission pin 2589 c of the door member 2589 is slidably inserted. Is provided with a 2d, a.

  The front lower right decorative substrate 2597 of the second starting opening unit 2580 is arranged such that the plurality of LEDs are located at a position corresponding to the through hole 2581 b of the unit base plate 2581 and a position above the upper end of the unit base plate 2581 It is formed in an inverted L shape. Thus, the inside of the through hole 2582c of the lower right front cover 2582 and the upper side of the inclined surface 2582a can be illuminated and decorated.

  In the second start port unit 2580 of this embodiment, in a normal state, the plunger 2590a of the start port solenoid 2590 protrudes downward, and the door portion 2589a of the door member 2589 stands up substantially vertically. The second starting port 2587b is closed by the member 2589 (see FIG. 146). In a normal state, the game ball entering the gate 2585a of the gate member 2585 from above is sent from the gate 2585a to the guiding passage 2587a of the passage member 2587 on the rear side after being detected by the gate sensor 2586, It is sent to the lower barrier 2585b of the front gate 2585a by the guide passage 2587a. Then, it is sent to the guiding member 2584 through the inside of the frame of the barrier portion 2585b and the front side of the second starting opening 2587b closed by the door member 2589 and is guided by the guiding member 2584 to the left in front view Released into 1100.

  When the second starting port unit 2580 is energized from the normal state, the plunger 2590a is raised so that the starting port solenoid 2590 is retracted, and the first link member 2591 is also raised together with the plunger 2590a. Then, as the first link member 2591 ascends, the link pin 2591c of the first link member 2591 slides in the link slit 2592c of the second link member 2592, and at the same time, the second link member 2592 passes the link slit 2592c. The front end pivots in the rising direction about the rear end shaft portion 2592b. When the tip of the second link member 2592 pivots in the upward direction, the transmission pin 2589c of the door member 2589 slides in the transmission slit 2592d of the tip of the second link member 2592, and the transmission pin 2589c rises The door member 2589 rotates. As a result, the upper end of the door 2589a of the door member 2589 is pivoted in the direction to move forward, and the second start port 2587b closed by the door 2589a is opened, and the second start port 2587a is opened. The game ball to become can be received (see FIG. 147).

  The right aisle cover top 2600 of the center work 2500 is in the form of a transparent plate and the front is decorated. The right upper passage cover 2600 closes the front surface above the second attachment space 2510 n in the attacker passage 2509 a and the front surface of the bypass passage 2510 o. Further, the lower right passage cover 2605 of the center character 2500 is in the form of a transparent plate and the front is decorated. The lower right channel cover 2605 closes the front surface of the second attachment space 2510 n of the attacker channel 2509 a and covers the front surface of the lower right front cover 2582 of the second start port unit 2580.

  The center right light emitting unit 2610 of the center character 2500 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rear of the right aisle cover 2600 on the rear side of the second attachment unit 2570 and a top right decoration board 2611 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted , A decoration board 2612 arranged on the back side of the second attachment unit 2570 along the lower end of the second attachment unit 2570 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and a back side of the table upper right decoration substrate 2611 An upper right substrate cover 2613, a right middle substrate cover 2614 attached to a lower rear side of the upper right substrate cover 2613 and covering the back side of the decorative substrate 2612 in the front right, and a front relay substrate 2615 disposed on the rear side of the upper right substrate cover 2613 And a substrate cover 2616 that covers the rear side of the front relay substrate 2615 and is attached to the rear side of the upper right substrate cover 2613; Eteiru.

  Center right light emission decoration unit 2640 of center character article 2500 three-dimensionally imitates a predetermined character along the concept of pachinko machine 1 and has a center right decoration body 2641 having translucency and a center right decoration body 2641 behind. A center right decorative substrate 2642 disposed on the side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a rear of the center right decorative substrate 2642 to support the center right decorative body 2641 from the rear side and on the rear of the center base 2510 A protective cover right decorative substrate 2644 mounted with a substrate cover 2643 to be attached, a plurality of LEDs disposed on the rear side of the substrate cover 2643 and capable of emitting light toward the right side surface of the protective cover 2650 in a front view And a substrate support member 2645 that supports the decorative substrate 2644 and is attached to the rear side of the substrate cover 2643. That.

  The on-center effect unit 2660 of the center character 2500 is an on-center drive unit 2670 attached to the center base 2510 and an on-center movable decorative unit 2690 disposed on the front side of the on-center drive unit 2670 and lifted by the on-center drive unit 2670. And an on-center decoration 2700 attached to the front of the on-center drive unit 2670 above the on-center movable decoration unit 2690.

  The on-center drive unit 2670 of the on-center rendering unit 2660 is not shown in detail but is a shallow box-shaped unit base 2671 attached to the front side of the center base 2510 and extending in the left-right direction and having an open front, A front drive motor 2672 attached to the rear side of the base 2671 and having a rotary shaft extending forward through the unit base 2671, a drive gear fixed to the rotary shaft of the front drive motor 2672, and a drive gear It is rotatably supported by the unit base and rotatably supported by the unit base that is rotatably supported by the unit base and has a detection piece that extends in the form of a plate to the rear, and the driven gear. And a working gear having a working pin projecting forward.

  Also, the on-center drive unit 2670 is disposed at a position separated from the action slit on which the action pin of the action gear is slidable, the action slit, and supported rotatably around an axial center extending in the front and rear direction by the unit base. First shaft, a first ridge extending long from the first shaft to a position farther than the action slit, a first transmission formed along the line passing through the center of rotation formed at the tip of the first ridge A slit and an arc are formed along the circumference of a radius shorter than the distance from the first shaft portion to the working slit, and are formed on the opposite side to the extending direction of the first ridge portion across the first shaft portion A first link member having one gear portion, a second gear portion meshing with the first gear portion of the first link member and disposed in an arc along a circumference of the same radius as the first gear portion, Located at the center of the two gear section and on the unit base A second shaft portion rotatably supported, a second collar portion extending from the second shaft portion in the opposite direction to the second gear portion to the same length as the first collar portion of the first link member, and And a second link member having a second transmission slit formed at the tip of the two ridges and extending along a line passing through the rotation center. The first link member and the second link member are arranged in a row in the left-right direction, and the first and second ridges extend outward in the left-right direction with respect to the first shaft portion and the second shaft portion. ing.

  Furthermore, the on-center drive unit 2670 is mounted on the front side of the unit base 2671 and has a unit cover that covers the front side of the drive gear, the driven gear, the action gear, the first link member, and the second link member, a unit cover and a unit base Upper and lower ends are supported at positions near both left and right ends of the unit base 2671 by 2671 and motor shafts are mounted on the rear side of the unit base 2671 and a front drive motor 2672 is mounted on the rear side And an elevation position detection sensor for detecting the elevation position of the on-center movable decorative body 2690 attached to the unit base 2671 and detecting the detection piece of the driven gear, and the on-center decorative body between the unit base 2671 and the unit cover Placed at a position corresponding to 2700 A plurality of LED is a center on the decorative body decoration board mounted on. The unit cover is provided with a notch which extends vertically downward and is open at a position closer to the center side from the lift shaft at the left and right ends.

  Further, the on-center movable decorative unit 2690 of the on-center rendering unit 2660 is not shown in detail but a light-colored logo decorative body 2691 having a predetermined logo formed in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 A transmissive unit disposed on the back side of the logo decoration body 2691 and having a light transmitting property, a center movable ornament decoration substrate disposed on the rear side of the transmission unit and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a center movable unit The back cover attached to the back side of the logo decoration 2691 covering the back side of the decoration board and the first transmission slit of the first link member of the first link member in the on-center drive unit 2670 projecting backward from the back side of the back cover A pair of transmission pins slidably inserted into the second transmission slits of the link member, and the back cover at a position outside the pair of transmission pins in the lateral direction And a pair of lift slider that is vertically movable supported by the lift shaft through the cutout portion of the unit cover in the center on the drive unit 2670 respectively attached to the side.

  The transmission unit of the movable decoration unit 2690 on the center is arranged on the rear side of the logo decoration 2691 and has a translucent front diffusion sheet, and the rear side of the diffusion sheet is shaped like a frame along the letters of the logo. The formed front reflector, the translucent colored color filter having an opening corresponding to the logo character, disposed on the rear side of the front reflector, and the logo character, disposed on the rear side of the color filter A rear diffusion sheet having an opening and capable of diffusing light, and a rear reflector disposed on the rear side of the rear diffusion sheet and formed in a shape along the logo letters.

  The on-center movable decorative unit 2690 can slide (lift and lower) in the vertical direction by the elevating slider being supported by the elevating shaft of the on-center drive unit 2670.

  Furthermore, the on-center decoration 2700 of the on-center rendering unit 2660 has a container-like decoration body with a predetermined decoration on the front and an open rear side, and a decoration on the center, which is disposed on the back side of the decoration body. It comprises a diffusion member for diffusing light from the substrate, a frame-shaped reflector disposed on the rear side of the diffusion member, and a translucent decoration member attached on the front side of the decorative body.

  In the on-center effect unit 2660 of this embodiment, when the front drive motor 2672 is rotationally driven, the action gear rotates via the drive gear and the driven gear, and the action pin of the action gear revolves at a predetermined radius. Then, when the action pin revolves, the action pin slides in the action slit of the first link member, and the first link member rotates in a predetermined direction about the first shaft along with the sliding. . By rotating the first link member, the second link member is engaged with the first gear portion of the first link member by the second gear of the second link member with the first link member centered on the second shaft portion. Will rotate in the opposite direction. Therefore, the tips of the first ridge and the second ridge of the first link member and the second link rotate in the vertical direction while maintaining the same height, and the first ridge and the second ridge At the same time as the transmission pin of the on-center movable decorative body 2690 slides in the first transmission slit and the second transmission slit provided at the tip of the double-head portion, the on-center movable decorative body moves in the vertical direction. At this time, since the pair of elevation sliders of the on-center movable decorative body 2690 is slidably supported by the elevation shafts of the on-center drive units, the on-center movable decorative body can be smoothly lifted and lowered.

  Next, the flow of the game balls in the center character 2500 will be described. First, on the left side of the window 2501 of the center character 2500 in front view, as shown in FIG. 138, when the gaming ball dropped to the left route 1100L enters the warp inlet 2503 opened in the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall 2502 It flows in the warp passage 2504 formed by the center base 2510 and the left passage cover 2530. More specifically, the gaming balls driven into the game area 1100 and entering the warp entrance 2503 are first jagged in the front-rear direction by the passage recess 2510 a of the center base 2510 and the upper warp passage cover 2531 of the left passage cover 2530. It is guided downward while rolling. The gaming ball guided by the zigzag can be viewed from the player side through the upper warp passage cover 2531. In addition, by guiding the gaming balls in a zigzag manner, it is possible to suppress an increase in the flow-down speed of the gaming balls.

  The game ball guided into the warp inlet 2503 and guided by the passage recess 2510 a and the upper warp passage cover 2531 is supplied to the right end of the rolling surface 2521 of the distributing member 2520 disposed in the distributing space recess 2510 c in a front view . Then, the gaming ball supplied to the left end of the rolling surface 2521 of the distributing member 2520 rolls along the inclination of the rolling surface 2521 in the left direction in a front view, and passes through the lowest release portion 2522 Roll to the left than the discharge part 2522. The left side of the rolling surface 2521 is inclined so that the left end side is higher than the release portion 2522 as shown in the figure, so the gaming ball climbs the slope, the rolling speed is attenuated, and the speed is 0 Then, it starts rolling rightward according to the inclination of the rolling surface 2521.

  Since the rolling surface 2521 has an inclination angle on the right side larger than the release part 2522, the gaming balls rolled from the left to the right are less likely to climb on the right slope, and the release part 2522 makes a rear As a result, the light is emitted to the left guiding surface 2524 of the heel portion 2523 with high probability, and is distributed to the left side (the warp outlet 2505 side) in a front view by the heel portion 2523. The game balls distributed and guided to the left guiding surface 2524 with respect to the collar 2523 enter the opening 2551 of the lower warp passage member 2550 through the right opening 2510 d of the center base 2510, and the lower warp passage member It is supplied to the stage 2506 (first stage 2506a) from the warp outlet 2505 through 2550.

  In this stage 2506, since the warp outlet 2505 is disposed at the left end of the first stage 2506a in a front view, the gaming ball supplied from the warp outlet 2505 to the left end of the first stage 2506a turns the first stage 2506a to the right. The rolling operation is started, and while the momentum of the rolling of the gaming balls is on, the first stage 2506a is rolled in the left-right direction. Then, the gaming balls rolled on the first stage 2506a are discharged forward from the guide portion 2506e and supplied to the second stage 2506b on the front side and lower side of the first stage 2506a. Also in the second stage 2506b, while there is momentum of rolling of the gaming balls, the second stage 2506b rolls in the left-right direction, and is released from the guide portion 2506e into the front game area 1100.

  By the way, the chance entrance 2506c is opened substantially at the center of the first stage 2506a, and when the gaming ball rolling on the first stage 2506a enters the chance entrance 2506c, the chance exit on the lower side of the second stage 2506b It is released into the game area 1100 from 2506 d. The opportunity outlet 2506 d is located immediately above the first starting opening 2201 as shown in FIG. 110 and the like, and the gaming balls released from the chance outlet 2506 d are received by the first starting opening 2201 with high probability.

  On the other hand, when the gaming ball discharged rearward from the release portion 2522 of the distribution member 2520 is distributed to the left side of the front view of the heel portion 2523, it is guided by the guide surface 2524 on the left side of the heel portion 2523 and the left passage rear cover It is provided to the 2540 emission slope 2542. The game balls supplied to the discharge slope 2542 roll forward according to the inclination and are discharged into the game area 1100 from the discharge opening 2508 at the lower end of the left extension 2510 b through the left opening 2510 e of the center base 2510. Ru. Therefore, when the game ball entering the warp entrance 2503 is distributed to the left side, that is, the discharge port 2508 by the hook portion 2523 of the distribution member 2520, it is returned to the inside of the game area 1100 without being supplied to the stage 2506, and the left route 1100L. Will flow down again.

  In addition, the game ball which has flowed down from the upper part in the game area 1100 to the left route 1100L and has not entered the warp entrance 2503 opened in the peripheral wall 2502 of the center character 2500 is formed on the lower outside on the left outside of the warp entrance 2503 It is guided leftward in a front view by the shelf 2510 f of the center base 2510 and enters an entrance 2507 opened near the inner periphery of the game area 1100. The gaming ball having entered the entrance 2507 is guided by the guide passage 2532 a of the guide passage cover 2532 onto the guide piece 2510 h which forms a part of the upper portion of the distribution space recess 2510 c of the center base 2510. The gaming ball entering the entrance 2507 and guided by the guide passage 2532 a can be viewed from the player side through the guide passage cover 2532.

  The guide path 2532a and the guiding piece 2510h are located immediately above the left end of the rolling surface 2521 of the distributing member 2520 in the front view, and the gaming ball having entered the entrance 2507 with respect to the player is distributed as if An illusion can be made to be guided to member 2520. The gaming ball guided to the guiding piece 2510 h through the guiding passage 2532 a is guided rearward by the guiding piece 2510 h and passes through the passage opening 2510 g of the center base 2510 to the left aisle back cover 2540 on the rear side of the center base 2510. It is induced. The gaming ball guided to the left aisle back cover 2540 is guided by the guiding wall 2541 to the discharge slope 2542 disposed below the distributing member 2520 on the rear side of the distributing member 2520 and then released. It is rolled forward by the slope 2542 and is discharged into the game area 1100 from the outlet 2508 at the lower end of the left extension 2510 b through the left opening 2510 e of the center base 2510.

  Therefore, the gaming ball that has not flowed down the left route 1100L in the gaming area 1100 and has not entered the warp entrance 2503 enters the entrance 2507 and passes through the guide path 2532a etc. from the outlet 2508 the left route in the gaming area 1100. Released again to 1100 liters.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the window 2501 in the center character 2500, as shown in FIG. 146 etc., the gaming ball that has flowed down to the right route 1100R starts from the peripheral wall 2502 of the center character 2500 and the center base in the attack path 2509a. It enters into the branch passage 2510 k of 2510 and is sent to the branch space 2510 l. In the branch space 2510 l, a branch sensor 2620 is disposed immediately below the downstream end of the branch passage 2510 k and detected by the branch sensor 2620 with high probability. Note that the branch sensor 2620 is in a non-detection state in a normal gaming state (a state in which the branch sensor is not in an effective state).

  The game balls sent to the branch passage 2510k of the center base 2510 are sent from the lower right corner of the branch passage 2510k in a front view through the connecting passage 2510m to the second attack space 2510n. At the entrance of the second attack space 2510 n, a guiding portion 2510 p is formed so as to be lowered toward the second large winning opening 2509, and the gaming ball travels to the second large winning hole 2509 by the guiding portion 2510 p. Flow down. Then, in a normal state, the second large winning opening 2509 is closed by the second opening and closing member 2572 of the second attachment unit 2570, and the gaming ball guided by the guiding portion 2510p is second operated by the second opening and closing member 2572. The acceptance to the big winning opening 2509 is blocked, and it flows downward on the left side of the second opening / closing member 2572 in the second attachment space 2510 n in a front view.

  At this time, the second opening / closing member 2572 is in contact with the stopper portion 2571 j provided on the left side of the lower right protruding portion 2571 i of the unit base 2571 with the stopper piece 2572 d, and rotates in the counterclockwise direction in front view. It is in a state of being blocked. Therefore, when the gaming ball from the guiding portion 2510p abuts on the right side of the wing portion 2572a of the second opening / closing member 2572, a force acts to turn the second opening / closing member 2572 in the counterclockwise direction. Also, the second rotation member 2572 does not rotate in the counterclockwise direction.

  The gaming ball that has not flowed into the second large winning opening 2509 but has flown down the second attachment space 2510 n forms the inclined surface 2582 a of the lower right front cover 2582 of the second starting opening unit 2580 which forms the bottom of the second attachment space 2510 n. It rolls in the left direction in a front view, and is discharged downward from the left end of the inclined surface 2582a so as to be outside the second attachment space 2510n.

  The gate portion 2585a of the gate member 2585 is disposed immediately below the left end of the inclined surface 2582a in the second starting opening unit 2580, and the gaming ball discharged downward from the second attacking space 2510n of the attacking passage 2509a is Will pass through the gate portion 2585a with high probability. In addition, the game ball which can not pass the gate part 2585a will flow downward through either the left or right of the gate part 2585a. The game ball having passed through the gate portion 2585a of the gate member 2585 is detected by the gate sensor 2586 and guided back to the rear, and the frame on the lower side of the gate portion 2585a by the guide passage 2587a of the passage member 2587 disposed on the rear side. It is guided into the second barrier portion 2585b and flows down the front surface of the second starting port 2587b.

  In the present embodiment, when passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2586, a normal lottery result is drawn, and the door member 2589 closing the second starting opening 2587b according to the drawn ordinary lottery result is Open and close. Specifically, in a normal state, the plunger 2590a of the starting port solenoid 2590 of the second starting port unit 2580 is lowered downward by its own weight, and the first link member 2591 and the second link member 2592 are lowered by the lowering of the plunger 2590a. The second start port 2587 b is closed with the door 2589 a of the door member 2589 standing up substantially vertically through the opening. That is, in the normal state, the second start port 2587b is closed by the door member 2589, and the game ball can not be received.

  Then, when the normal lottery result selected based on the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2586 is "loss", the starting port solenoid 2590 is not energized, and the plunger 2590a remains lowered. Therefore, when the normal lottery result is "loss", as shown in FIG. 146, the door member 2589 closes the second starting opening 2587b, and the gaming ball which has flowed down from the barrier 2585b through the gate 2585a. Is passed through the front side of the door portion 2589a of the door member 2589 without being received into the second start port 2587a, flows down onto the guiding member 2584, and is emitted by the guiding member 2584 in a left direction in a front view.

  On the other hand, when the normal lottery result drawn based on the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2586 is "hit", the starting port solenoid 2590 is energized and the plunger 2590a is raised, and the first link member 2591 and the second link The door portion 2589a of the door member 2589 is rotated in the direction in which the front end moves forward through the member 2592, and the second start port 2587b is opened (see FIG. 147). In this state, the gaming ball having flowed down from the barrier 2585b through the gate 2585a is brought into contact with the back of the door member 2589 which has been turned forward and is guided to the second starting opening 2587b side, and the second starting opening 2587b Will be accepted by Then, the gaming ball received in the second starting opening 2587b is discharged by the second passage opening 2587c after being detected by the second starting opening sensor 2593.

  In the present embodiment, when passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2586, the normal lottery result is drawn immediately, and when the drawn ordinary lottery result is "hit", the starting port solenoid 2590 is immediately Since the power is turned on and the second start opening 2587b can be received, the gaming ball which has drawn the "hit" is received by the second start opening 2587b with extremely high probability.

  Further, in the second attacker unit 2570 in the present embodiment, the second attacker solenoid 2574 is energized in accordance with the special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game balls in the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b. The plunger 2574a is retracted into the second attachment solenoid 2574, and the second opening / closing member 2572 is pivoted clockwise in a front view through the link member 2575 (see FIG. 148). In this state, the tip of the wing 2572a of the second opening / closing member 2572 is separated from the upper end of the second large winning opening 2509 in the right direction in a front view, and is positioned to the right The game ball can be accepted to the second large winning opening 2509. Further, in this state, the second opening / closing member 2572 abuts against the stopper portion 2571 j provided on the guiding portion 2571 f of the unit base 2571 with the stopper piece 2572 d, and the rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted It has become.

  The gaming ball induced by the induction portion 2510p of the center base 2510 passes through the second large winning opening 2509, is induced by the induction portion 2571f of the unit base 2571, and is detected by the second count sensor 2578. The downstream end of the ball passage 2571 l on the rear side of the unit base 2571 is discharged rearward from the portion 2571 e through the passage port 2571 d. At this time, the gaming ball guided from the guiding portion 2510p of the center base 2510 abuts on the shaft portion 2752b of the wing portion 2572a of the second opening / closing member 2572 so that the gaming ball abuts on the tip of the wing portion 2572a The impact of the moment concerning the 2nd opening-and-closing member 2572 becomes small compared with it, and can make it difficult to damage the 2nd opening-and-closing member 2572.

  Further, in the second attachment unit 2570, since the lower end side of the second opening / closing member 2572 is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction near the lower end of the second large winning opening 2509, the second opening / closing When the member 2572 is pivoted to the open position, as shown in FIG. 148, the tip (upper end) side of the second opening / closing member 2572 is pivoted in the direction approaching the guiding portion 2510 p. As a result, the second opening / closing member 2572 is bridged between the guiding portion 2510 p and the second large winning opening 2509, so that the gaming ball guided by the guiding portion 2510 p is moved from the guiding portion 2510 p to the second guiding hole 2510 p. The second opening and closing member 2572 is rolled to be received to the second large winning opening 2509, and the impact applied to the second opening and closing member 2572 can be reduced by the flow of the game ball, and the second opening and closing member 2572 is broken. It can be difficult.

  In addition, when the second opening and closing member 2572 of the second attacker unit 2570 rotates from the open position to the closed position, the flow path of the gaming ball in which the leading end (upper end) of the second opening and closing member 2572 is guided by the guiding portion 2510 p. Can be blocked from being received by the second large winning opening 2509 at this timing. Therefore, at the time of the big hit game etc, it can prevent the game ball of specified number or more from being accepted to the 2nd large winning a prize mouth 2509, it is possible to reduce the burden of the game hall side which installs this pachinko machine 1 it can.

  In the second embodiment, the gaming ball passes between the end of the second opening / closing member 2572 and the lower passage wall 2510 j of the guiding portion 2510 p when the second opening / closing member 2572 is in the open position. Possible gaps are formed. Therefore, when the gaming ball is released from the inclined portion 2510 q side to the second opening and closing member 2572 when the second opening and closing member 2572 is in the open position, the gaming ball passes between the second opening and closing member 2572 and the passage wall 2510 j There is.

[2-6. Overall configuration of back unit]
Subsequently, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 152. FIG. 149 is a perspective view of the back unit in the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 150 is a perspective view of the back unit in the game board as viewed from the rear. FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main component and seen from the front, and FIG. 152 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main component and viewed from the back is there.

  The back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is attached to the back side of the game panel 1150 and is open on the front side, and the back wall 3010 a is formed with an opening 3010 b through which the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 faces in the front and back direction. A box 3010 is provided. The back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 has a box shape open at the front side and a substantially rectangular opening 3010 b penetrating in the front and rear direction in the back wall 3010 a, and extends outward from the front end outer periphery and is fixed to the back side of the game panel 1150 And a flange-like fixing portion 3010c. The opening 3010 b of the back box 3010 is smaller than the front view outer shape of the main liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, in the back box 3010, mounting holes, mounting bosses, etc. for attaching the respective rendering units 3100, 3200, 3300, 3500, 3600, 3700, 3800, boards, covers etc. are suitably positioned. Is formed.

  In addition, back unit 3000 is attached to a panel relay substrate 3020 attached at a position below the opening 3010b on the back surface of back wall 3010a of back box 3010 and to the right from the center in the left-right direction in front view, and in back wall 3010a of back box 3010 A lamp drive board 3021 mounted on the rear surface at a position lower than the opening 3010b and left from the center in the left-right direction in a front view, a lamp drive board cover 3022 covering the rear side of the lamp drive board 3021 and mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 A motor drive board 3023 mounted on the right side of the opening 3010b on the rear surface of the back wall 3010a of the back box 3010, and a motor drive board cover 3024 covering the rear side of the motor drive board 3023 and mounted on the back surface of the back box 3010; The back wall 3 of the back box 3010 above the motor drive board 3023 And Table lamp relay board 3025 attached to the rear surface of 10a, and a table lamp relay board cover 3026 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 covers the rear side of the table lamp relay board 3025.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is mounted on the back wall 3010 a of the back box 3010 on the front side above the opening 3010 b, and is on the right side of the opening 3010 b in the front of the back wall 3010 a of the back wall 3010 a And a rear movable movable body unit relay substrate 3028 to be attached.

  In addition, back unit 3000 is attached along the inner periphery of opening 3010 b on the front surface of back wall 3010 a of back box 3010, and has a pair of decorative frames 3040 decorated on the front surface and back wall 3010 a of back box 3010. A lock mechanism 3050 is attached to the left of the opening 3010b in a front view in the rear surface and supports the main liquid crystal display device 1900 so as to be removable.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction below the opening 3010 c in the back box 3010 and attached to the front of the back wall 3010 a of the back box 3010, and the back down middle effect unit 3100 The front of the back lower left rendering unit 3200 and the back lower right rendering unit 3300 disposed on the left and right sides of the 3100 and attached to the front of the rear wall 3010 a of the back box 3010, and the front of the back lower left rendering unit 3200 and the back lower right rendering unit 3300 The ball discharge unit 3400 attached to the back, the back-rear effect unit 3500 disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 3010 c in the back box 3010 and attached to the front of the back wall 3010 a, and both sides of the opening 3010 c in the back box 3010 Back left production university placed in front of back production unit 3500 And DOO 3600 and back right direction unit 3700, and a back on direction unit 3800 disposed on the front side of the upper in and back after direction unit 3500 of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010.

  The back-to-back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 changes the sub display unit 3110 having the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, the elevating unit 3130 which moves up and down together with the sub display unit 3110, and the elevating unit 3130 and the sub display unit 3110 in the gaming state. A drive unit 3150 is provided to move up and down accordingly.

  The back bottom left rendering unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is disposed on the left side in a front view of the back bottom left movable decoration 3210 imitating a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the back bottom left inside movable decoration 3210 The back bottom left outside movable decoration 3220 imitating a character different from the back bottom left inside movable decoration 3210, and the back bottom left inside movable decoration 3210 and the back bottom left outside movable decoration 3220 respectively according to the game state A lower left drive unit 3250 is provided to move up and down independently.

  The back bottom right rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is disposed on the right side in a front view of the back bottom right inside movable decoration 3310 imitating a different character along the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the back bottom inside right The back bottom right outside movable decoration 3320 imitating a character different from the back bottom right inside movable decoration 3310, and the back bottom right inside movable decoration 3310 and the back bottom right outside movable decoration 3320 according to the game state respectively And a lower right drive unit 3350 that can be raised and lowered independently.

  The ball discharging unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is received by the general winning opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, the first starting opening 2201 of the starting opening unit 2200, and the general winning opening 2301 of the front side unit 2300 and is behind the gaming panel 1150. A ball discharge passage member 3410 for guiding the game ball induced to the lower side and discharging it, a general winning hole sensor 3421 for detecting the game ball received in the general winning holes 2101 and 2301, and a first starting hole 2201 A first starting opening sensor 3422 for detecting the game ball and a magnetic detection sensor 3423 capable of detecting magnetism in the vicinity of the first starting opening 2201 are provided.

  The back rear effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 imitates a predetermined item along the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and extends substantially the entire width of the opening 3010 b of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction; The back rear left drive unit 3530 is supported on the left side of the opening 3010 b in the front of the rear wall 3010 a of the back box 3010 so as to support the left end of the movable decorative body 3510 so as to move up and down. A back rear right / left drive unit 3560 is supported to support the right end of the decorative body 3510 so as to be vertically movable in the vertical direction and to be attached to the right of the opening 3010 b in the front of the rear wall 3010 a of the back box 3010.

  The back left rendering unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 has a back left movable decoration unit 3610 in which a plurality of decorations imitating a flower are formed on the front, and a back left movable decoration 3610 according to the gaming state. And a back left drive unit 3650 which is pivoted to the center side of the opening 3010 b of 3010.

  The back right rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 has a back right movable decoration unit 3710 in which a plurality of decorations imitating a flower are formed on the front, and a back right movable decoration 3710 according to the gaming state. The back right drive unit 3750 which is pivoted to the center side of the opening 3010 b of 3010 and the front of the back right drive unit 3750 are attached to the front of the second large winning opening 2509 and the second start opening 2587 b and are behind the game panel 1150 And a ball discharging member 3790 for guiding the gaming ball guided to the lower side and discharging it.

  The back-up effect unit 3800 of the back unit 3000 has a back-up movable decoration unit 3810 on which a plurality of decorations imitating a flower and a relief imitating a predetermined character along the concept of the pachinko machine 1 are formed on the front The rear upper drive unit 3850 rotates the back upper movable decorative body unit 3810 to the center side of the opening 3010 b of the front view back box 3010 according to the game state.

[2-7. Main liquid crystal display]
Subsequently, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of the present embodiment will be described. The main liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. This main liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with fixing pieces 1902 protruding outward from the left and right sides as shown in FIG. 114, FIG. 115, etc., and mounted on the rear side of the back box 3010 via the fixing pieces 1902. be able to.

  Specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted from the rear side into a recess formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3010 a of the back box 3010, and two fixings projecting from the right side in a front view After the piece 1902 is inserted into the liquid crystal fixing portion (not shown) of the back box 3010, the fixing piece 1902 projecting from the left side in a front view is fixed by the lock mechanism 3050 supported on the back surface of the back box 3010. Can be attached to the back box 3010.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 115 etc., the main liquid crystal display device 1900 has a peripheral control board box 1910 housing the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 153) and the like on the rear side. And a volume 1912 extending rearward from the lower part of 1910. By appropriately rotating the volume 1912 in the direction, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the speakers 130, 222 and 262 provided in the door frame 5 and the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3.

[3. Various substrates]
Subsequently, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. As illustrated, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of the main substrate 4000 and a group of the peripheral control substrate 4010, and various control is shared by these two groups. The group of main substrates 4000 is configured to include a main control substrate 4100 that controls a game operation (progress of a game), and a payout control substrate 4110 that controls payout of gaming balls and the like. In addition, the peripheral control board 4010 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 4100 and the main liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 153, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100h to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100 g and a RAM clear switch 4100 c for completely erasing information stored in the RAM 4100 e built in the main control MPU 4100 a are provided. The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d and a RAM 4100e, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is a first starting opening sensor 3422 for detecting gaming balls received to the first starting opening 2201 and a second starting opening sensor for detecting gaming balls received to the second starting opening 2587b. A detection signal from a general winning opening sensor 3421 for detecting gaming balls received to the 2593 and the general winning opening 2101 and 2301 is input through the main control I / O port 4100 b, a gate sensor 2586 and a general winning opening, respectively. Detection signals from the sensor 3421, the first count sensor 2111, the second count sensor 2578, and the magnetic detection sensor 3423 are input through the panel relay board 3020 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100 b Is supposed to be

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g based on these detection signals, whereby the starting port solenoid 2590 is firstly transmitted via the panel relay board 3020. A drive signal is output to the attachment solenoid 2107 and the second attachment solenoid 2574, or the first special symbol display through the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay substrate 3020, the function display substrate 1191, and the normal symbol display substrate 1191a Device 1185, second special symbol display 1186, first special symbol memory indicator 1184, second special symbol memory indicator 1187, ordinary symbol indicator 1189, ordinary symbol memory indicator 1188, game status indicator 1183, round indicator Outputs a drive signal to the controller 1190.

  In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3422, the second start port sensor 2593, the gate sensor 2586, the branch sensor 2620, the first count sensor 2111, and the second count sensor 2578 are non-contact type electromagnetic waves. While a proximity switch of the formula is used, a contact type ON / OFF mechanical switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3421. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b and frequently passes through the gate portion 2585a and the branch sensor 2620, so the first starting opening sensor 3422 and the second starting opening The detection of gaming balls by the sensor 2593 and the gate sensor 2586 also frequently occurs. Therefore, as the first start port sensor 3422, the second start port sensor 2593, the branch sensor 2620, and the gate sensor 2586, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used. In addition, when the big hit game state which becomes advantageous for the player occurs, the 1st large winning a prize opening 2102 and the 2nd large winning a prize opening 2509 are opened and the game ball frequently enters, so 1st count sensor 2111 and 2nd The detection of the game ball by the count sensor 2578 also frequently occurs. Therefore, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used also for the first count sensor 2111 and the second count sensor 2578. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3421 does not frequently occur in the general winning openings 2101 and 2301 where the gaming balls do not enter frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used as the general winning hole sensor 3421.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information (game information) on gaming and various commands on payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands on the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. To Furthermore, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness not shown). Although the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, the detailed description thereof will be described later, shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 from the power supply board 851, which will be described in detail later. The power supply substrate 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 4100 for a predetermined time even when power is shut off. (To describe)). The main control MPU 4100a can store various information in the RAM 4100e in the power-off process even when the power is shut down by this capacitor. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 4100 e when the RAM clear switch 4100 c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100 c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  In addition, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The blackout monitoring circuit monitors the drops of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 851 and outputs a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice when the voltages become lower than the blackout notice voltage. The blackout notice signal is also input to the main control MPU 4100a through the main control I / O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 or the like through a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Disbursement control board]
As shown in FIG. 153, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout and the like of the game balls performs the delivery control unit 4111 which performs various control related to the payout and the delivery control by the delivery solenoid 654 and An emission control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and an award ball tank 720 , A ball rail 731 and a ball removing switch 860b for discharging the gaming balls in the winning ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball releasing operation.

[3-2A. Payout control section]
As shown in FIG. 153, the payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. And an external WDT 4111c (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally, and the payout control MPU 4111a, which is the I / O device, and the payout control I / O port 4111b. A payout motor drive circuit 4111 d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the ball device 740 and a payout control input circuit 4111 e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. The payout control MPU 4111a incorporates a function and the like for preventing fraud as well as the built-in ROM and RAM.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (gaming information) on gaming from the main control board 4100 and various commands on payout via the payout control I / O port 4111b in a serial system, or the main control board In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100 c from 4100 being input through the payout control I / O port 4111 b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 may be input, or the ball out switch 750 The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input through the prize ball relay substrate 754 or the like.

  An out-of-ball switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of gaming balls in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a gaming ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e via the winning ball relay substrate 754 of the winning ball device 740 and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a via the payout control I / O port 4111 b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the award ball device 740 is firstly transmitted via the sensor substrate 753 of the award ball device 740 and the award ball relay substrate 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a through the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and a main frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 4111 e, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a via the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 which detects whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full is stored in the gaming ball, the handle device relay board 192 first, and the main side relay terminal It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e through the plate 880 and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a through the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4111 b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 as an error LED indicator. A signal for displaying on 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The serial number is transmitted to the main control board 4100, and the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 through the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the gaming information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 4100 Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the dispensing control board 4110), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, announcing that there is no gaming ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the winning ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, at the inlet of the distribution space 741b in communication with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, the payout rotating body 748 When Informs that it is difficult to rotate the payout rotating body 748) by meshing with the technical ball in the vicinity of the entrance, and indicates that it is a "counting switch error" when the number "3" is displayed (specifically, And, based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751, notifying that the counting sensor 751 has a problem), and when the number "5" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "retry error" (specifically, the payout Informing that the number of retries for the operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number “6” is displayed, it indicates that it is “full” (specifically, from the full detection sensor 550 Based on the detection signal, a notification is issued indicating that the storage space 546 of the fal cover unit 540 is full with the stored gaming balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it is “CR not connected” (payout control Informing that the electrical connection is broken anywhere in the range from the board 4110 to the CR unit), and when the number "9" is displayed, it is "in stock" (specifically, it is still Informing that the number of balls of the game balls not paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

  The ball lending request signal of the gaming ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are firstly transmitted through the frequency display plate 365, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal specifying the number of gaming balls to be lent according to the ball rental request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in a serial method, and this signal is a payout control I / O port It is received by 4111 b and input to the payout control MPU 4111 a. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of lent gaming balls, and a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number indicator 365c, CR unit connection terminal board The signal is output to the main relay terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 4120 performing launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and sphere feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input as shown in FIG. 4120a, an oscillating circuit 4120b outputting a clock signal at fixed time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c outputting a firing reference pulse for launching the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 based on the clock signal, and A launch solenoid drive circuit 4120 d outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 654 based on the launch reference pulse, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120 e outputs the drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 585 based on the launch reference pulse. . The firing timing control circuit 4120 c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120 b so that 100 gaming balls per minute can be shot toward the gaming area 1100 and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d. At the same time, the ball sending reference pulse generated by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball sending solenoid drive circuit 4120 e.

  A touch sensor 516 for detecting whether a palm or finger is touching the front of the rotating handle main body 506 and a firing stop switch 518 for detecting whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the intention of the player The detection signal is first input to the emission control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay substrate 192 and the main side relay terminal plate 880, and input to the emission timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, they are input as a CR connection signal to the emission control input circuit 4120 a and input to the emission timing control circuit 4120 c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 which electrically adjusts the strength to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 according to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506 is the handle device relay board 192 first, and the main side relay terminal The signal is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d through the plate 880.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d emits a drive current for launching the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 with a striking strength corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 based on the signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512. In response to the input of the reference pulse, the signal is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120 e receives a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main side relay terminal board 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feeding reference pulse is inputted. The ball feed member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 by outputting, and the constant current is triggered when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is finished. The game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the ball striking device 650 side by stopping the output of the ball. As described above, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120 e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply substrate 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 4110 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control substrate 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 4110 in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 4110 when the RAM clear switch 4100 c of the main control board 4100 is operated at the time of power on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 153, the peripheral control board 4010 performs peripheral control based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a main liquid crystal display 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3111.

[3-3 A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 153, the peripheral control unit 4140 for effect control in the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. A sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects to which the sound source IC 4140c refers are stored.

  Peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When various commands are received from main control board 4100, each decoration board of game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like, the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to the lamp drive board 3021, or the game board A motor mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board for outputting a drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various rendering units provided in 4 In order to transmit to the drive substrate 3023 or to output a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 Door-side drive composed of door-side drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal The light emission data is transmitted from the frame I / O port for frame decoration drive board to the door frame base board 194 through the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, or the main liquid crystal display 1900 or sub liquid crystal display Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the device 3111 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and a control signal for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d ( The sound command is output to the sound source IC 4140 c.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting original positions of various effect units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140 a through a motor drive board 3023 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is done. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 A peripheral control MPU 4140 a is input through the peripheral relay terminal board 882 and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally, from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on this operation signal. doing.

  The sound source IC 4140 c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140 a, and is provided to the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 Control is performed so that music and sound effects etc. matched to various effects flow from the speaker 821, and provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speakers 130, 222, and 262 and the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control substrate 4010 and protruding rearward from the peripheral control substrate box 1910.

  The peripheral control unit 4140 includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the peripheral control MPU 4140 a. The peripheral control MPU 4140 a includes the built-in WDT and the external In conjunction with the WDT, it diagnoses whether or not its own system is out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is issued by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, 19.2 kg (k for the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time)). B) Bits per second (hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side on / off blink command, game board side on / off blink command, movable body drive command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp drive board 3021 or motor drive board 3023 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 , And a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command, and in the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The lamp drive board 3021 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 is provided with a lighting signal or a blinking signal on the door frame 5 through the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 based on the received door frame side lighting blink command. Each game board 4 has a lighting signal or blinking signal based on the received game board side lighting blinking command or output to the LED of each decoration board 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc. Output to the LED of each decoration board.

  A motor drive board 3023 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 is a dial drive motor provided on the door frame 5 through the peripheral relay terminal board 882 based on the received drive command of the movable body. It outputs to 414, each drive motor etc. which were equipped with the game board 4, and a solenoid etc.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the tray unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the back box. It is input through the lamp drive board 3021 and the motor drive board 3023 attached to the rear surface of the 3010.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the lamp drive board 3021, the motor drive board 3023, etc. attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the peripheral side relay terminal board From the side speaker 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 through 882 or from the speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 through the lamp drive board 3021 and the motor drive board 3023 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 Control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects flow. In this example, as described above, the side speakers disposed on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 disposed above the gaming window 101, and the lower portion of the main body frame 3 are provided. By sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2-channel stereo signal, a 4-channel stereo signal, a 2.1-channel surround signal or a 4.1-channel surround signal to which a lower speaker 391 described later is added, etc.) to a low-pitch speaker 821 It is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than ever before.

[3-4. Liquid crystal control unit]
Next, as shown in FIG. 153, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 for performing drawing control of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 in the peripheral control substrate 4010 includes a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b for storing various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c for controlling display of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 described above, a main liquid crystal display device 1900 and a sub liquid crystal display The character ROM 4150 d stores various data of the screen displayed on the device 3111 and the character RAM 4150 e to which various data stored in the character ROM 4150 d are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a incorporates a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, etc., and controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to control the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. The drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 is performed. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a operates normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-execution signal, which will be described later, from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150 b includes, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control substrate 4010 A plurality of nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like corresponding to control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data defining the order of various data stored in the character ROM 4150 d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150 e in time series. In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from character ROM 4150 d to non-resident area of character RAM 4150 e is defined in advance as screen data drawn on main liquid crystal display device 1900 or sub liquid crystal display device 3111 according to the progress of schedule data. It is done.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150 b and output to the VDP 4150 c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the head screen data one by one from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the data to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays it on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 Drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111. When the VDP 4150c does not receive screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP 4150 c adopts a line buffer method. In this "line buffer method", drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 is held in a line buffer, and drawing for one line held in the line buffer is performed. This is a method of outputting data to the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111.

  The character ROM 4150 d stores a large amount of sprite data, and the capacity thereof is large. When the capacity of character ROM 4150 d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on main liquid crystal display device 1900 and sub liquid crystal display device 3111 increases, the access speed of character ROM 4150 d can not be ignored, and main liquid crystal display device 1900 or sub liquid crystal display device It will affect the speed of drawing on 3111. Therefore, in the present embodiment, sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150 d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150 e having a high access speed, and sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150 e. Sprite data is basic data which is data before expanding a sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150 d in a compressed state.

  Here, to describe “sprite”, “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit assembled on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111. For example, when displaying various persons on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, data for drawing each person is called "sprite". Thus, when displaying a plurality of persons on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, a plurality of sprites are used. Besides the person, a house, a mountain, a road, etc. constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be one sprite. In these sprites, the positions arranged on the screen and the upper / lower relationship (hereinafter referred to as “order of superposition of sprites”) when the sprites overlap with each other are set, and the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device It is drawn in 3111.

  The sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called "character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in, for example, 2 × 3. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be represented using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 sequentially set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel and sequentially intersect with the one direction from the left to the right when viewed from the front It is driven by a sub-scan that repeatedly performs the main scan in the direction of When main line liquid crystal display device 1900 or sub liquid crystal display device 3111 receives drawing data for one line output from liquid crystal control unit 4150, main liquid crystal display device 1900 or sub liquid crystal display device 3111 is viewed from the front as main scanning. As seen from the left to the right, the signals are sequentially output to pixels for one line. When the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 shift to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, the next line Based on the drawing data of the minute, as main scanning, when viewed from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, sequentially output from left to right to pixels of one line.

[4. Game content]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is operated by the player rotating the handle device 500 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5. The game ball is started to be launched into the upper part of the game area 1100 arranged on the front of the game machine. The game balls driven into the upper part in the game area 1100 flow down in the game area 1100 on the upper left side or the right side of the center character 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle device 500, and can be hit harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. In addition, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in the front of the game panel 1150 with a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball comes into contact with the obstacle nails to cause the game balls to flow down. While the speed is suppressed, various motions are given to the game ball and the motions can be enjoyed.

  When the gaming ball driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in the front view, that is, the left route 1100L side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall 2502 of the center character 2500, the center character 2500 is The left side of the center character 2500 flows down between the plurality of protrusions 2512. Then, when the gaming ball which has flowed down to the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp inlet 2503 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall 2502 of the center character 2500, the diverting member 2520 provided in the warp passage 2504 is diverted. A discharge portion 2522 which is supplied to the moving surface 2521 and disposed substantially at the center of the rolling surface 2521 is discharged to the hook portion 2523 and is returned to the side of the warp outlet 2505 supplied to the stage 2506 or into the game area 1100. It is distributed to any of the outlet 2508 side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are distributed to the warp outlet 2505 with high probability.

  The game balls distributed to the warp outlet 2505 by the distribution member 2520 are supplied from the warp outlet 2505 to the stage 2506. In this stage 2506, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2505 to the left end of the first stage 2506a in the stage 2506, and is discharged forward from the position of the lowest guide portion 2506e after rolling the first stage 2506a in the lateral direction. The gaming ball released forward from the first stage 2506a is supplied to the second stage 2506b disposed on the front and lower side of the first stage 2506a, and is the best after rolling the second stage 2506b in the left-right direction. From the lowered portion, it is discharged back into the game area 1100 above the first starting opening 2201 in the starting opening unit 2200 in front.

  When the gaming ball rolling on the stage 2506 enters a chance entrance 2506c opened on the center rear side of the first stage 2506a in the left-right direction, the game area 1100 is entered into the gaming area 1100 from the chance exit 2506d opened immediately above the first start opening 2201. It is released and received with high probability into the first starting port 2201. Then, when the gaming ball is received by the first starting opening 2201 and detected by the first starting opening sensor 3422, a predetermined number (for example, three) of gaming balls are temporarily set to the count value of the winning ball number counter. It is memorized. When a predetermined payout condition is satisfied (for example, when a big hit is made), the main control substrate 4100 transfers the payout control substrate 4110 to the payout control substrate 4110 so that the number of winning balls stored in the count value of the winning ball number counter is paid out. A predetermined payout command is transmitted, and in response to the payout command, the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the winning ball device 740 to pay out the gaming balls to the upper tray 301.

  In the case where the gaming balls discharged from the stage 2506 into the gaming area 1100 flow downstream to the left of the first starting opening 2201 without winning in the first starting opening 2201, the front side unit 2300 disposed downstream is There is a possibility that the general winning opening 2301 will be won, and when the game ball is winning in the general winning opening 2301 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3421, the main control board 4100 gives a payout control board 4110 based on the detection signal. The payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the winning ball device 740 according to the predetermined payout command, and the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are displayed on the upper plate 301. To pay out.

  In addition, the game ball released from the stage 2506 into the game area 1100 is extremely rarely the winning combination of the attacker unit 2100 if it flows down to the right of the first start opening 2201 without winning in the first start opening 2201. There is a possibility of winning in 2101. Further, when the first large winning opening 2102 is in the open state by a big hit game or the like, the first large winning opening 2102 can be won with high probability.

  By the way, when the gaming ball which has flowed down to the left side of the center character 2500 does not enter the warp inlet 2503, it is guided to the left in front view by the shelf 2510f of the center base 2510 and enters the entrance 2507 opened at the left end. Then, it is released into the game area 1100 from the outlet 2508 below the distribution member 2520. Then, the game balls released from the discharge port 2508 into the game area 1100 are moved to the center side of the game area 1100 below the center character 2500 by the left shelf 2302 of the front side unit 2300, and the center character 2500 There is a possibility of winning in the general winning opening 2301 of the front side unit 2300 arranged below. Note that the gaming balls discharged from the discharge port 2508 may win the first starting opening 2201 although their probability is lower than that of the gaming balls discharged from the stage 2506 to the gaming area 1100.

  On the other hand, when the game ball driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 1100 enters the right route 1100R on the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall 2502 of the center character 2500, the center character Through a narrow gap between the outer periphery of the right side of 2500 and the inner periphery of the game area 1100, it enters into the attacker passage 2509a opened in the vicinity of the stopper 1114 of the front component 1110A on the inner periphery of the game area 1100.

  The gaming ball having entered the attack passage 2509a passes through the branch passage 2510k, the branch space 2510l, the communication passage 2510m, and the second attack space 2510n, and the gate portion of the second starting opening unit 2580 from the downstream end of the second attack space 2510n. Released just above 2585a. When the second big winning opening 2509 is opened due to a big hit or the like, the gaming ball that has entered the attacking passage 2509a by right-handing wins the second big winning opening 2509 with extremely high probability.

  The gaming ball released immediately above the gate 2585a enters the gate 2585a with a very high probability, and after being detected by the gate sensor 2586, passes through the front side of the second large winning opening 2587b into the gaming area 1100. Released.

  At this time, when the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2586, the main control board 4100 generates a normal random number as a normal lottery result based on the detection signal. Based on this ordinary random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is variably displayed (for example, the normal symbol display 1189 consisting of two LEDs of red and green emits light alternately) for a predetermined time ( For example, an ordinary symbol based on an ordinary random number (ordinary lottery result) extracted after a lapse of 0.1 seconds to 1 second has a stop indication (any of the two LEDs of the ordinary symbol display 1189 emits light) Be done. In the present embodiment, the same variation display is performed also on the normal symbol display substrate 1191a provided in the second starting opening unit 2580. The variation display of the normal symbol is performed based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected from the predetermined normal symbol variation pattern selection table.

  Specifically, in the case where the drawn normal random number is a "normal hit" random number, stop display is made with a normal symbol that suggests a hit (normal symbol indicator 1189 emits green light), and the drawn normal random number is a "normal loss" random number In this case, the stop display is made with the normal symbol indicating a loss (the normal symbol display 1189 emits light in red). Then, when the normal symbol indicating "normal hit" is stopped and displayed, the door member 2589 closing the second start port 2587b is pivoted in the opening direction for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds) Then, the game ball can be won to the second starting opening 2587b.

  In the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is extremely short compared to the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, the door member 2589 starts the solenoid 2590 at the timing when the game ball passing through the gate portion 2585a and drawing the "normal hit" reaches the front side of the door member 2589 closing the second start port 2587b. Thus, it is possible to receive the second start port 2587b by turning, and when the "normal hit" is drawn, the second start port 2587b is received with extremely high probability.

  Then, when the game ball is received to the second starting opening 2587b by passing through the gate 2585a and drawing the "normal hit", it is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2593, and based on the detection signal of the second starting opening sensor 2593 A predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls are temporarily stored in the count value of the winning ball number counter as in the case where the first starting opening sensor 3422 is detected. Then, when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied (for example, when a big hit is reached), the main control substrate 4100 transfers the payout control substrate 4110 to the payout control substrate 4110 so that the number of winning balls stored in the count value of the winning ball number counter is paid out. A predetermined payout command is transmitted, and in response to the payout command, the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the winning ball device 740 to pay out the gaming balls to the upper tray 301.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball performs a hitting operation (so-called right-handed) passing the right side of the center character 2500, the game passes through the gate 2585a with a very high probability and also passes through the gate 2585a. If the ball draws a "normal hit", it is accepted to the second starting opening 2587b with extremely high probability, even a beginner or a player who is not accustomed to playing a game can easily win a prize to the second starting opening 2587b, and enjoys the player It is not possible to do.

  By the way, as described above, in the present pachinko machine 1, since the player can easily win the game ball on the second starting opening 2587b by right-punching, the winning on the second starting opening 2587b If the number of game balls to be paid out increases, the burden on the gaming hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed becomes large, and there is a possibility that the installation of the pachinko machine 1 may be overwhelmed. However, in the pachinko machine 1, since the number of gaming balls paid out by the winning of the gaming balls to the second starting opening 2587 b is one, the game is performed by the drawing of the special lottery result by the winning to the second starting opening 2587 b It is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side while enhancing the interest of the person, and to install the present pachinko machine 1 without any problem.

  Also, in this embodiment, when passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2586 while the normal symbol is variably displayed on the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol in the variation is stopped and generated and extracted earlier. Until the result of the ordinary random number is determined, the ordinary random number (including the normal pattern variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2586 is temporarily stored, its display is suspended, and stored. The number of ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of reservations) is displayed on the ordinary symbol storage indicator 1188. This ordinary symbol storage indicator 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs can be indicated by the number of LEDs to be lit, and in this example, up to four can be stored and displayed. When the number of memories exceeds four, the normal random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2126 is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a and the "normal loss" is drawn, the door member 2589 closing the second start opening 2587b maintains the state where the second start opening 2587b is closed. Therefore, the gaming ball having passed through the gate portion 2585a flows down the front surface of the door member 2589 for closing the second starting opening 2587b, and the game of the first large winning opening 2102 of the first large winning opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 is carried out by the guiding member 2584. It is released into region 1100. It should be noted that the gaming balls discharged from the guiding member 2584 into the gaming area 1100 win the first big winning opening 2102 with high probability when the first big winning opening 2102 is in the open state due to a big hit game or the like. Therefore, at the time of the big hit game etc which the first big winning a prize opening 2102 and the 2nd big winning a prize mouth 2509 can receive, the game sphere is easily hit the right route to flow down the right route 1100R, easily the game sphere It is possible to win a prize in the one big winning opening 2102 and the second big winning opening 2509.

  By the way, in the main control board 4100 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball wins in the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b and is detected in the first starting opening sensor 3422 and the second starting opening sensor 2593 Then, generation and extraction of a predetermined first special random number are performed in the first start port 2201, and generation and extraction of a predetermined second special random number are performed in the second start port 2587b. Then, after the variation display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 is started based on the extracted special random number, the special The special symbol corresponding to the random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result.

  In the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode that suggests a "big hit", the second member of the opening / closing member 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 or the second attachment unit 2570 A special advantage gaming state (for example, a big hit game) occurs in which the second opening / closing member 2572 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and in the meantime, winning a game ball to the first large winning opening 2102 or the second large winning opening 2509 You can get more game balls. When one gaming ball wins the first large winning opening 2102 or the second large winning opening 2509, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of gaming balls are paid out from the winning ball device 740 to the upper tray 301.

  In the first start opening 2201 and the second start opening 2587b, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display as well as the variation display of the normal symbol by the passage of the game ball to the gate 2585a. When the special symbol is variable display in 1186 or the special symbol such as a big hit game as a special advantageous gaming state can not be variably displayed, the gaming ball wins a prize in the starting opening 2201 or the second starting opening 2587b. When it is detected by the start opening sensor 3422 or the second start opening sensor 2593, based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3422 or the second start opening sensor 2593 until the variation display of the special symbol becomes possible. The first special random number and the second special random number extracted are temporarily stored, and the display thereof is suspended, and the number of the stored special random numbers is the first special symbol. Show in 憶 display 1184 and the second special symbol memory indicator 1187.

  Each of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 consists of two LEDs, and the combination of the light-emitting states of the light-off, light-on, and blinking LEDs indicates the number of memories. In this example, up to four can be stored and displayed. If the number of memories exceeds four, the extracted special random numbers are discarded. Also, when both the first special random number and the second special random number are stored (held), the second special random number is executed (digested) prior to the first special random number. . That is, withholding of the lottery result relating to the second starting port 2587b is executed (digested) in preference to holding of the lottery result according to the first starting port 2201.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, the first special random number or the second special random number special random number extracted based on the detection of the first starting opening sensor 3422 or the second starting opening sensor 2593 is a predetermined predetermined random number By collating with the determination table (also referred to as a big hit determination table), it is determined whether the special random number is “lost” or “big hit”. Further, in the main control board 4100, the predetermined pattern random numbers of the first symbol random number and the second symbol random number extracted based on the detection of the first start opening sensor 3422 or the second start opening sensor 2593 are predetermined By collating with the determination table (also referred to as a symbol determination table), it is determined whether "big hit" is "4R big hit", "12R big hit", or "16R big hit". Further, the symbol determination table also determines "permanent short time no hit", "permanent time per change", "time per minute", "permanent short time".

  When the extracted first special random number and second special random number are "big hit", the main control board 4100 opens the open / close member 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 or the second open / close member 2572 of the second attacher unit 2570. After that, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have a winning condition in the first large winning opening 2102 or the second large winning opening 2509. If satisfied, the open / close pattern (one open / close pattern is referred to as one round) for closing the open / close member 2104 or the second open / close member 2752 is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, "4R big hit" is repeated in four rounds, "12R big hit" in 12 rounds, and "16R big hit" in 16 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. Note that after the end of the predetermined number of rounds, the "big hit" may be replaced with a big hit determination table or the like at a high probability according to the extracted symbol random number.

  By the way, in the case of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control is performed when the extracted first special random number or second special random number is “specified big hit” (big hit serving as an opportunity to execute fate selection chance effect or fate branch effect) On the substrate 4100, the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 causes the game from the branch sensor 2620 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner that suggests "specific big hit". In the special advantageous gaming state in which the detection signal of the ball can be received (branch sensor enabled state) and the opening / closing member 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 or the second opening / closing member 2572 of the second attachment unit 2570 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. Hold the outbreak. Then, when the game ball hit to the right is detected by passing through the branch sensor 2620 in the branch space 2510l in the attachment passage 2509a, the opening / closing member 2104 or the second opening / closing member 2572 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. A state is generated, and a "specified big hit" game of the number of rounds based on the first special random number and the second special random number is performed.

  Further, in the “specific jackpot”, the variation time of the special symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is set longer than the variation time of the special symbol on the function display unit 1180. That is, the special lottery result is the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second one of the function display unit 1180 with respect to the special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2201 or the second starting opening 2587b. The time displayed by the effect image by the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is set longer than the time displayed by the special symbol display 1186. Thereby, even during the display of the effect image (for example, reach effect image) by the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the open / close member 2104 and the second open / close member 2572 are opened and closed in a predetermined pattern by the detection signal of the gaming ball from the branch sensor 2620. A special advantageous gaming state can be generated.

  In addition, after the stop display of the special symbol which suggests "specific big hit" by the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186, that is, at the start of reception of the detection signal from the branch sensor 2620, the main liquid crystal display It is desirable to display an image prompting the player to perform a hitting operation (right-handed) aiming at the branch sensor 2620 in 1900, thereby causing the branch sensor 2620 to detect the game ball and to make a special relating to the “specified big hit”. An advantageous gaming state can be generated. At this time, although the main liquid crystal display device 1900 does not indicate "big hit" ("specific big hit"), the open / close member 2104 and the second open / close member 2572 are opened and closed, and the first large winning opening 2102 and the Since it is possible to win a prize in the second large winning opening 2509, the game ball hit by the branch sensor 2620 wins in the first large winning opening 2102 and the second large winning opening 2509 and can surprise the player. , Can entertain the player.

  In addition, the game balls driven into the game area 1100 are any of the general winning openings 2101 and 2301, the first starting opening 2201, the second starting opening 2587b, the first large winning opening 2102, and the second large winning opening 2509 If the player does not win a prize, it is provided at the lower end in the left-right direction center of the game area 1100 and discharged from the out port 1151 to the rear lower side of the game board 4. In addition, a game is won even if the game ball is won in any of the general winning openings 2101, 2301, the first starting opening 2201, the second starting opening 2587b, the first large winning opening 2102, and the second large winning opening 2509 The ball is discharged to the rear lower side of the game board 4 without being returned into the game area 1100.

  The variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 153). The fluctuation display of symbols on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like is controlled by the periphery control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the command according to the lottery result transmitted from the main control substrate 4100 to the periphery control unit 4140. In this way, the peripheral control unit 4140 controls the variation display of the symbols on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 etc., which the player pays particular attention to, so that the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 For one command, a plurality of variation patterns of symbols can be prepared in advance to increase the variation patterns of symbols in the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like. The "big hit game effect image" and the like displayed in the "big hit" game and the like are also controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 etc., and effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. As a result, the display pattern of the effect image to be displayed can be increased without increasing the load of the arithmetic processing on the main control board 4100, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made more entertaining to the player and less likely to get bored. It has become.

  In addition to controlling the effect image, the peripheral control unit 4140 appropriately drives the drive motor and drive solenoid, the decoration substrate, and the like provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 based on the command related to the lottery result. The movable effect and the light emission effect can be performed, and the player can be entertained by the movable effect and the light emission effect.

[5. Characteristic effects of the second big winning opening]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball is received to the second large winning opening 2509 disposed in the attack passage 2509a of the center character 2500, a benefit such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is awarded. Therefore, the game ball receives the second large winning opening 2509 by the second opening and closing member 2572 according to the game state (for example, a big hit game, etc.) that changes by hitting the game ball into the game area 1100 In the possible open state, the player attempts to receive the game ball into the second big winning opening 2509, and performs a hitting operation (right-handed in this embodiment) such that the game ball enters into the attack path 2509a. As a result, the player can enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball. Then, when the game ball that has been hit enters the attack passage 2509a and is guided by the guiding unit 2510p, the guiding unit 2510p guides the gaming ball toward the second big winning opening 2509, so the game ball is extremely high. It can be made to accept to the 2nd big winning a prize mouth 2509 by probability, and the player can be entertained by the fact that reception of the game sphere is granted by the acceptance of the game sphere. Therefore, the game ball can be easily accepted into the variable second large winning opening 2509 which is opened and closed by the second opening and closing member 2572, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Also, when the second large winning opening 2509 in the attacker flow channel 2509a is in the open state, the second large winning opening 2509 can be received with extremely high probability simply by entering the gaming ball into the attacking passage 2509a. Even an unfamiliar player such as a beginner can easily receive the game ball into the second large winning opening 2509, and it can reduce the difficulty of hitting the game ball, thereby making the game fun It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Furthermore, since the obstacle nail is not disposed on the attacker passage 2509a provided with the second large winning opening 2509 which is opened and closed by the second opening and closing member 2572, the flow (route) of gaming balls in the attacker passage 2509a is stabilized. The game ball entered into the attack passage 2509a can be made to reach the guiding portion 2510p with certainty, and the game ball is guided by the guiding portion 2510p to the second big winning opening 2509 and the second big winning of the open state It can be accepted to the mouth 2509.

  In addition, since the gaming ball that has entered the attacking passage 2509a and has not been accepted by the second big winning opening 2509 is discharged again from the inside of the attacking passage 2509a into the playing area 1100, the released downstream in the playing area 1000 It may be accepted by the gate unit 2586a, the second start opening 2587b, the general winning opening 2101, the first large winning opening 2102 and the like provided on the side, and the game ball is not accepted to the second large winning opening 2509 Even if you are disappointed, you can be expected to receive the game ball to the downstream second starting port 2587b etc. released from the attacking passage 2509a, and suppress the decrease in the interest for the game can do.

  In addition, since the game ball is guided toward the second large winning opening 2509 by the guiding portion 2510p of the center base 2510, when the second large winning opening 2509 is in the open state, the gaming ball guided from the guiding portion 2510p is the first It becomes difficult to abut on the second opening and closing member 2572 and damage to the second opening and closing member 2572 can be reduced by an impact with which the game ball abuts, and the player is interrupted by interruption of the game due to the breakage of the second opening and closing member 2572 It is possible to prevent frustration and reduce interest. Therefore, in the case of a big hit game or the like in which the second big winning opening 2509 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, more gaming balls than usual are shot to aim at the second big winning opening 2509, so there are more games than usual. The ball comes in contact with the second opening and closing member 2572. However, as described above, since the gaming ball hardly contacts the second opening and closing member 2572 in the open position by the guiding portion 2510p, many game balls are hit. However, the second opening and closing member 2572 can be made less likely to be damaged, and interruption of the game due to the breakage of the second opening and closing member 2572 can be avoided, and the game can be enjoyed continuously.

  Furthermore, since the guiding portion 2510p of the center base 2510 is inclined so that the extension passes through the second large winning opening 2509 opened toward the right in the front view, the gaming ball is guided to the guiding portion 2510p with respect to the player. When guided, it can be recognized at first glance that it will be accepted to the second large winning opening 2509, and when the second large winning opening 2509 is in the open state, the second large winning opening 2509 is allowed to receive the game ball It can be recognized that the pachinko machine 1 is easy. Therefore, when the second large winning opening 2509 is in the open state, the player performs a hitting operation aiming at the attacker channel 2509a so that the game ball is guided by the guiding portion 2510p in the attacker channel 2509a (right The game player can actively make a hit, and can enjoy the game ball hitting operation to suppress the decrease in interest. In addition, as described above, since it can be made to recognize at a glance that the player can reliably receive the second big winning opening 2509 when the game ball is induced to the guiding portion 2510p, the pachinko machine to play the game The player who is selecting can increase the feeling of expectation for the game with the pachinko machine 1 and can make it easy to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to be played.

  In addition, since the guiding portion 2510p is inclined so that an extension line passes through the second large winning opening 2509 opened toward the right in front view, the gaming ball guided by the guiding portion 2510p can be opened in the second state. It is possible to directly receive the second large winning opening 2509 without contacting the opening and closing member 2572, it can be reduced as much as possible that the game ball contacts the second opening and closing member 2572 in the open state, Damage to the second opening and closing member 2572 due to fatigue can be prevented. On the other hand, when the second large winning opening 2509 is closed, the second opening / closing member 2572 is in a substantially vertically rising state, so the gaming ball guided by the guiding portion 2510 p is directed to the second opening / closing member 2572 Since the impact applied to the second opening and closing member 2572 is smaller compared to the case where the contact is applied from above, fatigue accumulation is reduced and the second opening and closing member 2572 is prevented from being damaged. can do. From these things, it is possible to prevent the interruption of the game due to the breakage of the second opening and closing member 2572 by preventing the second opening and closing member 2572 from being broken, so the player is annoyed by the interruption of the game. It is possible to avoid remembering and lowering interest, and to enjoy the game continuously.

  Further, the second opening and closing member 2572 for opening and closing the second large winning opening 2509 is rotated about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the second opening and closing member 2572 is opened and closed when the second large winning opening 2509 is opened or closed. When the second opening / closing member 2572 can be seen from the player's side, the external shape of the second opening / closing member 2572 does not change and it only changes its direction. It is easy to understand and makes it easy for the player to notice the opening and closing of the second large winning opening 2509, and avoids the feeling that the player has lost without being aware of the opening and closing of the second large winning opening 2509, It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest, and to make the second large winning opening 2509 in the opened state promptly hit the game ball aiming at the second large winning opening 2509, Entertain the player Interest Te can be suppressed.

  Further, since the lower end side of the second opening / closing member 2572 is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction near the lower end of the second large winning opening 2509, the second opening / closing member 2572 is turned to the open position. When moved, the tip (upper end) side of the second opening / closing member 2572 is pivoted in the direction approaching the guiding portion 2510p. As a result, the second opening / closing member 2572 is bridged between the guiding portion 2510 p and the second large winning opening 2509, so that the gaming ball guided by the guiding portion 2510 p is moved from the guiding portion 2510 p to the second guiding hole 2510 p. The second opening / closing member 2572 is rolled to be received by the second large winning opening 2509, and when the gaming ball is delivered from the guiding portion 2510p to the second opening / closing member 2572, the second opening / closing member 2572 is The impact that acts can be reduced, and the second opening and closing member 2572 can be made less susceptible to breakage. In addition, when the second opening and closing member 2572 is rotated from the open position to the closed position, the leading end (upper end) of the second opening and closing member 2572 guides the flow path of the gaming ball guided by the induction portion 2510p. Since it rotates in the direction away from 2510p, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball guided from the guiding portion 2510p from being accepted into the second large winning opening 2509 at this timing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a predetermined number or more of game balls from being accepted into the second big winning opening 2509, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Furthermore, since the game ball is induced to flow down toward the lower end of the second large winning opening 2509 by the guiding portion 2510p, when the second large winning hole 2509 is in the open state, the gaming ball can be reliably secured from the guiding portion 2510p. The second large winning opening 2509 can be received, and the contact of the game ball with the second opening and closing member 2572 in the open state can be reduced as much as possible, and the second opening and closing member 2572 is damaged due to fatigue. Can be prevented. On the other hand, when the second big winning opening 2509 is in the closed state, the gaming ball guided from the guiding portion 2510p comes in contact with the vicinity of the rotatably supported lower end of the second opening and closing member 2572. The lower end side of the opening and closing member 2572 is in a state excellent in impact resistance due to the contact of the game ball, and the second opening and closing member 2572 can be made less likely to be damaged. Therefore, by preventing the second opening and closing member 2572 from being damaged, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the breakage of the second opening and closing member 2572. Can be avoided and the game can be enjoyed continuously.

  Further, all the game balls circulating in the attack path 2509a are guided toward the second big winning opening 2509 by the guiding unit 2510p, and the second large winning opening 2509 is opened by the second opening and closing member 2572. When the ball is made to enter the attack passage 2509a, all gaming balls are guided by the guiding portion 2510p toward the second big winning opening 2509, so that more gaming balls are accepted into the second big winning opening 2509 It is possible to make the player entertain and suppress the decrease in interest. Also, when the second large winning opening 2509 is in the open state, the game ball can be received into the second large winning opening 2509 simply by advancing the gaming ball into the attachment passage 2509a, so the gaming ball aimed at the attacking passage 2509a Thus, it is possible to concentrate on the operation of hitting the key, and to prevent the player from getting bored and to reduce the interest in the game.

  In addition, the game ball which has been driven into the game area 1100 by a predetermined amount or more is made to enter into the attack passage 2509a, and the game ball is easily entered into the attack passage 2509a by a simple hit operation (right strike). Since the second large winning opening 2509 in the attacking passage 2509a is opened according to the game state, even an unskilled player such as a beginner easily causes the game ball to enter the attacking passage 2509a. The game ball can be received with high probability into the variable second large winning opening 2509 which is opened and closed by the second opening and closing member 2572, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, immediately above the first starting opening 2201 which may generate a special advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage by receiving the gaming ball as an entrance to which a privilege is given. The stage 2506 is disposed upstream of the game player, and the player can be made aware of the fact that the game ball is released to the first starting opening 2201 with high probability when the game ball is released from the stage 2506, and the stage 2506 is provided. A warp entrance 2503 to which gaming balls can enter is opened on the outer periphery of the center-shaped center character 2500, and the game sphere is supplied to the stage 2506 when the gaming balls enter the warp entrance 2503. As it can be made to recognize at a glance for the game, the warp entrance 2503 is given to the player so that the game ball is supplied to the stage 2506. Can be made to the implantation operation of the game balls Tsu, you are possible to entertain the hammering operation of the game ball to the player. Then, when the game ball hit into the game area 1100 enters the warp inlet 2503, it circulates to the distributing member 2520 in the warp passage 2504, and the warp outlet 2505 side supplied to the stage 2506 by the distributing member 2520, Alternatively, since the game ball is distributed to any of the discharge port 2508 side returned to the game area 1100, the game ball is not necessarily supplied to the stage 2506 just because the game ball has entered the warp entrance 2503, It can be attracted to the distributing member 2520 in the warp passage 2504 where the player's interest can be visually recognized, and the movement of the game ball supplied to the stage 2506 can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in the player's interest Can.

  In addition, the distributing ball 2520 in the warp passage 2504 distributes the gaming ball entering from the warp inlet 2503 to either the warp outlet 2505 side for supplying the stage 2506 or the outlet 2508 side for returning to the game area 1100. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel sloppy and shocked about whether or not the game ball can be distributed to the warp outlet 2505 side (stage 2506 side) by the distribution member 2520, and the movement of the game ball to the player Can be used to suppress the decline in interest.

  Furthermore, since the gaming balls distributed to the warp outlet 2505 side by the distributing member 2520 are supplied from the warp outlet 2505 to the stage 2506, they roll on the stage 2506 like the conventional pachinko machine provided with the stage 2506. In addition to being able to enjoy the movement of the gaming ball, the player can be excited about whether or not the gaming ball is released from the part that is accepted with high probability to the first starting opening 2201 in the stage 2506, The distribution member 2520 and the stage 2506 make it possible to entertain the player doubly, and to enjoy games that are not available in conventional pachinko machines.

  In addition, when the game ball released from the stage 2506 is accepted to the first starting opening 2201, a payout of the game ball and a special lottery result lottery where a special advantage game state occurs is performed, and a special advantage game state can occur Since there is a sex, it is possible to make the player feel good and to further drive the game ball into the game area 1100, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  Furthermore, the gaming ball supplied to the distributing member 2520 in the warp passage 2504 is reciprocated in the left and right direction by the rolling surface 2521 which extends in the left and right direction and is curved so that both ends are high. Since it is released and distributed to either the warp outlet 2505 side or the discharge port 2508 side by the hook portion 2523, it is possible to entertain the player with the movement of the gaming ball which rolls back and forth in the left and right direction, Since the game ball can reciprocate to the side of the warp outlet 2505 side or the discharge port 2508 by reciprocating to the left and right direction, it is possible for the player to be sloppy to the distribution of the game ball. Can increase the sense of expectation of distribution to the warp exit 2505 side (stage 2506 side) and suppress the decline in interest .

  In addition, since the game ball entering from the warp entrance 2503 is supplied to one end side in the lateral direction of the rolling surface 2521 of the distributing member 2520, the gaming ball is reliably reciprocated in the lateral direction on the rolling surface 2521 It is possible to make the player enjoy the movement of the game ball and to suppress the decrease in interest. In addition, since the game ball is reciprocated in the lateral direction on the rolling surface 2521 of the distribution member 2520, the time from the supply of the game ball to the distribution member 2520 to the distribution can be extended, It can be made easy to recognize that the game ball is distributed to the player, and the movement of the game ball in the warp passage 2504 can be enjoyed, and it is easy to see where the game ball is distributed. The player can be harassing and pounding, and the expectation of the player can be enhanced to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in the distributing member 2520, since the probability that the gaming balls discharged from the discharge portion 2522 of the rolling surface 2521 can be distributed to the warp outlet 2505 side by the hook 2523 is high, the game entered into the warp inlet 2503 The number of times the player is discouraged can be reduced by distributing the ball to the discharge port 2508 side and returning it into the gaming area 1100, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest At the same time, by distributing game balls to the outlet 2508 side occasionally, it is possible to increase the feeling of pounding for the distribution of the game balls by the distribution member 2520, and to prevent the player from getting bored and to decrease the interest rate. Can.

  In addition, when the game ball hit aiming at the warp entrance 2503 passes between the warp entrance 2503 and the inner circumference of the game area 1100 without entering the warp entrance 2503, it is guided by the shelf 2510f of the center character 2500. The game ball enters the entrance 2507 and is guided from the entrance 2507 through the guide passage 2532a to the upper end on the right end side of the rolling surface 2521 of the distributing member 2520, so that the game ball is distributed to the player. It can be thought that there is a possibility of being supplied to the member 2520 (rolling surface 2521) and being distributed to the stage 2506 side. Therefore, even if the player is disappointed by the fact that the game ball that has been hit does not enter the warp entrance 2503, it can be made to feel like being rescued by entering the downstream entrance 2507, and the player It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of

[6. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (in particular, the main control MPU 4100a) will be described. FIG. 154 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (a), the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment first performs various registers and RAMs as the process of step S1 on condition that the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated. Initialize the stored data. The RAM clear switch 4100 c is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and can not be operated unless the main body frame 3 is opened. Further, the RAM clear switch 4100 c outputs a clear signal to the main control board 4100 according to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses from the power on, and the main control MPU 4100 a receives the clear signal at the power on. If it is determined that there is, the initialization process (step S1) is executed to initialize data stored in the various registers and the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Although not illustrated, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, backup processing is performed to save information (for example, various flags etc.) indicating the progress of the game in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. Then, if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 4100c is not operated, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is referred to in the backup processing without executing the initialization processing (step S1). And execute recovery processing to recover the state according to the information. Further, when the RAM clear switch 4100 c is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the pachinko machine 1 is set in the initial state by executing the initialization process without executing the recovery process.

  Next, as the process of step S2, the update of the random number which is the number updated within a predetermined numerical range is performed. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment, the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) to be subjected to the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol The fluctuation random number provided for the lottery process for the predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of, and the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol performed by the main liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the fluctuation display of the special symbol Reach (The left decoration symbol and the right decoration symbol are stopped and displayed in the same pattern, and the middle decoration pattern is not displayed in a stopped state, or the left, middle and right decoration symbols are synchronized so that they all become the same symbol Reach random numbers to be subjected to lottery processing whether or not to display), symbols to be subjected to lottery processing for determining the type of big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number A random number counter that holds random numbers such as a number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number), a random number (normal random number) and the like to be provided for the lottery process for the hit of the door member 2589 There is.

  In this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first start opening 2201 is started, the second start opening 2587b is started. Even if the reach random number is configured to be acquired from the same counter that updates reach random numbers, the reach randomization execution ratio can be obtained by acquiring from different counters where the range of random numbers to update reach random numbers is different. The first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol may be different as the reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number, and may be different from the first reach determination table corresponding to the second special symbol. The execution ratio of the reach effect may be made different by providing a second reach determination table in which the determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random number (variation random number) which is not related to the drop of the random number is updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 ms.

  FIG. 154 (b) is a flow chart showing a processing procedure of timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 2586, the first start opening sensor 3422, the second start opening sensor 2593, the first count sensor 2111, the second count sensor 2578, the general winning opening sensor 3421 and the like , Detection signals from various switches are input. Then, next, in step S13, random number update processing for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-mentioned random numbers, random numbers (special random numbers, ordinary random numbers) relating to the display mode at the time of the stop of the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol are updated Counter operation is performed.

  And after updating the random number in this way, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs a special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the above special symbol as the process of step S14. Run. In addition, although this special symbol process processing will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (a first special symbol process flag, a first special symbol process flag, the first special symbol process flag, which indicates the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a) Corresponding processing will be selectively executed based on (2) special symbol process flag).

  Then, next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes, as the processing of step S15, a normal symbol process process including a lottery process concerning a hit when the door member 2589 becomes an operation trigger. Also in this normal symbol process processing, basically, the corresponding processing is selectively executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is such that the drive frequency of the door member 2589 is higher in a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state (excluding a part of the 4R big hit gaming state). It becomes a structure which performs a lottery process (what is called time saving state). In this embodiment, the probability of winning the normal symbol is increased only within a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state (excluding a part of the 4R big hit gaming state), and the variation display control of the normal symbol is performed. Such time reduction is realized by shortening the time required and extending the opening time of the door member 2589 when the lottery result of the normal symbol is hit.

  When the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 next performs the special symbol process process as a process of step S16. A command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like. Next, as the process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 4010 is performed.

  In addition, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 outputs information such as contact information (16R big hit, 12R big hit, 4R big hit) to be supplied next to the hole management computer, for example, in the process of step S18. Do the processing.

  Then, when the detection signals of the first count sensor 2111, the second count sensor 2578, etc. are in the on state, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 responds to those signals in the process of step S19. A payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 so that the winning balls are paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU 4111a mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744 to pay out the prize balls to the player. On the other hand, when the detection signals of the first starting opening sensor 3422 and the second starting opening sensor 2593 are turned on, the winning balls corresponding to those signals are temporarily stored in the count value of the winning ball number counter, When a payout condition is satisfied (for example, a big hit), a payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 so that the number of winning balls stored in the count value of the winning ball number counter is paid out. That is, even if the detection signals of the first start opening sensor 3422 and the second start opening sensor 2593 are turned on, the player is not immediately paid out the award ball, and the predetermined payout condition is satisfied. Until the prize balls are not paid out.

  In addition, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 next executes a storage process of checking the increase and decrease of the number of starting memories as the process of step S20. Next, test terminal processing, which is processing of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed as the process of step S21. After that, while performing drive control of the actuator which always operates (step S22), the contents of the above register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt enabled state is set (step S24), this control ends. It becomes.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag may be set to indicate that an interrupt has occurred. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that random numbers provided for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 155, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first uses the first starting opening sensor 3422 described above. The first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter on condition that the detection signal is in the on state (with the first start port 2201 having entered the ball) (step S31) A first starting opening passage process such as storing in one special symbol hold storage area is executed (step S32). In addition, the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number on condition that the detection signal by the second starting opening sensor 2593 is in the on state (the second starting opening 2587b is entered) (step S33) The second starting opening passage processing such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S34).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the branch sensor effective flag indicating that control is being performed to the branch sensor effective state is set (step S35), and if the branch sensor effective flag is set, the branch sensor effective state is branched A branch sensor passage process (step S40) is performed to monitor whether or not the game ball passes through the sensor 2620.

  On the other hand, if the branch sensor effective flag is not set, the jackpot running flag indicating that control to the jackpot gaming state is being performed, or the payout effect (the number of winning balls corresponding to the count value of the winning balls number counter It is determined whether or not any of the payout effect in-progress flags indicating that the effect to be paid out is being executed is set (step S36), and the big hit execution flag or the payout effect in-progress flag If any is set, the big hit control process (step S41) to control the big hit gaming state based on the big hit running flag is set, and at the end of the big hit gaming state, An instruction to pay out the number of balls according to the count value of the number-of- balls counter is given (the payout execution flag is set), and a payout effect in-progress flag is set. Demonstration execution flag executes the payout effect execution processing for monitoring whether or not during the execution of the payout effect based on the fact that has been set (step S42).

  In the big hit control process (step S41), the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the fluctuation display stop of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is "4R normal big hit A (not specified 1)" , "4R latent probability big hit (specific 1)", "4R probability variation big hit (specific 3)" when it comes to a mode that suggests, according to the 4R big hit gaming state open for a long time the first large winning opening 2102 The second big winning opening 2509 is controlled to the open state according to the 4R big hit gaming state of the open for a short time when it is controlled to the open state and it becomes the aspect which suggests “4R sudden probability big hit A (specific 2)”. , "4R Normal Big Hit B (not specified 2)", "4R Normal Big Hit C (not specified 3)", "4R Normal Big Hit D (not specified 4)" The first large entry according to the 4R big hit gaming state Control the mouth 2102 to the open state, and when it comes to the mode that suggests "12R probability variation big hit A (specific 4)", "12R probability variation big hit B (specific 5)", according to the 12R big hit gaming status of long time open The second big winning opening 2509 is controlled to the open state, and when it comes to the mode that suggests “16R probability variation big hit (specific 7)”, the second big winning according to the 16R big hit gaming state of long opening A process of controlling the port 2509 in the open state is performed.

  Also, in the big hit control process (step S41), after performing the opening control of the first large winning opening 2102 or the second large winning opening 2509, each set process of the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time reduction counter . The high probability flag is a flag indicating that it is a high probability state, and a big hit (specific 1 4R latency probability big hit) controlled to a high probability state (high probability time short state, high probability non-short time short state) after the big hit gaming state ends , Specific 2 4R stupid jackpot A, specific 3 4R probability variation big hit, specific 4 12R probability variation big hit A, specific 5 12R probability variation big hit B, specific 6 4R thrust probability big hit B, specific 7 16R probability variation big hit) The jackpot is set when the jackpot gaming state ends, and is reset by a first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 165 described later or a second special symbol stop process (not shown) when it becomes the next big hit.

  In addition, the time saving flag is a flag indicating that it is a time saving state, and a big hit (non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state) controlled to time saving state (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state) after the big hit gaming state ends The jackpot is set at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the non-specified 1 4R normal big hit A and the specified 1 4 R latent probability big hit excluding control during high probability non-short state). And when the time saving flag becomes the next big hit, or when the count value of the time saving flag becomes “0”, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 165 described later or the second special symbol not shown shown in FIG. It is reset by processing.

  In addition, the time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of fluctuation display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time reduction state, and the time reduction state (high probability) after the end of the big hit gaming state Among the big hit controlled to time saving state, low probability time saving state) big hit where predetermined number of times is set as continuation number (time saving number of times) of time saving state (non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A and specific 1 during control of time saving state) The 4R latent probability big hit, non specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non specific 3 4R normal big hit C, non specific 4 4R normal big hit D when it ends the big hit game state based on, when the short state continues The number of times is set, and the time reduction counter is counted down each time the special symbol is displayed until the counter value becomes "0", but the counter value is "0". When it is the next big hit before becomes the (return the counter value to "0") which is reset by the second special symbol stop processing without first special symbol stop processing or illustrated shown in FIG. 165 which will be described later.

  Also, if neither the big hit running flag nor the payout effect running flag is set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is The first special symbol process processing including the lottery processing according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol is executed on the condition that it is "0" (step S37) (step S38), the second special symbol On condition that the value of the second special reserve number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the reserve storage area is not "0" (step S37), the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol The second special symbol process process including the lottery process is executed (step S39). Thus, in this example, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0".

  FIG. 156 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passage process (step S32).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first starting opening sensor 3422 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 2201, as shown in FIG. 156. In step S41, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the counter value by the first special hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. And based on this counter value, it is judged whether the number of holdings of the above-mentioned first special symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S41, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put variable display control of the first special symbol into a state of suspension Processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S42, the first special hold number counter is counted up (one added). Next, as the process of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, next, as the process of step S44, the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as each random number acquired in this way Store in

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S41 that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold by terminating the process without executing the process of steps S42 to S44.

  FIG. 157 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second start port passing process (step S34).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2593 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start port 2587b, as shown in FIG. 157. In step S51, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. And based on this counter value, it is judged whether the number of reservations of the above-mentioned 2nd special symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S51, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into a state of suspension Processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, in the process of step S52, the second special hold number counter is counted up (one added). Next, as the process of step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, next, as the process of step S54, the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as each random number thus acquired Store in

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S51 that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold by terminating the process without executing the process of steps S52 to S54.

  FIG. 158 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing are program modules similar to each other, and random numbers used for determination Since only the tables are different, only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process processing, one of the following five process treatments will be selectively executed in accordance with the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process or the like is performed on the display mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol. Symbol normal processing (step S80)
2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process in which the determination process of the mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol (step S81 )
3. A lottery for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 based on the variation random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the special symbol First variation pattern setting process (step S82)
4. First special symbol variation processing to stand by until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 is stopped (step S83)
5. The first special symbol display mode 1185 is displayed as the first special symbol display 1185 when the first special symbol variation control is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process about the display mode at the time of the variation control suspension of the first special symbol. First special symbol stop processing to stop the variation display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S80) should be performed in the above-described processing of step S1 (see FIG. 154).

  FIG. 159 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal processing (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 159, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S101. As processing of, it is judged whether there is fluctuation display control of the first special symbol in the state of suspension based on the counter value by the first special suspension number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the state of suspension, then it is stored in the first special symbol suspension storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the processing of step S102. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol . Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special holding number counter is counted down and the first special symbol storage area of the first special symbol holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is stored. A shift operation is performed on a random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol in a first-in first-out mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas of 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning from the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. Thus, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). become.

  After that, as the process of step S105, the big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the above big hit is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the above first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S81), this processing is ended.

  FIG. 160 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is in the high probability state shown in FIG. 161A if the current gaming state is the high probability state (high probability time short state, high probability non-short state) (step S111) The big hit determination table is selected (step S112), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), the big hit determination table for low probability shown in FIG. 161 (A) is selected (step S113). The determined big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S114).

  The big hit determination table shown in FIG. 161A is stored in the ROM 4100 d of the main control MPU 4100 a, and the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-short time state) and short time state (low probability time short state)) The jackpot determination table for low probability used for the game and the jackpot determination table for high probability used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non-short time state, high probability time short state) are provided. And, in the big hit judgment table at low probability, it matches with the big hit judgment value which shows that 3 types of 1st special random numbers were won in a big hit, and it is out of place judgment that 1168 types of 1st special random numbers show the above The first special random numbers are associated with one another so as to match the values. In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, in the jackpot determination table at low probability referred to compare with the second special random number, it is compared with the first special random number As in the low probability big hit judgment table for low probability to be referred to, it matches with the big hit judgment value indicating that the 3 types of second special random numbers win the big hit, and the 1168 types of second special random numbers are deviated from the above The second special random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to coincide with the out-of-range determination value indicating that.

  Also, in the high probability big hit determination table, 24 types of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the low probability big hit determination table match the big hit determination value, The first special random numbers are associated with one another such that the 1147 types of first special random numbers match the disconnection determination value. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability time short state, high probability short time state), when the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit is won is low probability (normal state (low probability short time state And eight times the short time state (low probability time short state)). In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, the high probability big hit judgment table to be referred to compare with the second special random number is compared with the first special random number In order to make a big hit, 24 kinds of second special random numbers including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the big hit judgment table at low probability as well as the big hit judgment table at high probability to be referred to The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the player has won, and to match the outlier determination value indicating that the second special random number of 1147 types is the above-mentioned deviation.

  If the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected big hit determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, it determines that it is a big hit (step S115) ), The big hit flag which shows that the particular fluctuation is hit big is set, it ends processing (step S116), the 1st special read out at step S102 of the selected big hit judgment table and the 1st special symbol normal processing As a result of comparison with the random numbers, when it is determined that there is a loss, the reach determination table shown in FIG. 161 (B) is compared with the reach random numbers read in step S102 (step S117).

  The reach determination table shown in FIG. 161 (B) is stored in the ROM 4100 d of the main control MPU 4100 a, and is used when the gaming state is short (high probability short status, low probability short status). The non-time-reach reach determination table used when the gaming state is non-time-short (high probability non-time-short state, low probability non-time-short state) is provided. Then, in the reach determination table at the time of time saving, the reach random numbers do not match the reach determination value indicating that all 239 reach random numbers reach, and the reach random numbers match so as to match the reach determination value indicating no reach. Each is associated. As described above, when it is determined that the reach is out during the short time, the reach is not determined to be out, so the reach flag described later is not set, and the reach effect is not performed. For this reason, when the reach is formed at a short time and the reach effect is executed, it can be recognized that a big hit will be made at that time, and the reach effect can be enjoyed with ease.

  Further, in the non-time-shortening reach determination table, the above reach is determined so that the 12 reach random numbers match the reach determination value indicating reach, and the 227 reach random numbers match the reach determination value indicating no reach The random numbers are associated with one another. As described above, in the non-time component, the reach determination value indicating the reach is provided unlike the time component. For this reason, even if reach is formed at non-short time and reach effect is executed, it can not be recognized whether or not a big hit will be made until all the decoration symbols are stopped and displayed.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S117), and when it is determined that the reach is out (step S118), the variation Sets a reach flag indicating that it is a reach, and the process ends (step S119).

  FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 162, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs the process of FIG. The result of the lottery process of the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol, that is, the result of the above-mentioned big hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the lottery process result is performed by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S121).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S121, main control MPU 4100a compares the first symbol random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 161 (C). (Step S122) The type of the big hit is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of the big hit is determined (step S123). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, it is determined that the first special symbol is out of pattern as the variation stop state (step S124).

  As shown in FIG. 161 (C), in the symbol determination table, each determination result (non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, non-specific 2 4 R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4 R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4R normal big hit D, specific 1 4R latent big hit, specific 2 4R positive big hit A, specific 3 4R positive variation big hit, specific 4 12R positive variation big hit A, specific 5 12R positive variation big hit B, specific 6 4R positive A large random number B, a specific 7 16R probability variation large number large circle) is stored in a form in which symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) are associated. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the type of the jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different ing.

In particular,
1. Closed after the first large winning opening 2102 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 2111 that nine gaming balls have won in the first large winning opening 2102 The game ball can enter the first large winning opening 2102 by repeating the open / close pattern four times (four rounds) to control the 4R big hit gaming state where it is possible (easy), and the short time state (low probability short time, high probability) When it is controlled to the non-time-short state), it is controlled to the low probability non-time-short state after the end of the 4R big hit gaming state, while it is controlled to the time-short state (high probability time short state, low probability time short state) Control to low probability time short state until fluctuation display of special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 30 times after the end of 4R big hit gaming state (when fluctuation display of special symbol is over 30 times) Probability short time It has been made to transition control) in state, a non-specific 1 as the execution timing of the fate selection chance effect 4R normal big hit A
2. Closed after the first large winning opening 2102 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 2111 that nine gaming balls have won in the first large winning opening 2102 The game ball can enter the first large winning opening 2102 by repeating the open / close pattern four times (four rounds) to control the 4R big hit gaming state where it is possible (easy), and the short time state (low probability short time, high probability) If it is controlled to the non-time-short state), while it is controlled to the high probability non-time-short state after the end of the 4R big hit gaming state, if it is controlled to time-short state (high probability time short state, low probability time short state) Control to high probability time short state until fluctuation display of special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 30 times after the end of 4R big hit gaming state (high when fluctuation display of special symbol exceeds 30 times Probability short time Been made to transition control) in state, particular 1 to be execution timing fate selection chance effect 4R latent 確大 per 3. The game ball controls the second big winning opening 2509 into a difficult 4R big hit gaming state by repeating the opening and closing pattern to be closed after opening the second big winning opening 2509 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) four times After the end of the 4R big hit gaming state, it is controlled to the high probability time short state until it becomes big hit again, and the specific 2 4R big hit big hit which becomes the execution opportunity of the fate selection chance presentation 4. Closed after the first large winning opening 2102 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 2111 that nine gaming balls have won in the first large winning opening 2102 The game ball can enter the first large winning opening 2102 by repeating the opening / closing pattern four times (four rounds) to control the 4R big hit gaming state where it is possible (easy), and it becomes a big hit again after the end of the 4R big hit gaming state Specific 3 4R probability variation big hit controlled to high probability time short state up to 5. Closed when the second large winning opening 2509 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the second count sensor 2578 that nine gaming balls have won in the second large winning opening 2509 The game ball can enter the second large winning opening 2509 by repeating the opening and closing pattern 12 times (12 rounds) to control (easy) 12R big hit gaming state, and it will be a big hit again after the end of the 12R big hit gaming state Specific 4 12R probability variation big hit A to control to high probability time short state up to
6. Closed when the second large winning opening 2509 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the second count sensor 2578 that nine gaming balls have won in the second large winning opening 2509 The game ball can enter the second large winning opening 2509 by repeating the opening and closing pattern 12 times (12 rounds) to control (easy) 12R big hit gaming state, and it will be a big hit again after the end of the 12R big hit gaming state It is controlled to a high probability time short state, and it is the specific 5's 12R probability variation big hit B which becomes the execution opportunity of the fate choice chance presentation
7. The opening and closing pattern to be closed after opening the first big winning opening 2102 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is repeated 4 times to control the 4R big hit gaming state where the gaming ball is difficult to enter the first big winning opening 2102 , After the end of the 4R big hit gaming state control of the special symbol (first special symbol and the second special symbol) until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 10 times (control display of the special symbol more than 10 times) Sometimes it is a transition control to low probability non-short time state), and it is a non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B which becomes the execution opportunity of the fate branch direction production
8. The opening and closing pattern to be closed after opening the first big winning opening 2102 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is repeated 4 times to control the 4R big hit gaming state where the gaming ball is difficult to enter the first big winning opening 2102 , After the end of the 4R big hit gaming state control of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) in the low probability time short state until the fluctuation display of 20 times is executed (the fluctuation display of the special symbol exceeded 20 times Sometimes it is a transition control to low probability non-short time state), non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C which becomes the execution trigger of fate branch staging
9. The opening and closing pattern to be closed after opening the first big winning opening 2102 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is repeated 4 times to control the 4R big hit gaming state where the gaming ball is difficult to enter the first big winning opening 2102 , After the end of the 4R big hit gaming state control of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 30 times (control display of the special symbol exceeds 30 times) Sometimes it is the transition control to low probability untimely state), and it is the non-specific 4 4R normal big hit D which becomes the execution opportunity of the fate branch direction production
10. The game ball controls the second big winning opening 2509 into a difficult 4R big hit gaming state by repeating the opening and closing pattern to be closed after opening the second big winning opening 2509 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) four times After the end of the 4R big hit gaming state, it is controlled to the high probability time short state until it becomes big hit again, and the specific 6 4R stupid big hit B which becomes the execution opportunity of the fate branch effect
11. Closed when the second large winning opening 2509 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the second count sensor 2578 that nine gaming balls have won in the second large winning opening 2509 The game ball can enter the second large winning opening 2509 by repeating the opening and closing pattern 16 times (16 rounds) to control (easy) 16R big hit gaming state, and it will be a big hit again after the end of the 16R big hit gaming state It is controlled to a high probability time short state, and it is determined to be one of 11 kinds of big hit of specific 7 16R positive variation big hit which becomes the execution opportunity of the fate branch directing.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. And, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination value is set to be different compared to the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the determination ratio of each big hit is different ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161 (C), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, the non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, the specific 1 4 R latent probability big hit, the specific 2 4 R sudden probability big hit While the distribution of the judgment value is set only for the specific 3 4R probability variation big hit, the specific 4 12R probability variation big hit A, and the specific 5 12R probability variation big hit B, the symbol determination corresponding to the second special symbol is determined In the table, non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4 R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4 R normal big hit D, specific 6 4R super big hit B, specific 7 16 R probability variation big hit only for the hit Distribution is set.

  In this example, the opening time of the first large winning opening 2102 per round in the big hit gaming state in non-specific 1 and specific 1, 3 and non-specific 2 to 4 (the opening and closing member 2104 of the above-mentioned attacker unit 2100 The opening control time is made different. Specifically, in the case of non-specification 1 and specificity 1 and 3, while controlling the opening time of the first large winning opening 2102 per round to 28.5 seconds, it is controlled to a long-time opening. In the case of non-specific 2 to 4, the opening time of the first large winning opening 2102 per round is controlled to a short time opening of 0.5 seconds which is extremely shorter than the long opening time. . As described above, in the case of non-specification 2 to 4, since the opening time of the first large winning opening 2102 per round is too short, the opening control of the opening and closing member 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is recognized Even in this case, it is difficult to win the game ball in the first large winning opening 2102. That is, during the control of the big hit game state of the short time opening using the first big winning opening 2102, the gaming ball hardly wins the first big winning opening 2102, and the first big winning opening 2102 Unlike during the control of the jackpot gaming state of long time opening using the, it can not be expected to obtain many gaming balls.

  Further, in the same manner as described above, in this example, the opening time of the second large winning opening 2509 per round in the big hit gaming state in the specific 2, 6 and the specific 4, 5, 7 (the second attack unit 2570 The time to open and control the second opening and closing member 2572 is made different. Specifically, when it becomes identification 4, 5, and 7, it controls to long-time opening which makes the opening time of the above-mentioned 2nd big winning a prize mouth 2509 per round 28.5 seconds, but it is specified In the case of 2, 6, the opening time of the second large winning opening 2509 per round is controlled to a short time opening which is 0.5 second which is extremely shorter than the long time opening. As described above, when it is specified 2 or 6, since the opening time of the second large winning opening 2509 per round is too short, the opening control of the second opening / closing member 2572 of the second attacker unit 2570 is performed. Even if it is recognized, it is difficult to win the game ball in the second big winning opening 2509. That is, during the control of the big hit game state of the short time opening using the second large winning opening 2509, the game ball hardly wins the second large winning opening 2509, and the second large winning opening 2509 Unlike during the control of the jackpot gaming state of long time opening using the, it can not be expected to obtain many gaming balls.

  Although details will be described later, in the non-time-short state (low probability non-time short state, high-probability non-time short state), the door member 2589 is not driven even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301. Therefore, in the non-time saving state, the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 2587b does not occur, and by hitting left, only the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2201 will occur, and the second special Only the variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1185 is executed except when there is a symbol holding ball, the big hit related to the first special symbol (non-specified 1 4R normal big hit A, specified 1 A 4R latent big hit, a specific 2 4R positive big hit A, a specific 3 4R positive variation big hit, a specific 4 12R positive variation big hit A, a specific 5 12 R positive variation big hit B) will occur. On the other hand, in the time saving state (high probability time short state, low probability time short state), the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301 to drive the door member 2589. Therefore, in the time saving state, as long as you hit the right, only winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2587b will occur, and in the second special symbol indicator 1186 except when there is a holding ball of the first special symbol Only the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the big hit related to the second special symbol (non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4 R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4 R normal big hit D, specific 6 4R sudden big hit B, specific 7 16R positive variation big hit) will occur.

  In addition, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, while it is possible to control 4R big hit gaming state or 12R big hit gaming state as a long hit open gaming state, the big hit related to the second special symbol is long The percentage determined to be a big hit (specific 7 16R probability variation big hit) that can be controlled to 16R big hit gaming state as opening big hit gaming state, and further controlled to long open 16R big hit gaming state related to the second special symbol Since the game is set to 75%, a game based on winning of the game ball in the second start opening 2587b is executed by hitting the right in a short time, the game to the first start opening 2201 can be hit in the left It is possible to obtain a large number of winning balls compared to the non-short time state in which the game based on the ball winning is executed.

  Moreover, if the kind of big hit is determined, the stop design according to the kind of big hit will be determined as a mode at the time of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, when it is decided to be a non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, it is decided to be a big hit symbol 4R normal big hit A symbol as a big hit symbol, and when it is decided to be a specific 1 4R latent certain hit, it is 4R latent probability as a big hit symbol Determined as a big hit symbol, when it is decided to a specific 2 4R stupid big hit A, it decides as a big hit symbol as a 4R stupid big hit A symbol, and when it decides to a specific 3 4R definite variation big hit, it as a big hit symbol 4R definite variation big hit symbol If it is decided on, and it is decided on the specific 4 12R probability variation big hit A, it is decided on the 12R probability variation big hit A symbol as the big hit symbol and if it is decided on the specific 5 12R probability variation big hit B it is the big hit symbol 12R probability variation big hit B symbol Decide on. In addition, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting processing not shown, if it is decided to be 4R normal big hit B of non specific 2 as a big hit symbol it is decided to be 4R normal big hit B symbol and decided to be non specific 3 4R normal big hit C In the case of a big hit symbol, it is decided to be 4R normal big hit C symbol, and when it is decided to be 4 R normal big hit D not specified, it is decided to be 4R normal big hit D symbol as big hit symbol If determined, it will be decided on the 4R sudden probability big hit B symbol as the big hit symbol, and if decided on the specific 7 16R positive variation big hit, it will be decided on the 16 R positive variation big hit symbol as the big hit symbol.

  And after the decision processing about the stop design is done in this way, as the processing of step S125, these drawing results (the kind of big hit, reach out indication, either of the out indication (the form of the stop special pattern of the first special symbol A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the instruction may be sent to the peripheral control board 4010). And after that, this process is complete | finished when the above-mentioned 1st special symbol process flag is updated so that a process may be transfered to said 1st fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82) as a process of step S126. Peripheral control MPU 4140a starts fluctuating display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols based on the received judgment result notification command and fluctuation pattern command, and stops and displays them in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol Thus, the display control of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900, from the received judgment result notification command out of the big hit related to the first special symbol If you specify a non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, determine it as a 4 R normal big hit A symbol (a combination of the same symbols except '3' and '7' among the symbols '1' to '9'), If you identify the specific 1 4R latent probability big hit, you decide on the 4R latent definite big hit symbol (common to 4R normal big hit A symbol), and if you identify the specific 2 4R critical big hit A, the 4 R critical probability big hit A symbol ( Determine the left and right decorative designs as the same design except “3” and “7” among the “1” to “9” designs, and determine the middle decorative design as a combination different from the left and right decorative designs. Specific 5 12R probability variation big hit B If specified, it is decided on 12R probability variation big hit B symbol (common to 4R normal big hit A symbol), and the decided stop symbol at the time of lapse of the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command (at the end of reach effect) The display control on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. As described above, when the symbol drawn as "Fate branch symbol" is stopped as the inner decorative symbol after formation of the reach symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is a big hit However, it is not possible to determine which of the non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, the specific 1 4 R latent probability big hit, the specific 2 4 R stupid big hit A, and the specific 5 12 R probability variation big hit B. In addition, when it becomes specific 2 4R sudden probability big hit A, because the decoration design of the left middle right becomes stop indication with the same design as the exfoliation design which becomes 2 or more types of designs, the distinction whether it is big hit or not It will be difficult.

  In this example, among the big hit related to the first special symbol from the received judgment result notification command, the non-specified 1 4R normal big hit A, the specified 1 4 R latent probability big hit, the specified 2 4 R stupid big hit A, the specified 5 In the case of specifying the 12R probability variation big hit B, after stopping the variation of the left and right decoration symbols with the same symbol, the fate selection chance presentation as a presentation using the branch sensor 2620 in which the game ball can pass in the game area 1100 Is supposed to run. In this fate selection chance effect, when the game ball passes and is detected by the branch sensor 2620 by performing so-called right strike, non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A or specific 1 4R based on the determination result notification command It is designed to derive a rendering result that indicates either a low probability big hit, a specific 2 4R high probability big hit A, or a specific 5 12 R positive variation big hit B.

  Specifically, as a presentation result of the fate selection chance presentation, specified non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A or specific 1 4R latent certain hit among jackpots related to the first special symbol from the received judgment result notification command In the case of non-specific 1 4R normal jackpot A or specific 1 4R latent jackpot is determined to be a presentation result that suggests a particular 2 4R jackpot jackpot A If you identify a specific 2 4R jackpot jackpot A If it is decided to be the rendering result to be specified, and the specified 5 12R probability variation big hit B is specified, it is decided to be the presentation result indicating the specification 5 12R probability variation big hit B. Thus, when a rendering result indicating non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A or specific 1 4 R latent probability big hit is derived as a presentation result of fate selection chance presentation, non-specific 1 4 R normal big hit A or specific 1 It is not possible to determine which is the 4R latent probability big hit of the, and it can be determined to control to the 4R big hit gaming state of long time opening using the first big winning opening 2102, but the 4R big hit gaming state It is not possible to determine whether to control to the low probability non-short state or to the high probability non-short state after completion. Then, after the termination of the 4R big hit gaming state, it is determined that it is controlled to the high probability non-short state from entering into the probability variation latent mode which is difficult to determine whether it is the high probability non-short state or not. I can not

  On the other hand, when a presentation result that suggests a specific 2R of the 2R, a certain probability hit A is derived as a presentation result of the fate selection chance presentation, control is made to the 4R big hit gaming state of a short time opening using the second big winning opening 2509, It can be determined to control to the high probability time reduction state after the end of the 4R big hit gaming state. In addition, when a presentation result that suggests a specific 5 12R probability variation big hit B is derived as a presentation result of fate selection chance presentation, it is controlled to 12R big hit gaming state of long time opening using the 2nd big winning opening 2509, It can be determined to control to the high probability time reduction state after the end of the 12R big hit gaming state. Then, after the termination of the 4R big hit gaming state or the 12R big hit gaming state, it is clearly entered that the high probability time short state is entered and the high probability time short state is controlled by entering into the high probability time short state (probability change state). It can be determined.

  In addition, peripheral control MPU 4140a, as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900, from the received judgment result notification command from among the big hit related to the first special symbol Specific 3 of When 4R probability variation big hit is specified, it is decided on 4R probability variation big hit design (combination of "3" among the symbols of "1"-"9"), and when 12 R probability variation big hit A of specification 4 is specified, 12R probability variation Big hit A symbol (combination of '1'-'9' among '7' of symbols) is decided, the decision stop when the fluctuation time which is specified from fluctuation pattern command elapses (at the end of reach production) The display control of the symbol on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. Thus, when the combination of the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 stops fluctuating, it is the specific 3 4R probability variation big hit or the identification 4 12 R probability variation big hit from the stop symbol of the decoration symbol Determine whether it is A, long time open 4R big hit gaming state using the first large winning opening 2102 or 12R big hit open state long time opening using the second large winning opening 2509 high probability time short state after the end of the gaming state It can be determined to control. Then, after the termination of the 4R big hit gaming state or the 12R big hit gaming state, it is clearly entered that the high probability time short state is entered and the high probability time short state is controlled by entering into the high probability time short state (probability change state). It can be determined.

  In addition, peripheral control MPU 4140a is not specified 2 among the big hit related to the second special symbol from the received judgment result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decoration symbol displayed on main liquid crystal display device 1900. When 4R normal big hit B of is specified, 4R normal big hit B design (the left and right decorative designs are the same design (reach design) among the designs of “1” to “9”, and the middle decorative design is “Fate branch design "A combination of decorative symbols that are drawn as". A symbol drawn as "fate branch symbol" is determined to be a symbol that can appear as a middle decorative symbol only after the reach symbol is formed. If you specify non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, it is decided to be 4R normal big hit C symbol (4R normal big hit B symbol and common) and if non specific 4 4R normal big hit D is specified, it is 4R normal big R is determined to be the D symbol (common to the 4R normal big hit B symbol), and when the specific 6 4R positive big hit B is specified, it is determined to the 4 R positive big hit B symbol (4 R normal big hit B same symbol as the symbol) When 16R probability variation big hit is specified, it is decided to 16R probability variation big hit symbol (4R normal big hit B symbol and common) and it is decided at the time of lapse of fluctuation time specified from fluctuation pattern command (at the end of reach production) Display control of the stop symbol on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. As described above, when the symbol drawn as "Fate branch symbol" is stopped as the inner decorative symbol after formation of the reach symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is a big hit Although it can be determined, non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4 R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4 R normal big hit D, specific 6 4R stupid big hit B, specific 7 16 R probability variation big hit It can not be determined either.

  Also, in this example, the big hit related to the second special symbol from the received judgment result notification command (non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4 R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4 R normal big hit D, specific In the case of specifying 6R of 4R sudden big hit B, specific 7 of 16R positive variation big hit, after stopping display of the left and right decorative symbols (reach symbols) based on the fluctuation pattern command, specific reach production (fate branch production It is designed to execute a reach effect that is a trigger for execution. Then, in the game area 1100, after the symbol drawn as "Fate branch symbol" is stopped as the inside decoration symbol at the time of elapse of the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command (at the end of reach effect) A fate branch effect is performed as an effect using a branch sensor 2620 through which game balls can pass. In this fate branch effect, if a game ball passes and is detected in the branch sensor 2620 by performing so-called right strike, whether or not it is a specified 7 16R probability variation big hit based on the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command It is designed to derive a presentation result that suggests something. As described above, when the effect result of the fate branch effect is derived, it is determined from the effect result whether or not it is the 16R probability variation big hit of the specific 7 and the long open 16R big hit game using the second large winning opening 2509 It is possible to determine whether to control to the state and to control to the high probability time reduction state after the end of the 16R big hit gaming state.

  Specifically, as a staging result of the fate branch effect, if the specified 7 16R probability variation big hit is identified among the big hit related to the second special symbol from the received judgment result notification command, the specification 7 16R probability variation big hit is suggested If it is decided to the staging result and it specifies non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non specific 3 4 R normal big hit C, non specific 4 4R normal big hit D, specific 6 4R stupid big hit B specific 7 16R probability variation It decides on the presentation result which suggests big hit other than big hit. In this way, when a presentation result that suggests a specific 7's 16R probability variation big hit is derived as a presentation result of the fate branch effect, it is controlled to a long open 16R big hit gaming state using the second big winning opening 2509, It is possible to determine to control to the high probability time short state after the end of the 16R big hit gaming state. Then, after the termination of the 16R big hit gaming state, it is possible to enter into a probability variation middle mode capable of determining that it is a high probability time reduction state (probability change state), and it can be clearly determined that the high probability time reduction state is controlled .

  On the other hand, when a staging result that suggests a big hit other than the specific 7's 16R probability variation big hit is derived as the staging result of the fate branching staging, the non-specific 2's 4R normal big hit B, the non-specific 3's 4R normal big hit C, the non-specific 4 It is not possible to determine which of the 4R normal big hit D and the specific 6 4R hit big hit B, and it is determined to control to the 4R big hit gaming state for a short time opening using the first big winning opening 2102 Although it is possible, it is not possible to determine whether to control to the low probability time-short state or to control the high probability time-short state after the end of the 4R big hit gaming state, and how long the time reduction state will be continued. In addition, after the end of the 4R big hit gaming state, it enters into the time mode in which it is possible to determine that it is a short time state, each time the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 10 times In addition, an effect of whether or not the time saving mode is continued is executed. That is, in the case of non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, when the variation display of the special symbol is executed 10 times derives the presentation result that does not continue the time saving mode, and ends the low probability time saving condition and low Transition control to probability non-time short state. In addition, when it is non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, when the fluctuation indication of the special design is executed 10 times it derives the rendition result which continues the mode in the time saving mode, but when it is executed 20 times Derivation results that do not continue in the middle mode are derived, and the low probability time-short state is ended and transition control to the low probability time-short state is performed. In addition, when it is non-specific 4 4R normal big hit D, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed 10 times, 20 times it derives the demonstration result which continues time mode during the squeezing, but it is executed 30 times When the time-span mode is not continued, a rendering result is derived, and the low-probability time-shorting state is ended and transition control to the low-probability non-time-shorting state is performed. In addition, when it is specified 6 4R sudden probability big hit B, when it is executed 30 times while deriving the effect result of continuing the time mode during the short time when the variation display of the special symbol is executed 10 times and 20 times Since the effect of transitioning from the time saving mode to the probability changing mode is derived, it can be clearly determined that the high probability time saving state is being controlled.

  In addition, as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the peripheral control MPU 4140a causes the reach with a reach when the reach is specified from the received judgment result notification command. Design (a combination of decorative designs that are not identical, but the left and right decorative designs are the same), and if you identify an outset, a outlying design with no reach (a combination of decorative designs that are not identical, but left and right) The symbol is determined to be non-identical, and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (when the game effect is ended), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900.

  FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 163, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the big hit flag. If it is (step S141), the type of jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing, and the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state is selected (step S142) If the reach flag is set (step S143), the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current gaming state is selected (step S144), and both the big hit flag and the reach flag If it is not set, that is, it will be normal release (a reach effect is not performed) To selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S145).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S146), and the determined variation pattern is to be started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 4010 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is started (step S147). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S149). As a result, effect control is performed in the first special symbol display 1185, the main liquid crystal display device 1900, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 for the determined fluctuation time.

  The variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, in the fluctuation patterns set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for fluctuation display control of the above special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is It is stored in a form associated with each of the variable random numbers. Thus, main control MPU 4100a selects a variation pattern table selected from among a plurality of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number and the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing Are compared, and fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is acquired from this table to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in the present example, it is set so as to determine the type type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be performed with the change random number. . For example, among the reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher expectation for a big hit than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased.

  In addition, when the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, the first special symbol process flag described above is transferred to the first special symbol variation processing (step S83) as the processing of step S149 next. When updated, this processing ends.

  In this example, in the variation pattern table at the time of disconnection, the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second at the time of short is associated with the above special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol). When the time is short, the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the variation pattern of the special symbol is set. That is, as compared with the variation pattern at the time of non-short time, the variation pattern at the time of short time selected as the time-short can be extremely short in time required for the variable display control of the special symbol. The fluctuation time information of the symbol is set.

  FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 164, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S171. As a process of (1), the fluctuation timer for which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the fluctuation pattern is set is decremented by one. Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the above-mentioned lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the above-mentioned first special symbol stop processing (step S84) in the processing of step S173, this processing is ended.

  FIG. 165 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 165, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S181. The display control for displaying the stop symbol determined by the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1185 is performed as the processing of the first special symbol stop symbol, and the first special symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of the symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 4010 (step S182).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the counter value of the time counter is "0" while the time reduction flag is set and the number of continuation times of the time reduction state is set. (Step S183). Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time counter (step S184), it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short counter is "0" (step S185). . As a result, if the same counter value is "0", the above-mentioned time saving flag is reset (step S186). If it is determined that the counter value of the time reduction counter is "0" in the process of step S183, or if it is determined that the time reduction counter is not "0" in the process of step S185. At that time, the process proceeds to step S187.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned big hit flag is set (step S187), among the big hits which relate to the 1st special symbol, the big hit which becomes the execution opportunity of the fate selection chance presentation (non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, specification 1 It is determined whether or not it is the 4R latent probability big hit, the specific 2 4R positive definite big hit A, and the specific 5 12R positive variation big hit B) (step S188). And if it is not a big hit that will be the execution opportunity of the fate choice chance presentation (if it is a specific 3 4R probability variation big hit or a specific 4 12 R probability variation big hit A), set the jackpot start command to start the jackpot gaming state (Step S189) The standby time (period for displaying the jackpot gaming state to be displayed, etc.) until the jackpot gaming state is started (the jackpot round start command is set) is set in the interval timer (step S190). Then, next, when the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and when the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction flag is reset, and the counter value of the time reduction counter If the value is not "0", the same counter value is reset (returned to "0"), and then a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S191), and the first special symbol is set. When the process flag is updated to be process transition to the first special symbol normal processing which is an initial value (step S192), this processing is ended. When it is determined that the big hit flag is not set in the process of step 187, the process proceeds to step S192 at that time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S188 that a big hit is an opportunity to execute the fate selection chance effect, if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and the short time flag Is reset, and if the counter value of the time counter is not "0", the counter value is reset (returned to "0"), and then the branch sensor 2620 is used. A branch sensor valid flag indicating that a branch sensor valid state for validating the detection of gaming balls is set is set (step S193), and the process proceeds to step S192. As described above, when it is determined that the jackpot is an opportunity to execute the fate selection chance effect, the branch sensor effective flag is set, and it is determined that the branch sensor effective flag is set in step S35 of the special symbol process processing. And the branch sensor passage process (step S40) is performed.

  In addition, in step S188 of the first special symbol stop processing, among the big hits related to the first special symbol, the big hit that becomes the execution opportunity of the fate selection chance presentation (non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, specific 1 4R latent probability Although it is determined whether it is a big hit, specific 2 4R sudden big hit A, specific 5 12 R positive variation big hit B), in the second special symbol stop processing not shown, it is fate among the big hit related to the second special symbol Big hit (non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4 R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4 R normal big hit D, specific 6 4R stupid big hit B, specific 7 16R definite variation big hit which becomes execution opportunity of the branch production It is determined whether or not And when it is judged that it is a big hit that becomes the execution opportunity of the fate branch effect, as in the case where it is judged as the big hit that becomes the execution event for the fate selection chance effect, the branch sensor valid flag is set and the special symbol process processing At step S35, it is determined that the branch sensor effective flag is set, and the branch sensor passage process (step S40) is performed.

  The big hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010, and the type of big hit (4R normal big hit A, 4R normal big hit B, 4R normal big hit C, 4R normal big hit D, 4R latent big hit, 4R Big hit A, 4R probability variation big hit, 12R probability variation big hit A, 12R probability variation big hit B, 4R probability big hit B, 16R probability variation big hit) are prepared individually. In step S189, a big hit start command (4R normal big hit A start command, 4R normal big hit B start command, 4R normal big hit C start command, 4R normal big hit D start command, 4R latent positive big hit start command, 4R Sudden large hit A start command, 4R positive variation big hit start command, 12R positive variation big hit A start command, 12R positive variation big hit B start command, 4R sudden positive hit B start command, 16R positive variation big hit start command). As a result, effects according to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command are executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, the lamp / LED, and the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like.

  In the above step S190, the standby time until the big hit gaming state starts is set in the interval timer, but when the standby time set in this interval timer has passed, the big hit control process (not shown) (step S41) Control the first large winning opening 2102 or the second large winning opening 2509 in an open state according to the type of the big hit, and the type and current number of rounds of the big hit as a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 Set the corresponding big hit round start command. In addition, a predetermined time (for example, 28.5 seconds when opening for a long time, 0.5 seconds when opening for a short time) has elapsed from the open state of the first large winning opening 2102 or the second large winning opening 2509 When the game ball wins nine or the first large winning opening 2102 or the second large winning opening 2509 when the game ball is open, or in the big hit control process (step S41) not shown, the first large of the open state While controlling the winning opening 2102 or the second large winning opening 2509 in a closed state, set the big hit round end command according to the type of big hit and the current number of rounds as a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010, all As long as the number of rounds is not ended, the waiting time until the start of the next round is reset to the interval timer. Thus, the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, the lamp / LED, and the speakers 130, 222, effects according to the type of the big hit and the current number of rounds instructed by the big hit round start command and the big hit round end command. 262 and so on.

  FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout effect execution process (step S194).

  If it is determined in step S210 that the payout effect in-progress flag is not set, as shown in FIG. 179, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs the process of step S211. First, it is determined whether or not it is at the end of the jackpot gaming state. Specifically, in the jackpot control process (step S41), the jackpot gaming state is executed triggered by having become either a jackpot associated with the first special symbol or a jackpot associated with the second special symbol, and at the end of that It is determined whether or not

  Next, when it is determined that the end of the big hit gaming state is determined as the process of step S211, the payout execution flag is set and the payout effect in-progress flag is set as the process of step S212, and then the payout effect is generated. Is started (step S213), and the effect time of the payout effect is set in the effect timer (step S213). As described above, when it is determined that the big hit gaming state is over, the payout execution flag is set in step S212, and it is determined that the payout execution flag is set in step S307 of the prize ball processing described later. In step S308 of the prize ball processing, a prize ball corresponding to the prize ball number counter is paid out to the player. Also, if it is determined that the big hit gaming state is over, it is notified that the winning balls according to the winning ball number counter will be paid out to the player following the effect according to the big hitting gaming state Although the payout effect is being executed, the payout effect in-progress flag is set in step S212, and the effect time of the payout effect is set in the effect timer in step S214, whereby step S210 and step S36 of the special symbol process processing are performed. It is determined that the payout effect in-progress flag is set, and the payout effect is executed until the effect timer reaches "0" in step S215 described later. If it is determined in the process of step 211 that the big hit gaming state is not the end time, the big hit gaming state is being executed, and it is not the timing when the winning balls according to the winning ball number counter are paid out to the player Because it is determined that the process ends at that point.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S210 that the payout effect in-progress flag is set, it is determined whether the effect timer is "0" as the process of step S215. Then, if the effect timer is "0", it is determined that it is the timing to end the execution of the payout effect, and the processing is finished in step S216 when the payout effect in-progress flag is reset. If it is determined in the process of step S215 that the effect timer is not "0", the process ends at that point.

  FIG. 180 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the prize ball processing (step S19).

  Now, in the process of step S301, the detection signal of any of the first starting opening sensor 3422 and the second starting opening sensor 2593 is in the ON state, and the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b. If it is determined that the game ball has won any of them, as shown in FIG. 180, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs the first starting opening sensor 3422, as a process of step S302. The winning balls corresponding to the detection signal of the second starting opening sensor 2593 are added to the count value of the winning ball number counter. Specifically, when the detection signal of the first starting opening sensor 3422 is turned on, "3" is added to the count value of the winning ball number counter, and the detection signal of the second starting opening sensor 2593 is turned on. Then, "1" is added to the count value of the winning number counter. That is, even if the game ball is won in any of the first start opening 2201 and the second start opening 2587b, it is not added immediately to the award ball only by adding it to the count value of the award ball number counter. ing. In the process of step S301, the detection signals of the first starting opening sensor 3422 and the second starting opening sensor 2593 are not in the on state, but the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b. If it is determined that the game balls have not been won in any case, the process proceeds to step S303 at that time.

  Next, the main control MPU 4110a of the main control board 4100 determines whether the detection signal of the general winning opening sensor 3421 is in the on state, that is, whether the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening 2301 as the processing of step S303. Decide whether or not. When it is determined that the detection signal of the general winning opening sensor 3421 is in the on state, a payout control command is sent to the payout control board 4110 so that a prize ball corresponding to the detection signal is paid out to the player. It outputs (step S304). As a result, the payout control MPU 4111a mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744 to pay out the prize balls to the player. Specifically, ten game balls are paid out to the upper tray 301 when the detection signal of the general winning opening sensor 3421 is turned on. If it is determined in the process of step S303 that the detection signal of the general winning opening sensor 3421 is not in the on state, and it is determined that the gaming ball has not won in the general winning opening 2301, then step S305. Transfer to processing of

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether the detection signal of either the first count sensor 2111 or the second count sensor 2578 is in the ON state as the process of step S305, that is, It is determined whether the gaming ball has won in any of the one large winning opening 2102 and the second large winning opening 2509. When it is determined that the detection signal of any of the first count sensor 2111 and the second count sensor 2578 is in the on state, a prize ball corresponding to the detection signals is paid out to the player A payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 (step S306). As a result, the payout control MPU 4111a mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744 to pay out the prize balls to the player. Specifically, when any one of the detection signals of the first count sensor 2111 and the second count sensor 2578 is turned on, 15 gaming balls are paid out to the upper tray 301. In the process of step S303, neither of the detection signals of the first count sensor 2111 and the second count sensor 2578 is in the on state, but any of the first large winning opening 2102 and the second large winning opening 2509. If it is determined that the gaming ball has not won any prize, the process proceeds to step S307 at that time.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the payout execution flag is set as the process of step S307. Then, if it is determined that the payout execution flag is set, it is determined that the big hit gaming state is executed with the big hit as a trigger, so the winning balls corresponding to the winning ball number counter are played A payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 so as to be paid out to the user (step S308), and when the payout execution flag is reset (step S309), this processing is ended. As a result, the payout control MPU 4111a mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744 to pay out the prize balls to the player. If it is determined in the process of step S307 that the payout execution flag is not set, it is determined that it is not the timing after the execution of the big hit gaming state, and the process ends at that point.

  FIG. 166 is a flowchart of the branch sensor passage process (step S40).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S201 that the detection signal by the branch sensor 2620 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball has passed to the branch sensor 2620, as shown in FIG. 166, The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is to be started as the processing of step S202, and until the big hit gaming state is started (big hit round start command is set) A standby time (a period for displaying a message to start the big hit gaming state or the like) is set in the interval timer (step S203). When the big hit in progress flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set after resetting the branch sensor valid flag (step S204), this processing is ended. Thus, when it is determined that the game ball has passed to the branch sensor 2620, the big hit running flag is set, and the big hit running flag is set in step S37 of the special symbol process processing. It comes to be judged and big hit control processing (step S41) comes to be performed.

  In this example, among the big hit related to the first special symbol, the big hit that becomes the execution opportunity of the fate selection chance presentation (non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, specific 1 4R latent probability big hit, specific 2 4R stupid big hit A The game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620 even after the stop symbol of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 when it is determined that the special special 12 R probability variation big hit B). Until the big hit execution flag is not set, the big hit control process (step S41) is not executed. Similarly, among jackpots related to the second special symbol, the jackpot that becomes the execution opportunity of the fate branch direction production (non-specific 2 4R normal jackpot B, non-specific 3 4R normal jackpot C, non-specific 4 4R normal jackpot D , If it is determined that the special 6 4R sudden probability big hit B, the specific 7 16 R probability variation big hit), even after displaying the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186, the above branch The big hit execution flag is not set in the sensor 2620 until the game ball passes, and the big hit control process (step S41) is not executed.

  FIG. 167 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol process (step S15).

  Now, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2586 is in the on state in the process of step S801 and it is determined that the game ball has passed to the gate unit 2585a, as shown in FIG. 167, the main The main control MPU 4100a of the control board 4100 first executes gate part passing processing such as acquiring an ordinary random number of an ordinary symbol from the random number counter and storing it in an ordinary symbol hold storage area of RAM as the processing of step S802. Do.

  Then, in the normal symbol process processing, one of the following five process operations is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. The normal symbol normal processing in which the normal random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is read out, and the lottery processing for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol is performed based on the read normal random number (step S803)
2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination processing in which lottery processing or the like for the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the above-mentioned normal symbol display 1189 is performed based on the common pattern fluctuation random number (step S804)
3. Normal symbol variation processing to stand by until the variation display of the above normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 is stopped (step S805)
4. The pattern at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol is displayed on the above-mentioned normal symbol display 1189 Normal symbol stop processing to stop the key (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process about the mode at the time of fluctuation control stop of the normal symbol becomes the mode which suggests “per common figure”, the above-mentioned door member 2589 rotates and acceptance of the game ball to the 2nd starting opening 2587b Motor combination release processing (step S 807) that executes processing to control

  The normal symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that the normal symbol normal processing (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 described above (see FIG. 154).

  FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate part passing process (step S802).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2586 is in the on state, and it is determined that the game ball has passed to the gate portion 2585a, as shown in FIG. 168, The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the counter value by the above-mentioned normal hold number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S811. And based on this counter value, it is judged whether the number of holdings of a normal symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  If it is determined in the process of step S811 that the number of reserved normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed in order to newly put the variable symbol display control of the normal symbols on hold status. It will process. That is, first, as the process of the step S812, the normal number-of-holds counter is incremented (one added). Next, as the process of step S813, the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned common-mode fluctuation random number are acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter. Then, next, in the process of step S814, each random number obtained in this way is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter among the storage areas of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S811 that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processing of step S812 to step S814, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing (step S803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 169, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs the processing in step S821. Based on the counter value by the normal holding number counter, it is determined whether or not there is fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the holding state. As a result, when it is determined that there is fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the state of suspension, next, as the processing of step S822, the ordinary symbol stored in the ordinary symbol storage area of the main control MPU 4100a The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (for example, ordinary random number, common drawing random number) related to the display mode of the symbol is read out from the same RAM. Then, next, as the processing of steps S 823 and S 824, the normal hold number counter is counted down, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100 a is stopped The shift operation is performed in a first-in first-out mode for random numbers (normal random numbers, common drawing random numbers) related to the display mode in.

  Specifically, the normal symbol storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate 2585a are sequentially ordered from the first (first) area Remember. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2585a, the extracted random number is on the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area When the variable display start condition stored based on the random number stored and stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). .

  Next, if the current gaming state is the short time state (low probability time short state, high probability time short state) (step S826), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the spread table per time judgment table (not shown) ) Is selected (step S826), and if the current gaming state is the non-short state (low probability non-short state, high probability non-short state) (step S825), the non-short time per common drawing determination table (not shown) Is selected (step S827), and the selected common drawing determination table is compared with the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing (step S828).

  In addition, the determination table for the common drawing is stored in the ROM 4100 d of the main control MPU 4100 a, and the determination table for the common drawing in the short time to be used when the gaming state is short (low probability time short status and high probability time short status), It has a non-time-shorting popular map determination table used when the gaming state is non-time-short (a low probability non-short condition, a high probability non-short condition). Then, in the common time-per-diagram determination table referred to for comparison with the normal random number, the 251 common random numbers correspond to the common-per-diagram determination value indicating that all the common random numbers were selected per common diagram, The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to be matched with the deviation judgment value which is a deviation. As described above, when the game ball passes to the gate unit 2585a in the time saving mode, the player always wins the game, and the door member 2589 rotates to move the game ball to the second starting opening 2587b. It controls the acceptance possible.

  In addition, in the non-short time common drawing determination table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, it is possible that all 251 kinds of the normal random numbers coincide with the common drawing determination value indicating that the common drawing is won. Instead, the above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to coincide with the deviation judgment value. As described above, in the short time, even if the game ball passes to the gate portion 2585a, the door member 2589 is pivoted and the second starting opening 2587b because it is not won for the spread figure. There is no possibility to control the reception of gaming balls to.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the selected common drawing is the common drawing as a result of comparison between the selected common drawing determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S829). ), After setting the flag per common drawing showing that the fluctuation is won per common drawing (step S 830), per common drawing as a mode (stop symbol of normal design) at the time of change control stop of the normal symbol The symbol is determined (step S831). On the other hand, as a result of comparison between the selected common drawing determination table and the ordinary random number read out in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing, the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol when it is determined to be out of place. A common figure as a mode (stop symbol of a normal symbol) at the time of control stop determines a misaligned symbol (step S832). After that, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation time determination processing (step S804), this processing is ended.

  In this example, in the control of the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 251/251, and the lottery result of the normal symbol always becomes a hit, and the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is extreme. Is shortened to a predetermined short time (for example, 0.3 seconds). And when the lottery result of the above-mentioned normal design becomes a hit, it controls with the opening and closing pattern which closes the above-mentioned 2nd starting opening 2587b as an open state for a very long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds) . That is, during the control of the time saving state, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be hit is extremely high, and the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is constant and short. The game ball is much easier to win in the second starting opening 2587b due to the long time, etc., and it is more efficient to aim the second starting opening 2587b than the first starting opening 2201 more efficiently. You can win a prize. In the control of the non-short time state, the winning probability of the above normal symbol is set to 0/251, and the lottery result of the above normal symbol does not always hit, and the second starting opening 2587b is aimed at Also, the game ball can not be won in the second starting opening 2587b.

  As described above, during the control of the non-short time state, the game ball can not be won in the second start opening 2587b even when aiming at the second start opening 2587b. In order to win the game ball, it is necessary to aim at the left side of the center character 2500 and fire the game ball (so-called "left-hand"). Further, in the game area 1100 on the left side of the center character 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in the front of the game panel 1200 with a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball is used for the obstacle nails. By touching, various movements are given to the game ball and it flows down. For this reason, even if the game ball is hit on the left side of the center role 2500 aiming at the first start opening 2201, the first start opening 2201 is not necessarily winning, but the first start opening 2201 is winning The game balls that were not present are discharged to the outside from an out port 1151 provided at the lower end in the left-right direction center of the game area 1100.

  On the other hand, during control of the time saving state, it is more efficient to aim the game ball at the second start port 2587b than at the first start port 2201, so the game ball can be played at the second start port 2587b. In order for the player to win a prize, he must aim at the right side of the center character 2500 and fire the game ball (so-called "right-handed"). In addition, when the second start opening 2587b is opened due to the structure of the game board 4, if the game ball is hit to the right of the center role 2500 aiming at the second start opening 2587b, it passes through the gate portion 2585a. The game ball that has been played is to be won in the second starting opening 2587b with a very high probability. For this reason, during control of the time saving state, the game ball struck on the right side of the center combination 2500 is hardly wasted (discharged to the outside from the out port 1151), and during control of the non-time saving state. As compared with the first starting opening 2201 in the above, the game ball comes to win the second starting opening 2587b extremely efficiently.

  Further, during the control of the time saving state, in addition to the structure of the game board 4, when passing through the gate portion 2585a, the probability of the lottery result of the normal symbol being hit is extremely high, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol It is easy for the game ball to win the second start opening 2587b due to the time required for control being constant and short and the open state of the second start opening 2587b being long, etc. Furthermore, the game is performed to the second start opening 2587b When the ball wins, the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is about 1 second, which is extremely short compared to the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the control of the non-short time state, so the special It is possible to digest the fluctuation display control of the symbol (the suspension of the fluctuation display control of the above special symbol). In other words, if the time reduction state is controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state, hitting the game ball on the right side of the center role 2500 aiming at the second start port 2587b will result in a big hit again in a short time It can be controlled to the jackpot gaming state, it can be expected to obtain many gaming balls. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the number of gaming balls paid out by the winning of the gaming balls to the second starting opening 2587b is one, the number of gaming balls to the second starting opening 2587b is Even if a prize occurs frequently, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side while enhancing the interest of the player.

[7. Control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, a process performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140 a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing a process procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 170, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU 4140 a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 is performed. Note that interrupts are disabled during this initialization process, and interrupts are enabled after the initialization process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process of monitoring whether the 16 ms elapsed flag T has been set or not is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes 2 ms steady processing. In the 2 ms steady process, a process to count up the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter (1 ms added to the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, 16 ms elapsed. While the flag T is set, processing for resetting (setting to 0) the 16 ms lapse monitoring counter is executed. Thus, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in 2 ms steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process of controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control substrate 4100. When the 16 ms steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "0"), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 171 is a flow chart showing an example of the 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process, the process corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second variation pattern setting process)) Fluctuation pattern command transmitted by being set, transmitted by being set by the start port passing process (steps S45 and S47 of the first start port passing process and steps S55 and S57 of the second start port passing process) Control processing relating to the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 is executed based on the reception of the hold number specification command and the random number specification command.

  Further, in the sound control process of step S603, control processes related to the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. are executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, control processes related to the lamp and LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 are performed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving board 3013 is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers (for example, pre-read random numbers) used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  The process of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 ms steady process ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process starts immediately after the 16 ms elapses from the start of the 16 ms steady process (the command in step S601 Do not execute (from analysis processing). That is, when 16 ms has elapsed during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapsed flag is set, and after it is determined that the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 after the 16 ms steady process is completed, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is performed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of loop processing in the sub main processing and 16 ms stationary processing.

[8. Fate branch directing using a special gate section]
In the present embodiment, the jackpot related to the second special symbol triggered by the game ball winning in the second starting opening 2587b (non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4R Normal Big Hit D, Specific 6 4R Probable Big Hit B, Specific 7 16R Probability Big Hit), the fate branch as an effect using the bifurcation sensor 2620 in which the game ball can pass in the game area 1100 It is supposed to carry out the production. In this fate branch effect, when the game ball passes and is detected by the branch sensor 2620 by performing so-called right strike, control of the big hit gaming state according to the type of big hit is started, and the main liquid crystal display device 1900 It is possible to determine whether it is a jackpot having a high profit value for the player or a jackpot having a low profit value for the player. . Specifically, when a presentation result corresponding to a specific 7 16R probability variation big hit is derived as a jackpot with high profit value, it is controlled to a long open 16 R big hit gaming state using the second big winning opening 2509, It is determined to continue the high probability time short state (due to the probability mode corresponding to the high probability time short state) after the termination of the 16R big hit gaming state, as a jackpot with low profit value as a big hit other than the specific 7 16R probability big hit When the corresponding rendering result is derived, control is made to the 4R big hit gaming state of short time opening using the first big winning opening 2102, and also the high probability time short state to the low probability time short state (low Transition to the time mode as a production mode corresponding to the probability time reduction state (However, in the case of the specific 6 4R sudden probability big hit B internally high probability time reduction state It can be determined that the shift to continue).

  The fate branching effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 to 176. FIG. 172 is a timing chart in the case of executing a fate branch rendition based on the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit among the big hits related to the second special symbol. Figure 173 is a big hit other than the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit among the big hits related to the second special symbol (non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4 R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4 R normal big hit It is a timing chart in, when performing a fortune branch rendition based on D and specific 6 4R sudden probability big hit B). FIGS. 174 to 176 show specific effect images on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 when the fate branch effect is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 172 and FIG. 173, when it becomes a big hit related to the second special symbol triggered by winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2587b, first, the non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, It is displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 based on either non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4 R normal big hit D, specific 6 4R critical big hit B, specific 7 16R positive variation big hit The second special symbol is controlled to be in a variable display state where variable display is performed.

  Specifically, when the main control MPU 4100a becomes the 16R probability variation big hit of the specific 7 among the big hits related to the second special symbol, the variation time of the second special symbol (effect displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900) Of the plural types of fluctuation patterns in which the effect content (for example, the type of reach effect) displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is set, the fluctuation pattern which can be determined only at the specific 7 . Then, in the second special symbol display 1186, the variation display of the second special symbol is started, and it is determined as the stop symbol of the second special symbol when the variation time set in the variation pattern at the time of 16R probability variation big hit has elapsed Stop displaying the 16R probability variation big hit design. On the other hand, among the big hits related to the second special symbol Big hits other than the specified 7 16R probability variation big hits (non-specified 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4 R normal big hit D, specified In the case of the 6R 4R sudden big hit B), the variation pattern in which the variation pattern of the 2nd special symbol and the effect contents displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 are the same as the variation pattern at the 16R positive variation big hit As a, the variation pattern which can be determined only at the time of big hit other than 16 R probability variation big hit is determined. And in the second special symbol display 1186, start the variation display of the second special symbol, as the stop symbol of the second special symbol when the variation time set in the variation pattern at the time of big hit other than the 16R probability variation big hit is over Stop display of the determined big hit symbol (4R normal big hit B big hit symbol, 4R normal big hit C big hit symbol, 4R normal big hit D big hit symbol, 4R rough certain big hit B big hit symbol). In addition, when starting variable display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 1186, the peripheral control board with the determined type of the big hit as the determination result notification command and the determined fluctuation pattern as the fluctuation pattern command When transmitting to 4010 and displaying the stop symbol of the second special symbol, a stop display command is sent to the peripheral control board 4010.

  On the other hand, in any of the cases where the peripheral control MPU 4140a identifies the big hit related to the second special symbol from the received determination result notification command, the variation display of the decoration symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the received variation pattern command. After the display of the left and right decorative symbols (reach symbols) is stopped and displayed, a specific reach effect (a reach effect that is a trigger for executing a fate branching effect) is executed. In addition, in the specific reach production, it is performed to be forced to choose the fate whether or not a good rendering result can be obtained, but when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has passed (specific At the end of the reach effect), based on the received stop display command, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the symbol drawn as "Fate branch symbol" as the inside decorative symbol after formation of the reach symbol so as to change and stop Control. That is, at the time of lapse of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (at the end of a specific reach effect), in the second special symbol display 1186, the stop display of the big hit symbol determined as the stop symbol of the second special symbol is displayed. While the main liquid crystal display device 1900 clearly indicates which of the big hit related to the second special symbol, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 has the same left and right decorative symbols as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol ( Although it is notified that it is a big hit related to the second special symbol by stopping and displaying the combination of the decorative symbol which is a reach symbol) and the inside decorative symbol is a symbol drawn as "fate branch symbol" It does not notify which of the jackpots related to the two special symbols. In the display of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the main liquid crystal display device 1900, although it is notified that it is a big hit related to the second special symbol, it is small on the screen so that it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish. It does not notify clearly to that effect by displaying.

  Then, after the control of the variation display state described above is ended, that is, after the big hit symbol determined as the stop symbol of the second special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 1186, the detection of the gaming ball by the branch sensor 2620 The branch sensor is to be controlled to be in the valid state.

  Specifically, after the main control MPU 4100a displays the big hit symbol determined as the stop symbol of the second special symbol, does the game ball pass through the branch sensor 2620 until the branch sensor 2620 detects the game ball? Monitor whether or not. Then, when the game ball is detected passing through the branch sensor 2620 by performing so-called right hitting in the branch sensor effective state, the control of the branch sensor effective state is ended, and the big hit start command (according to the type of big hit The 4R normal big hit B start command, 4R normal big hit C start command, 4R normal big hit D start command, 4R random confirmation big hit B start command, 16R positive variation big hit start command) are transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the stop display command after finishing the specific reach effect, the fate of whether or not the main liquid crystal display device 1900 can obtain a favorable effect result subsequently to the specific reach effect. As if the user were to make a selection, a fate branch effect to instruct the branch sensor 2620 to pass the game ball is executed. That is, in the fate branch effect, the player is notified that the branch sensor unit 2109 has to pass the game ball by performing a so-called right strike.

  Then, after ending the control of the above-mentioned branch sensor effective state, that is, after the game ball passes and is detected by the branch sensor 2620, it is related to the second special symbol as a big hit gaming state according to the type of big hit If it becomes 16R probability variation big hit of specific 7 among the big hit, it controls to 16R big hit game state of long time opening which uses 2nd big winning a prize mouth 2509, the big hit other than specified 7 16R probability variation big hit (non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4R normal big hit D, specific 6 4R sudden big hit B) in the case of a short time opening using the first large winning opening 2102 It is designed to control the 4R jackpot gaming state.

  Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a is specified 7 in the case where it becomes a specific 7 16R probability variation big hit among the big wins related to the second special symbol after the game ball passes and is detected by the branch sensor 2620. As a big hit gaming state according to the 16R probability variation big hit, after the second big winning opening 2509 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine gaming balls are won in the second big winning opening 2509 second By repeating the open / close pattern to be closed when detected by the count sensor 2578 16 times (16 rounds), the game ball can enter the second large winning opening 2509 so that it can be entered into the 16R big hit gaming state (easy). On the other hand, when it becomes a big hit other than the specific 7R 16R probability variation big hit among the big hit related to the second special symbol, the 1st winning opening as a big hit gaming state according to the big hit other than the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit The game ball controls the first big winning opening 2102 to a difficult 4R big hit gaming state by repeating the open / close pattern to be closed after opening the short time for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) four times. In addition, when controlling the first big winning a prize opening 2102 or the 2nd big winning a prize opening 2509 as a big hit game state, sending a big hit round start command according to the kind of big hit and the current round number to the peripheral control board 4010 sequentially When controlling the first large winning opening 2102 or the second large winning opening 2509 in a closed state, a big hit round end command according to the type of big hit and the current number of rounds is sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 172, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the 16R definite variation big hit start command during the execution of the fate branching effect when it becomes the 16R positive variation big hit of the specific 7 among the big hit related to the second special symbol. When it is determined, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 executes the result notification effect as if the good effect result is obtained by the selection of the fate based on the passage of the game ball to the branch sensor 2620 as the effect result of the fate branch effect. As described above, by executing the notice notification effect according to the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit on the main liquid crystal display device 1900, it is clear at the end of the specific reach effect (when the second special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed). In addition to clearly notifying that it is a big hit related to the second special symbol that was not notified, it has notified that it is a specific 7 16R probability variation big hit among jackpots related to the second special symbol. In addition, during execution of the notice notification effect according to the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit, the big hit round start command and the big hit round end command are received sequentially, but the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is 16R positive variation big hit and current round The effect according to the number is not executed, and the notification is not given so that the current number of rounds in the 16R big hit gaming state can be determined. And at the end of the notification effect according to the 16R probability variation big hit of the specific 7, until the third to fourth round (in the case of continuing to hit the so-called right) in the 16R big hit gaming state is finished, but the 16R of the specific 7 After ending the notification notification effect according to the probability variation big hit, until the termination of the control of the 16R probability variation big hit gaming state, based on the received big hit round start command and the big hit round end command, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 to 16R probability variation big hit And the big hit game production according to the present number of rounds is executed, it has notified that it can distinguish the present number of rounds in the 16R big hit gaming state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 173, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is a big hit other than the specified 7's 16R probability variation big hit among the big hits related to the second special symbol (non-specified 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, in the case of 4 non-specific 4R normal big hit D, specific 6 4R special probability big hit B), when the big hit start command according to the type of big hit is received during the execution of the fate branch production, As the presentation result, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 executes the result notification presentation as if the good presentation result was not obtained by the selection of the fate based on the passage of the gaming ball to the branch sensor 2620. As described above, even when the main liquid crystal display device 1900 executes the notification effect according to the big hit other than the specific 7R 16R probability variation big hit, the end time of the specific reach effect (when the change time of the second special symbol elapses) ) As well as clearly not notifying that it is a big hit related to the second special symbol, and it does not notify which big hit other than the specific 7's 16R probability variation big hit, it is out as if it is a big hit It is notified as if it is. In addition, during execution of the result notification effect according to the big hit other than the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit, the big hit round start command and the big hit round end command are received sequentially, but the main liquid crystal display device 1900 The effect according to the current number of rounds is not executed, and the notification is not given so that the current number of rounds in the 4R jackpot gaming state can be determined. In addition, by the end of notification notification effect according to the big hit other than the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit, all round numbers in the 4R big hit gaming state open for a short time has ended, the specific 7 16 R probability variation big hit It is trying not to execute such a big hit game rendition.

  In this embodiment, the second special symbol display 1186 is used as the second special symbol display as a variable display state when it becomes a big hit related to the second special symbol triggered by winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2587b. After the big hit symbol determined as the stop symbol is stopped and displayed, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 instructs the branch sensor 2620 to pass the gaming ball in the branch sensor effective state, and the so-called right strike is performed to branch sensor 2620 When a game ball passes and is detected, it controls to the big hit game state according to the kind of big hit. That is, even if the second special symbol display 1186 stops and displays the big hit symbol determined as the stop symbol of the second special symbol, it is a big hit unless the branch sensor 2620 passes the gaming ball by performing a right-handed strike. There is no control to the jackpot gaming state according to the type. As described above, when the fattening branch effect is performed by controlling the branching sensor to the valid state, the player must follow the instructions on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. However, when the branch sensor 2620 passes the gaming ball, the jackpot always The jackpot gaming state is controlled according to the type of the character, and the player's willingness to participate in the fortune branching effect is not diminished.

  Also, in the case of a normal big hit (a big hit that does not become an execution opportunity for fate branching direction or fate selection chance production. For example, a big hit that does not become an execution opportunity for fate choice chance production among big hits related to the first special symbol), A big hit game state according to the type of big hit without controlling the branch sensor active state after stopping the big hit symbol determined as the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 as a variable display state It is supposed to control. That is, in the case of a big hit related to the second special symbol (a big hit serving as an opportunity to execute a fate branching effect) as compared with the case of such a normal big hit, the branch sensor effective state is the type of big hit. It can be said that it is a standby state for controlling to the big hit game state according to. As described above, in the standby state (branch sensor enabled state) for controlling to the big hit gaming state according to the type of the big hit, when the branch sensor 2620 passes the game ball, it is immediately controlled to the big hit gaming state The player can start control of the jackpot gaming state at any timing. Therefore, for example, it is not possible to recognize at which timing the control of the jackpot gaming state is started, and a loss of the player that the game ball aiming at the second large winning opening 2509 becomes a dead ball is generated. It can be difficult to do.

  In the present embodiment, when the game ball is hit to the right of the center character 2500 (is hit with a predetermined strength or more), the right route 1100R is rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100. After the game ball is sent to the branch passage 2510k, it enters the branch sensor 2620 with a very high probability. That is, during the execution of the fate branch effect (during the control of the branch sensor effective state), the game ball can be made to enter the branch sensor 2620 with extremely high probability only by performing a so-called right hit (however, right hit Even if most game balls enter the branch sensor 2620 when done, all game balls may enter the branch sensor 2620). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to lose a loss that the game ball aiming at the branch sensor 2620 becomes a dead ball during execution of the fate branch effect (during control of the branch sensor effective state).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the second big winning opening 2509 is controlled to the open state as a big hit gaming state, the game ball is hit to the right side of the center role 2500 (it is hit with a predetermined strength or more) And the gaming ball having passed through the branch sensor 2620 enters the attack passage 2509 a and is discharged above the second big winning opening 2509. In the game area 1100 on the right side (right route side 1100R) of the center character 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails are not provided as in the game area 1100 on the left side, and the rolling direction of the game ball changes. Nor. For this reason, during control of the big hit gaming state, it is possible to make the second big winning opening 2509 win the gaming ball with an extremely high probability only by performing a so-called right hit. Therefore, during the control of the big hit gaming state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to lose losses such as the game ball aiming at the second big winning opening 2509 becoming a wasted ball, and the big hit gaming state being digested Time can be made faster.

  Further, as described in step S202 of the branch sensor passing process, the main control MPU 4100a starts the big hit gaming state when it is determined that the game ball has passed to the branch sensor 2620 during execution of the fate branch effect. The standby time until the big hit round start command is set to indicate that the second big winning opening 2509 is actually controlled to the open state is set in the interval timer after the big hit start command indicating that is set. An extremely short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set to the interval timer. That is, when the game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620 during execution of the fate branch effect, the second big winning opening 2509 is controlled to be in the open state as a big hit game state after a very short time has elapsed. Also, the time set in the interval timer is set to be shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620 to when it reaches the second large winning opening 2509 by performing so-called right strike There is. Therefore, when the gaming ball that has passed the branch sensor 2620 by performing so-called right hitting reaches the second large winning opening 2509, it has already controlled the second large winning opening 2509 to the open state, and the branch sensor 2620 The game ball which has passed through is to be won in the second big winning opening 2509 as it is. Therefore, the game ball passing the branch sensor 2620 does not become a waste ball during execution of the fate branch effect (during control of the branch sensor effective state), and it is possible to make the player's loss as unlikely as possible.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the fluctuation display state, it is determined whether or not to be the specific 7 16R probability variation jackpot among the big hit related to the second special symbol, In the fluctuation display state, while performing specific reach production as common reach production, at the time of the lapse of fluctuation time of the 2nd special symbol (at the end of specified reach production) the decoration design common as stop design of decoration design ( It is controlled to display the combination of the left and right decorative symbols as the same symbol (reach symbol) and the middle decorative symbol as the symbol drawn as "fate branch symbol"), and the big hit related to the second special symbol We did not notify which of the big hit it was. Then, only when the game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620 in the branch sensor effective state, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 executes the result notification effect as the effect result of the fate branch effect, and it is the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit I have notified you whether or not. Therefore, as to whether or not to make a particular 7 16R probability variation big hit among the big hit related to the second special symbol, before the game ball passes to the branch sensor 2620 (prior to the execution of the fate branch effect) Although it has been determined, it becomes possible to make it seem as if the player has decided, by making it possible to distinguish from the staging result of the fated branch effect with the passage of the gaming ball to the branch sensor 2620 as an opportunity. Therefore, when the fate branching effect is executed to derive whether or not it is the 16R probability variation big hit of the specific 7, the player will be in the fate branching effect such that the timing when the gaming ball passes through the branch sensor 2620 will be seen Become actively involved.

  In the present embodiment, when the second special symbol fluctuation time elapses (when the specific reach effect is finished), the second special symbol display 1186 determines the big hit symbol determined as the second special symbol stop symbol. The stop display clearly indicates which of the jackpots related to the second special symbol is the big hit, but the second special symbol from the stop symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 1186 It is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the specific 7R 16R probability variation big hit among the big hits related to the two special symbols, and the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided to be more noticeable than the second special symbol display 1186 Thus, the player pays attention to the contents of the effects on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. Specifically, the second special symbol display 1186 is one of a plurality of LEDs provided in the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180, and is configured by eight LEDs. Then, in addition to not notifying the player that these eight LEDs function as the second special symbol indicator 1186, the eight LEDs can be turned on according to the determination result, and a plurality of lighting patterns can be displayed. Therefore, even if the jackpot symbol determined as the stop symbol of the second special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 as a stop symbol, the jackpot symbol stops at the second special symbol display 1186. It is difficult for the player to know that the player is in the game, and it is difficult to determine which of the jackpots related to the second special symbol from the lighting mode of the LED. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit is performed until the main liquid crystal display device 1900 executes the result notification effect as the effect result of the fate branch effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case where a specific 7 16R probability variation big hit among the big hits related to the second special symbol is specified, the main notice notification production according to the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit as the staging result of the fate branching effect It is executed in the liquid crystal display device 1900, and it is determined from the notification effect that it is a specific 7R 16R probability variation big hit, and it is controlled to the long open 16R big hit gaming state using the second large winning opening 2509 and the 16R It is possible to determine whether or not to control to the high probability time short state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, among the big hits related to the second special symbol Big hits other than the specified 7 16R probability variation big hits (non-specified 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4 R normal big hit D, specified In the case where the 4R sudden probability big hit 6 in 6 is specified, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 executes the notification effect according to the big hit other than the 16R probability variation big hit in the specified 7 as the presentation result of the fate branch effect, and the result notification It determines that it is not a specific 7 16R probability variation big hit from the effect, and controls it to the 4R big hit gaming state of the short time opening which uses the 1st big winning a prize mouth 2102 and controls the low probability time short state after the end of the 4R big hit gaming state It is possible to determine that it is (except in the case where a specific 6 4R probability jackpot B is specified). In this way, as the staging result of the fate branch staging effect, it is the result notification directing effect according to the specific 7's 16R probability variation big hit, or the result notification effect according to the big hit other than the specific 7's 16R probability variation big hitting, either Because a big difference is generated in the profit obtained by the player based on the result of the effect, the player is used as a result of the effect of the fate branch effect displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. Is particularly focused.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the second large winning opening 2509 is used with the passage of the game ball to the branch sensor 2620 as a trigger in the case of the specific 7R 16R probability variation big hit among the big hits related to the second special symbol At the same time with the control of the 16R big hit gaming state open for a long time, as a result of the fate branch effect based on the big hit start command has started executing the notification effect according to the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit. However, even if the execution of notification effect according to the specific 7's 16R probability variation big hit is started, if the notification effect does not progress as a result, the player determines whether or not the specific 7's 16R probability variation big hit. It can not be done. That is, before the player determines whether the result notification effect is the specific 7R or the 16R probability variation jackpot, control of the long open 16R big hit gaming state using the second large winning opening 2509 is started. It has become. As a result, even if the game ball passes the branch sensor 2620 by performing so-called right hitting during execution of the fate branch effect, even if right hitting continues while paying attention to the contents of the effect on the main liquid crystal display device 1900, The game ball does not become a wasted ball as long as it is a special 7 16R probability variation big hit, and the game ball can continue to be won in the second large winning opening 2509 with a very high probability, making it difficult for the player to generate losses. Also, it is possible to expedite the big hit gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, among the big hits related to the second special symbol, the big hit other than the specified 7 16R probability variation big hit (not specified 2 4R normal big hit B, not specified 3 4R normal big hit C, not specified 4 4R In the case where the normal big hit D, specified 6 4R sudden big hit B) is specified, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 executes the notification effect according to the big hit other than the specified 7 16R positive variation big hit as the production result of the fate branch effect However, before ending the notification effect as a result, all the round numbers in the 4R jackpot gaming state of short time opening using the first large winning opening 2102 are ended. As described above, while the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is executing the notice notification effect according to the big hit other than the 16R probability variation big hit of the specific 7 as the staging result of the fate branch effect, the first large winning opening 2102 is used. By controlling the 4R big hit gaming state for a short time open, as long as the player pays attention to the notification effect as a result, it is controlled to the 4R big hit gaming state for a short time opening using the first large winning opening 2102 It is possible to eliminate the sense of loss of the player that the player is in a big hit gaming state where it is hard to notice that there is a big profit.

  Next, a specific rendering example of the fate branching effect in the main liquid crystal display device 1900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 176. In this production example, among the big hits related to the second special symbol, the fate branching effect is executed based on the specific 7's 16R probability variation big hit, and the specific 7's 16R probability variation big hit other than the big hit (non-specific 2 4R In the case where the fate branching effect is performed based on the big hit B, non-specific 3 4R normal big-hit C, non-specific 4 4R normal big-hit D, and specific 6 4R sudden big hit B).

  As shown in FIG. 174 (A), in any of the cases in which the jackpot associated with the second special symbol is specified, the variation display of the decoration symbol is started on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the variation pattern, The reach symbol (in the present production example, the symbol of "7") is stopped and displayed as a symbol. In the present embodiment, since reach is not determined to be out of reach at the time of a short time, for a player who knows that effect, at the time of reach, it becomes a big hit related to the second special symbol. Can be recognized, and it is possible to enjoy a specific reach effect in peace.

  As shown in FIG. 174 (B), after the reach symbol is displayed as a stop on the left and right decorative symbols, execution of a specific reach effect is started in the main liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the variation pattern, and the sword is held. An effect is performed such that the main character is chased around the enemy character. In addition, during execution of a specific reach effect, the left and right decorative symbols (reach symbols) that are already stopped and displayed, and the middle decorative symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed, are small at the upper left of the screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1900, The display is controlled so as not to be noticeable. For this reason, the player pays attention to the effect contents of the specific reach effect, not the variable display of the decorative symbol on the main liquid crystal display device 1900.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 174 (C), at the end of a specific reach effect, the enemy character with a sword is about to be defeated by the main character, and "Can you avoid the tragedy?" The player is notified of the message. It should be noted that at the end of a specific reach effect, the symbol drawn as “Fate branch symbol” is stopped fluctuating as the inside decoration symbol after formation of the reach symbol, but it is small and unnoticeable at the upper left of the screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1900. Display control to. As described above, in the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the left and right decorative symbols are made the same symbol (reach symbol) as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and the middle decorative symbol is the symbol drawn as "fate branch symbol". Although it is notified that it is a big hit related to the second special symbol by displaying the combination, it is clearly notified by displaying it small on the screen so as to make it difficult for the player to discriminate. It is difficult for the player to determine that the jackpot is not a jackpot associated with the second special symbol. Also, at the end of a specific reach effect, the stop symbol of the decoration symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 while the big hit symbol determined as the stop symbol of the second special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 as a stop symbol. It is not possible to determine which of the jackpots among the jackpots related to the second special symbol by displaying and controlling the common stop symbol.

  Next, when a specific 7 16R probability variation big hit among the big hits related to the second special symbol is specified, the fate branch is made at the main liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the stop display command as shown in FIG. 175 (D). Execution of the effect is started, and the player is notified of a message of "Fate open!", And an instruction of "right strike" is given to the upper right portion of the main liquid crystal display device 1900. In this way, during the execution of the fate branch rendition, it is required to avoid the occurrence of a tragedy continuing from the scene at a specific reach rendition, and so-called right strike is performed in the upper right of the crystal display device 1900. By passing the gaming ball through the provided branch sensor 2620, an effect is performed as if the fate of whether to avoid the tragedy is selected. The main liquid crystal display device 1900 controls the display of a dynamic effect image (moving image) except during the execution of the fate branch effect, while the execution of the fate branch effect is performed by the main liquid crystal display device 1900. Display control of a still effect image (still image) including a message of "Fate open!" Is displayed. As described above, while the fate branch effect is being executed, the stationary effect image does not switch unless the player follows the instruction "right-handed" displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900, and the game or the effect is not performed. The control of is not advanced, and by performing so-called right strike, the branch sensor 2620 is urged to pass the gaming ball.

  In this embodiment, a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 2 minutes) from the end of the variation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol storage indicator 1184 or the second special symbol indicator 1186, or the end of the jackpot gaming state, Demonstration where the main liquid crystal display device 1900 introduces the concept of the model etc so that the player can get interest in the pachinko machine 1 when there is no winning of the game ball in the first start port 2201 or the second start port 2578b. The display of the screen (demo screen) is started. That is, when there is no winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2578b, the effect image (still image) stopped on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is display controlled, and the display control of the demonstration screen The still effect image does not switch until the is started. On the other hand, while the effect image (still image) stopped on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is subjected to display control during execution of the fate branch effect, even if the branch sensor 2620 does not pass the gaming ball, It is made clear that display control of the demonstration screen is not started and passage of the game ball to the branch sensor 2620 is necessary, and the branch sensor 2620 is urged to pass the game ball by performing so-called right strike ing.

  In addition, when execution of the fate branch effect is started, control is performed so that light emission decoration is sequentially performed counterclockwise toward the branch sensor 2620 in the area around the main liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game area 1100. Specifically, a decoration substrate such as front right upper decoration substrate 2611, front side decoration substrate 2305, center left decoration substrate 2632, center upper left decoration substrate 2513 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is controlled, for example, front right upper decoration substrate 2611, the front side decoration substrate 2305, the center left decoration substrate 2632, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the center upper left decoration substrate 2513 are sequentially light-emitted toward the branch sensor 2620 by controlling the light emission sequentially There is. By repeating an aspect such as light flowing toward the branch sensor 2620 a plurality of times (for example, 2 to 3 times), the game sensor can be made to pass the game ball to the branch sensor 2620 by performing so-called right strike. Are urging

  In addition, during the execution of the fate branch rendition, after repeating a mode such as light flows toward the branch sensor 2620 several times, a heart-shaped decoration provided on the center base 2510 and capable of emitting and decorating The member 2515 (see FIG. 146) is controlled to emit light and decorate. The heart-shaped decorative member 2515 is disposed at the lower left of the branch sensor 2620, and turns on the heart-shaped decorative member 2515 by controlling the light emission of the LED mounted on the front upper right decorative substrate 2611 arranged on the back side thereof. be able to. At this time, in the area around the main liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game area 1100, a plurality of LEDs are controlled to be turned off to make it dark, and only the LEDs on the back side of the heart-shaped decorative member 2515 be controlled to be bright. By doing so, only the heart-shaped decorative member 2515 in the vicinity of the branch sensor 2620 can be highlighted, and by performing so-called right strike, the branch sensor 2620 is urged to pass the gaming ball. Also, according to the lighting of the heart-shaped decorative member 2515, each speaker 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5 or the main body frame 3 is provided with a voice resembling a heart sound such as "dock, dock". The signal is output from the speaker 821 or the like. For example, as shown in FIG. 175 (D), with the effect image being displayed still on the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the above-described voice output is increased as time passes, and it is gradually made for the player. By continuing to output unpleasant voices, it is assumed that it is necessary to cause the branch sensor 2620 to pass the gaming ball by performing so-called right strike.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the heart-shaped decorative member 2515 is lighted, the light emission control of the LED is performed with a predetermined single light emission color, but the LED is configured to be able to emit light with a plurality of light emission colors. The light emission control is performed so that the light emission color changes sequentially (for example, changes in the order of red → yellow → blue → green) each time a predetermined time elapses (every time the heart-shaped decorative member 2515 lights up a plurality of times) It is also good. For example, during the execution of the fate branch effect, when the heart-shaped decorative member 2515 is lit with a specific light emission color, so-called right hitting causes the game ball to pass through the branch sensor 2620, and the effect result of the fate branch effect As a result by providing notification notification according to the specific 7's 16R probability variation big hit, if it is possible to make the branch sensor 2620 pass the game ball when lit with this specific luminescent color, the specific 7 '16R probability variation big hit It can be made to think that the result notice presentation according to is obtained. Then, when the next fate branch effect is performed, when passing the gaming ball to the branch sensor 2620, aiming for the timing when the heart-shaped decorative member 2515 is lit in a specific emission color, the fate branch You can be interested in participating in the production.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (E), after the game ball passes and is detected by the branch sensor 2620, execution of notification notification effect according to the specific 7's 16R probability variation big hit is started as the effect result of the fate branch effect An indication is made that the main character has escaped from the enemy character with the sword. Then, as shown in FIG. 175 (F), the player is notified of the message of “a tragedy avoidance”, and an effect as if the selection of a fate to avoid the tragedy has succeeded is executed. Thus, of the result notification effect according to the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit, the result notification effect according to the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit other than the result notification effect according to the identification 7 16R probability variation big hit By being executed, it is clearly determined that it is a big hit associated with the second special symbol that was not clearly determined at the end of a specific reach effect (when the second special symbol's fluctuation time has elapsed). , Among the jackpots associated with the second special symbol, it can be determined that it is a specified 7 16R probability variation jackpot. In addition, after a game ball passes and is detected by branch sensor 2620, the game ball which controlled the 16R big hit game state of long time opening which used the 2nd big winning a prize mouth 2509, passed that branch sensor 2620, It is controlled to win the second big winning opening 2509 as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (G), after finishing the notification effect of the result according to the specific 7R 16R probability variation big hit, the big hit round start command and the big hit until the control of the long open 16R probability variation big hit gaming state is finished. Based on the command for ending the round, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 starts executing the big hit game rendition according to the 16R probability variation big hit and the current round number, and the current number of rounds in the 16R big hit gaming state and the second big prize in the round The number of winning prizes in the mouth 2509 is displayed.

  On the other hand, among the big hits related to the second special symbol Big hits other than the specified 7 16R probability variation big hits (non-specified 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4 R normal big hit D, specified In the case where the 4R sudden big hit 6 in 6 is specified, as in the case where the 16R positive variation big hit in specified 7 is specified, as shown in FIG. 176 (D), in the main liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the stop display command. Execution of the fate branching effect is started, and the player is notified of a message of "Fate open!" And an instruction of "right strike" is given to the upper right portion of the main liquid crystal display device 1900.

  As shown in FIG. 176 (E ′), after the game ball passes and is detected by the branch sensor 2620, the result notification according to the big hit other than the 16R probability variation big hit of the specific 7 as the directed result of the fate branch effect Execution is started, and a scene is displayed that the main character has been defeated by the enemy character having the sword. Then, as shown in FIG. 176 (F ′), the player is notified of the message “disaster avoidance failure”, and effects are performed as if the selection of the fate to avoid the disaster has failed. As described above, of the results according to the specific 7's 16R probability variation big hit, the results according to the specific 7's 16R probability variation big hit other than the result notification effect according to the specific 7's 16R probability variation big hit Even when the notification effect is performed, since the common result notification effect is performed as the effect result of the fate branch effect, it is not possible to determine which big hit other than the specific 7's 16R probability variation big hit. In addition, after the game ball passes and is detected by branch sensor 2620, it controls to 4R big hit game state of the short time opening which uses 1st large winning a prize mouth 2102, but the game which passes that branch sensor 2620 The ball is controlled so as not to win the first big winning opening 2102 as it is. In addition, all round numbers in the 4R big hit gaming state of the short time opening which uses the 1st big winning a prize mouth 2102 end until the result notification production which responds to the big hit other than the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit is finished In addition, it is made not to execute the big hit game rendition like the time of the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit. In this way, during the period when the player is paying attention to the notice notification effect according to the big hit other than the specific 7's 16R probability variation big hit, all rounds in the 4R big hit gaming state are ended, making it difficult for the player to notice Therefore, it is determined as if it were a big hit but not as a big hit without being clearly determined to be a big hit related to the second special symbol.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case where the jackpot associated with the second special symbol is specified, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 executes the specific reach effect and then the fortune branch effect is performed, and the fortune branch is performed. When the game ball passes and is detected by the branch sensor 2620 during the execution of the effect, the result notification effect according to the specific 7's 16R probability variation big hit or not as the production result of the fate branch effect (specific 7's 16R probability variation big hit It controls to execute the result notice effect according to or the result notice effect according to the big hit other than the specific 7R 16R probability variation big hit, but among these effects, the contents of the effect in the specific reach effect, A series of effect contents are configured by the effect contents in the result notification effect. As described above, when the execution of the fate branch effect is started after the specific reach effect is performed in the main liquid crystal display device 1900, control is performed so that the effect content does not advance from the specific reach effect, and the fate branch effect is being executed. Only when the game ball passes and is detected by the branch sensor 2620, the game contents are passed to the branch sensor 2620 by performing a so-called right hit by controlling so that the effect contents continued from the specific reach effect progress. I urge you to

  Further, in the present embodiment, in any case where the big hit related to the second special symbol is specified, the fate branch effect is performed after the specific reach effect is performed in the main liquid crystal display device 1900, and the fate branch effect is performed. As long as the game ball does not pass and is detected by the branch sensor 2620, the fate branch effect (branch sensor enabled state) is continued to be executed without limitation to the time for producing the fate branch effect. Then, when the game ball passes and is detected by the branch sensor 2620 during execution of the fate branch effect, the presentation time of the result notification effect to be executed thereafter is made constant, and the specific 7-16R as the effect result of the fate branch effect Control to execute result notification effect (Result notification effect according to the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit, or result notification effect according to the specific 7 16R positive variation big hit according to the big hit according to the specific variation big hit or not) There is. As described above, while the fate branch effect is being executed, since the fate branch effect is continuously performed without limitation for the effect time unless the game ball passes and is detected by the branch sensor 2620, a branch occurs at a timing desired by the player. The game ball can be passed through the sensor 2620, and the player can proceed with the game at a free pace. In addition, by enabling the player to freely determine the start time of the effect notification effect as the effect result time of the fate branch effect, that is, the outcome result of the fate branch effect, the result according to the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit It is possible to give an impression as to whether or not the player is determined whether or not the notification effect is executed, and to actively participate in the fate branching effect.

[9. Doom Selection Opportunity Direction]
In the present embodiment, in the variation display of the decoration symbol executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1900 triggered by the game ball winning to the first starting opening 2101, the decoration symbol being variably displayed according to the operation of the player It is possible to execute a fate selection chance presentation to stop display.

  As shown in FIG. 177, the main control MPU 4100a is a non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, a specific 1 4 R latent probability big hit, a specific 2 4 R stupid big hit A, and a specific one of the big hit related to the first special symbol When it becomes 12 R probability variation big hit B of 5, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (rendering time displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900) and the contents of effects displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, reach effect Among the multiple types of variation patterns in which the type of) is set, non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, specific 1 4R latent probability big hit, specific 2 4R stupid big hit A, and specific 5 12 R probability variation big hit B If you decide on a specific variation pattern that can only be determined when you do, the first special symbol display 1185 starts the variation display of the first special symbol, and it is set to the particular variation pattern When the fluctuation time has passed, the big hit symbol determined as the stop symbol of the first special symbol (if it is 4R normal big hit A for non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A symbol, if it is specific 1 4R latent probability big hit 4R latent confirmation big hit design, if the specific 2 4R sudden definite big hit A, the 4R positive definite big hit A symbology, if the specific 5 12R positive variation big hit B if it is a 12R positive variation big hit B symbol) stop display.

  On the other hand, upon receiving the fluctuation pattern command instructing execution of a specific fluctuation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 4140a starts fluctuation display of the decorative symbol on the main liquid crystal display device 1900, and the fluctuation time set to the specific fluctuation pattern The jackpot symbol determined to be the first special symbol display 1185 (ie, non-specific 1 4R normal jackpot 4R normal jackpot A symbol, specific 1 4R latent jackpot hit 4R latent Certain large hit design, if the specific 2 4R stupid big hit A 4R stupid big hit A design, if the specific 5 12R positive variation big hit B 12R positive variation big hit B design) stop display the left and right decorative design with the same pattern It controls to the reach state which continued the fluctuation indication of inside decoration design while displaying. In addition, even if the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a stop display command indicating that the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed from the main control MPU 4400a during this reach state (displaying the first special symbol in a stopped state) The variation display of the middle decoration pattern is continued, and the stop pattern of the decoration pattern is not displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. That is, when the variation time of the first special symbol has passed, the first special symbol display 1185 relates to the first special symbol by stopping and displaying the big hit symbol determined as the stop symbol of the first special symbol. The main liquid crystal display device 1900 clearly indicates which big hit among the big wins, as well as which big hit among the big wins related to the first special symbol. Even not clearly notified. However, the first special symbol display 1185 is one of a plurality of LEDs provided in the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180, and is configured by eight LEDs. Also, in addition to not notifying the player that eight LEDs function as the first special symbol display 1185, eight LEDs can be turned on according to the determination result, and a plurality of lighting patterns can be displayed. Therefore, even if the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1185, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the big hit symbol is stopped on the first special symbol display 1185, and from the lighting mode of the LED It is difficult to determine whether or not it is a big hit design. Therefore, it is possible to think that the variable display is continued until the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and it becomes difficult to realize that it has become a big hit.

  In addition, after the main control MPU 4100a ends the above-mentioned variation display control of the first special symbol, that is, after displaying the big hit symbol determined as the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 , And controls the detection of the gaming ball by the branch sensor 2620 to a branch sensor enabled state. Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a monitors the detection of the game ball by the branch sensor 2620 after displaying the jackpot symbol determined as the stop symbol of the first special symbol. Then, when it is detected that the gaming ball has passed the branch sensor 2620 by performing so-called right hitting in the branch sensor effective state, detection of the gaming ball by the branch sensor 2620 after ending this branch sensor effective state is invalidated. The big hit start command (4R normal big hit A start command, 4R latent positive big hit start command, 4R random hit big hit A start command, 12R positive oddity big hit B start command) according to the type of big hit is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010.

  Then, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a stop display command from the main control MPU 4100a while the decorative symbol is in the reach state, the peripheral control MPU 4140a selects whether or not the main liquid crystal display device 1900 can obtain a good display result. As described above, the game player is driven into the right route 1100R, and the branch sensor 2620 is instructed to stop and display the decorative symbol (inside decorative symbol) that is variably displayed by passing the gaming ball, and executes a fate selection chance effect Do. That is, in the fate selection chance effect, the player is notified that it is possible to stop and display the decorative symbol by causing the branch sensor 2620 to pass the game ball by so-called right hitting.

  When it is detected that the gaming ball has passed the branch sensor 2620 while the branch sensor is in the valid state, the main control MPU 4100a starts controlling the big hit gaming state. Specifically, main control MPU 4100a opens and closes first big winning opening 2102 if non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A or specific 1 4R latent probability big hit when branch sensor 2620 detects the game ball An open / close pattern to be closed when the first count sensor 2111 detects that the member 2104 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that the first large winning opening 2102 has nine winning balls Execute the control that repeats 4 times (4 rounds) and close the second opening / closing member 2572 that closes the second large winning opening 2509 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) if it is a specific 2R The control to repeat the opening and closing pattern to be performed four times is executed, and if it is the 12R probability variation big hit B of the specific 5, the second opening and closing member 2572 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or after the first large entry The game ball has won nine mouth 2102 executes 12 times (12 rounds) repeating controlling the opening and closing pattern to be closed when it is detected by the first counting sensor 2111. In addition, when controlling the first big winning a prize opening 2102 and the 2nd big winning a prize opening 2509 as a big hit game state, sending the big hit round start command which responds to the kind and current round number of big hit to peripheral control baseplate 4010 sequentially When controlling the first large winning opening 2102 and the second large winning opening 2509 in a closed state, a big hit round end command according to the type of big hit and the current number of rounds is sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4140a selects the fate in the case where the non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, the specific 1 4 R latent probability big hit, and the specific 5 12 R positive variation big hit B among the big hits related to the first special symbol. A big hit start command (4R normal big hit A start command, 4R latent confirmation during execution of a chance effect (in a state where the left and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the same symbol and without displaying the middle decoration symbol stopped yet). When the big hit start command, 12R probability variation big hit B start command is received, the main decoration pattern is stopped and displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. The big hit design (not specified 1 4R normal big hit A if 4R Usually a big hit A design, the specific 1 4R latent probability big hit 4R latent probability big hit design, the specific 5 12R positive variation big hit B 12R positive variation big hit Deriving Show symbols), notifying that the good effect results were obtained by selection fate based on passage of the game ball to the branch sensor 2620.

  Thus, a non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, a specific 1 4 R latent probability big hit, and a specific 5 12 R positive variation big hit B according to each big hit pattern (non-specific 1 4 R normal big hit A if 4 R normal big hit A symbol, if it is a specific 1 4R latent probability big hit 4R latent probability big hit symbol, if a specific 5 12R positive variation big hit B 12R positive variation big hit B design) is derived and displayed on the main liquid crystal display 1900, the first In addition to clearly notifying that it is a jackpot associated with the first special symbol that was not clearly displayed when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, and the non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, the specific 1 4R latent It clearly notifies that it has become either a definite big hit, or a specific 5 12R positive variation big hit B.

  In addition, peripheral control MPU 4140a, during the execution of the fate selection chance presentation (when it displays stop symbols on the left and right with the same symbol), when it becomes the specific 2 4R sudden probability big hit A among the big hits related to the first special symbol When the big hit start command (4R sudden confirmation big hit A start command) is received in the state where it is still fluctuating display without stopping and displaying the inside decoration pattern, the inside decoration pattern is stopped and displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 Derivatively displays the 4R prominence big hit A symbol of the decorative symbol. As described above, it is difficult for the player to recognize that a big hit has occurred because the 4R stupid big hit A symbol is a symbol combination different from the left and right decorative symbols and the symbol combination similar to the missing symbol displayed in the middle decorative symbol being stopped and displayed. . The peripheral control MPU 4140a notifies that the good rendering result has not been obtained by the selection of the fate based on the passage of the gaming ball to the branch sensor 2620 after the 4R sudden confirmation big hit A symbol is stopped and displayed. However, in this case as well, the transition control to the high probability time reduction state is performed, and the player is notified of that effect, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the amusement of the game.

  As described above, even if the main liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the big hit symbol (4R sudden hit big symbol A symbol) corresponding to the specific 2 4R sudden big hit A on the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the same as when the variation time of the first special symbol passes It does not notify clearly that it is a big hit related to one special symbol, but as if it was out of order. In addition, when stopping and displaying the big hit design according to the special 2 4R stupid big hit A, the big hit round start command and the big hit round end command are sequentially received, but the type and current round of the big hit on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 The effect according to the number is not executed, and the notification is not given so that the current number of rounds in the 4R big hit gaming state can be determined.

  Further, in this example, during the execution of the fate selection chance effect, the middle decoration pattern is changed and displayed at high speed, and when the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed based on the passage of the game ball to the branch sensor 2620, the middle decoration pattern fluctuation display Is gradually decelerated and stopped and displayed with a desired symbol. Even if the game ball is allowed to pass to the branch sensor 2620, the inside decoration symbol is not immediately stopped and displayed. And, when it becomes specific 2 4R sudden probability big hit A, until 4R sudden probability big hit design is stopped indicated based on passage of the game ball to fork sensor 2620 or 4R sudden definite big hit symbol is stopped indicated and good rendering result All rounds in the 4R big hit gaming state of opening for a short time have been completed by the end of the notification of not having obtained (until the notification of controlling to high probability time short state is finished), the big hit I try not to execute the game effect. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to realize that the jackpot game is being executed, and it can be thought that the transition control to the high probability time-short state is suddenly controlled regardless of the occurrence of the jackpot. In addition, you may make it stop display of the inside decoration pattern at the same time detection of passage of the game ball to fork sensor 2620, when it becomes 4R sudden probability big hit A in this case until it ends the production which notifies the production result ( All rounds in the 4R big hit gaming state which is open for a short time may be ended and the big hit gaming effect may not be executed until the notification of controlling to the high probability time short state is finished).

  In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 1185 is used as the variable display state when the game ball wins the first starting opening 2101 and becomes a big hit related to the first special symbol. After stop-displaying the big hit symbol decided as the stop symbol, it controls to the branch sensor effective state and continues the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol in the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and instructs the branch sensor 2620 to pass the game ball Do. Then, when it is detected that the gaming ball has passed the branch sensor 2620 by performing so-called right strike, control is made to a big hit gaming state according to the type of big hit. That is, even if the big win symbol determined as the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1185, as long as the game ball is not allowed to pass through the branch sensor 2620 by hitting the right, the decorative symbol The variable display continues and control is not made to the jackpot gaming state according to the type of jackpot. As described above, when the fortune selection chance effect is controlled by controlling the branch sensor in the effective state, the player must follow the instructions on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. However, when the game ball is allowed to pass through the branch sensor 2620 The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed to control the jackpot gaming state according to the type of jackpot, and the player's willingness to participate in the fate selection chance presentation is not diminished.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is hit to the right of the center character 2500 (is hit with a predetermined strength or more), the probability that the game ball that has flowed down to the right route 1100R has a high probability (right hit) Most game balls pass through the branch sensor 2620, and some game balls do not pass through the branch sensor 2620, and they may always pass through the branch sensor 2620 when right-handed. The sensor 2620 is to be passed. That is, during the execution of the fate selection chance effect (during the control of the branch sensor effective state), it is possible to cause the branch sensor 2620 to pass the gaming ball with high probability only by performing a so-called right strike. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to lose a loss that the game ball aiming at the branch sensor 2620 becomes a waste ball during execution of the fate selection chance effect (during control of the branch sensor effective state).

  In addition, when the main control MPU 4100a detects that the gaming ball has passed the branch sensor 2620 during execution of the fate selection chance effect, after setting the big hit start command indicating starting the big hit gaming state, the first big winning game Although the waiting time until setting the big hit round start command indicating that the opening 2102 and the second big winning opening 2509 are actually controlled to the open state is set in the interval timer, this interval timer has a very short time ( For example, 0.5 seconds is set. That is, when it is detected that the gaming ball has passed the branch sensor 2620 during execution of the fate selection chance effect, the first large winning opening 2102 and the second large winning opening 2509 are controlled to be open in an extremely short time. become. In addition, the time set in the interval timer is shorter than the time it takes for the game ball which has passed the branch sensor 2620 to reach the first large winning opening 2102 and the second large winning opening 2509 by performing so-called right strike Is set as. Therefore, when the gaming ball having passed the branch sensor 2620 by performing so-called right hitting reaches the first large winning opening 2102 and the second large winning opening 2509, the first large winning opening 2102 and the second large winning combination have already been made. Opening / closing control of the opening 2509 is started, and if the opening / closing member 2104 closing the first large winning opening 2102 and the second opening / closing member 2572 closing the second large winning opening 2509 are opened for a long time, the branch sensor 2620 The game ball which has passed is made to win the first large winning opening 2102 and the second large winning opening 2509 as it is. Therefore, the game ball passing the branch sensor 2620 does not become a wasted ball during execution of the fate selection chance effect (during control of the branch sensor effective state), and it is possible to make the player's loss less likely to occur.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit at the start of the variation of the first special symbol, and the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed even when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1185. Does not control the display of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and does not clearly notify even the big hit. Then, only when the game ball passes the branch sensor 2620 in the branch sensor valid state, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 displays stop the decorative symbol and notifies whether it is a big hit or not. For this reason, it is determined before the game ball passes the branch sensor 2620 (before the execution of the fate selection chance presentation) as to whether or not to make a big hit related to the first special symbol, but the branch By making it possible to determine the passage of the game ball to the sensor 2620 as a trigger, it can be made as if the player himself had won the big hit by causing the branch sensor 2620 to pass the game ball. Therefore, when the fate selection chance effect is executed when it becomes non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, specific 1 4 R latent probability big hit, and specific 5 12 R probability variation big hit B, the timing when the game ball passes branch sensor 2620 For example, the player actively participates in the fate selection chance presentation.

  Also, in the present embodiment, in the case of becoming a specific 5 12R probability variation big hit B among the big hit related to the first special symbol, 12R big hit gaming state open for a long time triggered by the passage of the gaming ball to the branch sensor 2620 At the same time as the control of the, according to the big hit start command as a result of directing the fate choice chance presentation stop notification of the 12R probability variation big hit B symbol is notified and it is notified that it is a big hit. However, if the control of the big hit gaming state does not progress for a while even if the stop display of the 12 R probability variation big hit B symbol is displayed and the big hit is notified, the specified 5 12 R probability variation big hit B or non-specific 1 4 R usually The player can not determine whether the jackpot is the jackpot A or the specific 1 4R latent probability jackpot. That is, the 12R big hit opened for a long time before allowing the player to determine whether the specified 5 12R probability variation big hit B or the non-specified 1 4R normal big hit A or the specified 1 4R latent hit big hit Control of the gaming state is to be started. As a result, even if the game ball passes the branch sensor 2620 by performing so-called right hitting during execution of the fate selection chance effect, right hitting continues while paying attention to the contents of the presentation on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. As long as the special 5's 12R probability variation big hit B, the game ball does not become a wasted ball, and keeps playing the game ball in the second large winning opening 2101 with a very high probability, making it difficult for the player to generate losses In addition, it is possible to quickly digest the jackpot gaming state.

  Also, in the present embodiment, in the case where it becomes a specific 2 4R certainty big hit A among the big hits related to the first special symbol, 4R big hit gaming state of a short time opening triggered by the passing of the gaming ball to the branch sensor 2620 At the same time as the control of, according to the big hit start command, it is notified that it is controlled to be displayed with high probability and short as well as the stop display of the 4R sudden certain big hit A symbol as a presentation result of the fate selection chance presentation. At this time, control of all the round numbers in the 4R big hit gaming state of opening for a short time is ended before ending the effect of notifying the control to the high probability time and short state. As described above, the 4R big hit of an open for a short time while notifying the main liquid crystal display device 1900 to stop and display the 4R sudden big hit A symbol as a presentation result of the fate selection chance presentation and controlling to the high probability time reduction state. By controlling to the gaming state, as long as the player pays attention to the notification effect as a result, it is difficult to notice that it is controlled to the 4R big hit gaming state opened for a short time, and it is a big hit gaming state that hardly gains This can eliminate the player's sense of loss. In addition, since it is controlled to the high probability time-short state even when it is recognized that it does not become a big hit by the stop display of the 4R surging big hit A symbol similar to the out pattern, the player is not discouraged excessively.

  In addition, control to repeat the opening and closing pattern to be closed after opening the second opening and closing member 2572 closing the second large winning opening 2509 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) as a big hit related to the first special symbol four times Control to low probability time short state after the big hit game state end (It may shift to the low probability non-short state when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example 30 times)) A 4R pseudo sudden big hit may be provided, and if it is determined that the main control MPU 4100a will be a 4R pseudo sudden big hit, the fate selection chance presentation may be performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a. In this case, by not notifying the control to the high probability time-short state when it becomes the 4R sudden probability big hit A, it becomes difficult to determine whether it was the 4R sudden probability big hit A or the 4R pseudo critical probability big hit, It becomes difficult to determine whether the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is high probability time short state or low probability time short state, and it is possible to make it difficult to stop the game.

  Next, a specific example of the fate selection opportunity presentation will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, among the jackpots related to the first special symbol, the fate selection chance presentation is performed based on the non-specific 1 4R normal jackpot A, the specific 1 4R latent probability big hit, and the specific 5 12 R probability variation big hit B In the case where the fate selection chance presentation is executed based on the case 2 and the specific 2 4R sudden certain hit A, the different presentation result is notified.

  As shown in FIG. 178, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is a non-specific one 4R normal large hit A, a specific 1 4 R latent probability big hit, a specific 2 4 R extra probability big hit A, and a specific 5 among the big hits related to the first special symbol. When the variation pattern command instructing execution of a specific variation pattern is received in the 12R probability variation big hit B of, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 starts the variation display of the decorative symbol (FIG. 178 (A)), and The player displays the reach symbol (in this example, "5" in this example) in which the decorative symbol is stopped by the same symbol and displays "reach" on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the reach of the decorative symbol is reached. Is notified (FIG. 178 (B)).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays “Fate selection chance! Hit right!” On the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and executes the fate selection chance effect, and drives the game ball into the right route 1100R side. Is notified (FIG. 178 (C)). When the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs the display of FIG. 178 (C), the first special symbol display 1185 has already stopped and displayed the big hit symbol determined as the stop symbol of the first special symbol. However, as described above, the first special symbol display 1185 is one of a plurality of LEDs, and not only does not notify the player that it functions as the first special symbol display 1185, but the jackpot symbol is stopped. It is difficult for the player to clearly determine that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped or the jackpot has occurred because it is difficult to determine whether the player is playing or not.

  When it is detected that the gaming ball has passed through the branch sensor 2620, the peripheral control MPU 4140a stops and displays the inside decoration pattern so as to display a big hit symbol according to the type of the big hit. At this time, among the big hits related to the first special symbol, if the non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, the specific 1 4R latent probability big hit, and the specific 5 12 R positive variation big hit B, the decoration of the inside decoration pattern on the left and right A big hit design in which the left middle, right and left decorative symbols are all aligned with the same symbol by stopping display with the same symbol as the symbol (4R normal big hit A non-specific 1R regular big hit A symbol, specific 1 4R latent probability big hit If it is 4R latent confirmation big hit symbol, 12R positive variation big hit B of specific 5 If 12R positive variation big hit B symbol is displayed (Fig. 178 (D)), it notifies that it is a big hit (Fig. 178 (E)) ).

  On the other hand, among the big hit related to the first special symbol, if it is the specific 2R 4 certainty big hit A, the middle decoration pattern is stopped and displayed with a different pattern from the left and right decoration symbols, and the left middle right decoration symbol is the same pattern The same 4R sudden definite big hit A symbol as the unmatched out pattern is displayed (Fig. 178 (D ')), and it is notified that it is not a big hit and is controlled to high probability time short state (Fig. 178 (E') ). In this case, although it is actually a big hit, as described above, execution of all the rounds is completed in a period until the notification of the rendering result in FIG. 178 (D ′) to FIG. 178 (E ′) is ended. It is difficult for the player to realize that the player has made a big hit.

  In this way, in the fate selection chance effect, by the player himself hitting the game ball into the right route 1100R side and making the branch sensor 2620 pass the game ball, the inside decoration pattern is the same as the left and right decoration patterns. An effect is performed as if the fate of stopping display or stopping display with symbols different from the left and right decorative symbols is selected.

  In addition, as described above, in the fate selection chance effect, the display of the inside decoration pattern is changed at high speed until it is detected that the game ball has passed the branch sensor 2620, and it is detected that the game ball has passed the branch sensor 2620 On the basis of, the display of the variation display of the inside decoration pattern is gradually slowed down and finally stopped. As described above, during the execution of the fate selection chance effect, the decoration pattern in the middle is not displayed as a stop unless the player follows the instruction of "right-handed!" Displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. The game is not going to progress, and he urges you to hit the right.

  In addition, because it is notified as if it is out of place when it becomes specific 2 4R stupid big hit A among big hits related to the first special symbol, it is clear that it is a big hit related to the first special symbol It can not be determined. In addition, it is controlled to the 4R big hit game state of the open for a short time when it detects that the game ball passes the divergence sensor 2620 when becoming the specific 2 4R stupid big hit A, but the start of the 4R big hit game state of this short time open The game ball that is the cause of the game ball, that is, the game ball detected that the player has hit the right route 1100R side and has passed the branch sensor 2620 in order to stop the decoration symbol in the fate selection chance effect, It controls so that it does not win in the 2 large winning a prize mouth 2509.

[10. Processing related to payout of prize balls]
In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 180, even if the gaming ball is won in any of the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b, the number of winning balls according to the winning opening immediately Is not added to the player, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening is added to the count value of the number-of-brows counter. Then, when the big hit gaming state is executed, that is, when the big hit gaming state is executed triggered by the big hit related to the first special symbol or the big hit related to the second special symbol, and this big hit gaming state is ended. It is assumed that a predetermined payout condition is established, and the number of winning balls according to the count value of the winning ball counter is paid out to the player. That is, every time a jackpot associated with the first special symbol or a jackpot associated with the second special symbol is made, the player pays the player the number of balls according to the count value of the ball number counter at the end of the jackpot gaming state. I'm trying to put out.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, until the jackpot becomes the next jackpot, the number of prize balls according to the winning in any of the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b is awarded The player continues to add to the count value of the ball number counter, and pays the player the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter upon being a big hit. Therefore, after the big hit gaming state ends, the number of winning balls according to the count value of the winning ball number counter increases in proportion to the number of winning in the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b. The number of prize balls to be paid out with the chance of becoming a big hit will increase. In addition, when the game ball wins in the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b, the first special random number or the second special random number is not limited as long as the number of stored memories (number of holdings) does not exceed four. Since the variable display of the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed, the number of times of display of the variation of the special symbol is approximately in proportion to the number of winnings in the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b. For example, when the number of memories of the first special random number or the second special random number does not exceed four at any winning, the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587 b are winning In proportion to the number of times, the number of fluctuation display of special symbol increases). For this reason, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, when it becomes a big hit when the number of times of the variable display of the special symbol is increased, the number of winning balls as a winning ball number according to the count value of the winning ball number counter Is paid out, but after the end of the big hit gaming state, if it becomes a big hit at a time when the number of variation display of the special symbol is small, a small number of winning balls as the number of winning balls according to the count value of the winning balls counter. It will be paid out.

  Specifically, in the non-short time state such as the low probability short time state (normal state), the game ball does not win in the second start port 2587b, so the so-called left strike makes the first start hole Only winning of game balls to 2201 will occur, and only variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1185 is executed except when there is a holding ball of the second special symbol, the first special A big hit related to a pattern (non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, specific 1 4 R latent probability big hit, specific 2 4 R stupid big hit A, specific 3 4 R probability variation big hit, specific 4 12 R probability variation big hit A, specific 5 12 R Certainly, a big hit B) will occur. And, since the number of winning balls for the game ball to the first starting opening 2201 is three, until the big hit related to the first special symbol occurs, the number of times of variation display of the first special symbol The winning ball number multiplied by 3 "will be continuously added to the count value of the winning ball number counter. For example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is set to 3/1171 (approximately 1/390), and as a theoretical value up to the jackpot calculated from the jackpot probability, the end of the jackpot gaming state If the first display of the special symbol is a big hit in the 390th fluctuation, 3 × 390 = 1170 winning balls are counted in the winning ball counter, resulting in 1170 winning balls Will be paid out.

  On the other hand, in the short time state such as the high probability time short state (probability change state), the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301 to drive the door member 2589. Therefore, as long as so-called right strike, the second start Only winning of game balls to the mouth 2587b will occur, and only variation display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 1186 is executed except when there is a holding ball of the first special symbol, the second Big hit related to special design (non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4 R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4 R normal big hit D, specific 6 4 R stupid big hit B, specific 7 16 R probability variation big hit) It will occur. And, since the number of winning balls for the game ball to the second starting opening 2587b is one, until the big hit related to the second special symbol occurs, the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol " The winning ball number multiplied by 1 "will be continuously added to the count value of the winning ball number counter. For example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is set to 24/1171 (approximately 1/49), and the end of the jackpot gaming state is used as a theoretical value up to the jackpot calculated from the jackpot probability. If the second display of the special symbol is a big hit on the 49th change, only 1 × 49 = 49 prize balls are not counted in the prize ball counter, resulting in only 49 prize balls The number is not paid out.

  Conventionally, in the low probability non-short state (normal state), the number of times the variation display of the special symbol (mainly the first special symbol) from the end of the big hit gaming state is calculated from the big hit probability in the low probability non-short state Even if it exceeds the theoretical value (in this embodiment, about the 390th fluctuation in this embodiment), the player will be recognized as a platform against which the gaming machine does not hit if it does not become a big hit. Even if you are playing a game on such a so-called Hamari stand, you can not expect against the jackpot, and stop the game, or even if it is an empty platform, expect it against the jackpot I could not feel that I would like to play a game on that platform. Then, the so-called decline in the player's willingness to play against the mischief stand led to a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the end of the big hit gaming state, the number of winning balls according to the count value of the winning ball number counter increases as the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the next big hit increases. The number of prize balls to be paid out is triggered by the next big hit. For example, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the variation display count of the special symbol (mainly the first special symbol) is the theoretical value (about 390 fluctuation in this embodiment) until the jackpot is calculated from the jackpot probability. If it exceeds 800 and reaches the 800 fluctuation, the number of 3 × 800 = 2400 winning balls is counted in the winning ball counter. For this reason, even if a game is played on a so-called hamari stand, many prize balls are counted as the prize balls according to the count value of the prize balls counter, and it is triggered by having become a big hit Since the player can be expected with respect to the number of prize balls to be paid out, the player's willingness to obtain the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter can be increased, and the game can be continued. In addition, even if it is an empty platform, many prize balls are counted as prize balls according to the count value of the prize balls counter, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when it becomes a big hit The player's willingness to obtain the number of winning balls according to the count value of the winning ball number counter can be increased, and new games can be played on that platform. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine without reducing the so-called desire of the player to play the cheating game.

  On the other hand, in the high probability time reduction state (probability variation state), the big hit probability is increased more than the low probability state, and so-called right-handed than the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2201 in the non-time reduction state Since it is easy to win the game ball in the second starting opening 2587b, the next big hit is secured as long as the game is continued, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. However, in the high probability time reduction state, the theoretical display value of the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) after the end of the big hit gaming state becomes the big hit calculated from the big hit probability in the high probability time reduction state ( In this embodiment, even if it exceeds about 49 fluctuation eyes), if it does not become a big hit, it becomes doubtful whether it is a high probability state or not, and the player is annoyed until the next big hit. Had to keep playing while asking for In particular, when the high probability state is controlled to the high probability state as in the high probability state but the high probability non-time state is not controlled to the short state state, the player's ball is greatly reduced. Because it takes time for the player to be a big hit, the player can not play the game with time. For this reason, even if it exceeds the above-mentioned theoretical value, when it does not become a big hit, the sense of discomfort that the player causes frustration is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as in the low probability non-short state (normal state), even in the high probability short state (probability state) or high probability non-short state, after the big hit gaming state ends, until the next big hit The number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter increases as the number of times of variation display of the special symbol increases, and the number of prize balls to be paid out with the next big hit increases. . For example, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the variation display count of the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol), the theoretical value (about 49 fluctuation in this embodiment) until the jackpot is calculated from the jackpot probability When it exceeds significantly and reaches the 100th fluctuation, 1 × 100 = 100 winning balls are counted in the winning balls counter. For this reason, even when the jackpot does not become a big hit exceeding the above-mentioned theoretical value, many prize balls are counted as prize balls according to the count value of the prize balls counter, and it becomes a big hit. Since it can be expected with respect to the number of winning balls to be paid out triggered by the event, it is possible to continue the game while reducing the unpleasant feeling that the player is frustrated.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of memories (number of reservations) of the first special random number or the second special random number exceeds four, the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 2201 or the second starting opening 2587 b. The number of winning balls according to the winning is also added to the count value of the winning balls counter, but the number of memories of the first special random number or the second special random number exceeds four, and the special symbol ( If the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not performed, the winning ball number corresponding to the winning is immediately paid out without adding it to the count value of the winning ball number counter. May be In this case, in the low probability non-short state (normal state), in proportion to the number of game balls having won in the first start opening 2201, in the high probability time short state (probable change state) the game in the second start opening 287b In proportion to the number of balls won, the number of variable display of special symbols will increase. In the upper part of the pachinko machine 1, there is a data indicator (not shown) that can display the number of times the jackpot occurred on the day or the previous day, and the number of fluctuation display of special symbols since the end of the jackpot gaming state. It is provided, and the player can grasp the number of times of variation display of the special symbol after the end of the big hit gaming state by the player visually recognizing this data indicator. And, by the player grasping the fluctuation display count of the special symbol after the end of the big hit game state, it becomes possible to easily recognize the number of prize balls counted in the prize ball counter, and it becomes a big hit It is possible to determine whether or not to play a subsequent game while considering the number of winning balls according to the count value of the winning ball number counter to be paid out triggered by the event.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in response to the non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A or the specific 1 4 R latent probability big hit, it enters into the probability variation latent mode after the end of the long 4R big hit gaming state open Even if you start the control of the high probability non-short state after the end of the long open 4R big hit gaming state in response to becoming a specific 1 4R latent probability big hit, it is the high probability non-short state or low It makes it difficult to determine whether it is a probability non-short time condition, but since every opportunity to enter the probability variation latent mode is a big hit, it becomes a big hit according to the count value of the prize ball number counter The player pays out the number of winning balls to the player. However, as a trigger to enter into the probability variation latent mode, other than the big hit, for example, as with the general small hit (non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A or specific 1 4 R latent probability big hit, long time open 4R big hit gaming state Control to the small hit gaming state corresponding to the, but after the end of the small hit gaming state continues the previous gaming state to be a small hit (for example, triggered by the small hit during the control of low probability untimely state As the state of the low probability non-short-running state after the end of the small hitting gaming state)) may be included.

  In the above case, if the player is made to pay out the number of balls according to the count value of the number-of-charges counter upon the occurrence of a big hit, the probability variation may not occur. Even if the player enters the latent mode, the player is determined that there is no possibility of being controlled to the high probability non-short state. That is, in such a case, it is preferable not to pay out to the player the number of balls according to the count value of the number-of-balls counter even if a big hit becomes a trigger to enter into the probability variation latent mode. Whether it is difficult to determine whether the opportunity to enter the latent mode is a big hit or a small hit, and whether it is a high probability non-short state after the end of the long 4R big hit gaming state (or small hit gaming state) Alternatively, it is preferable to make it difficult to determine whether the state is a low probability non-time-short state.

  Also, in this embodiment, regardless of the number of times the display of variation of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) from the end of the big hit gaming state, it will be the next big hit the opportunity to be the winning ball number counter The player is given out the number of prize balls according to the count value. For example, the theoretical value up to the big hit calculated from the big hit probability in the low probability untimely state (in this embodiment, about 390 fluctuations If the eye size is not exceeded, the player may not pay out the winning balls according to the count value of the winning ball counter even if the player is a big hit. In such a case, the number of winning balls according to the count value of the winning ball number counter is paid out to the player if it does not exceed the theoretical value up to the big hit calculated from the big hit probability in the low probability untimely state. There is a possibility that a new player will play a game more favored by a player exceeding the theoretical value than a player not exceeding the theoretical value. That is, the player can actively play a game on a so-called cheating game, and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed. The number of times of display of the variation of the special symbol, which is the boundary of whether or not to pay the player the number of balls according to the count value of the number counter of balls, is not limited to the above theoretical value. The number of times below the theoretical value may be set. In addition, as the number of times of variation display of the special symbol which becomes the boundary of whether or not to pay out the prize sphere number according to the count value of the prize sphere number counter, for example, it is the low probability state or high probability state A different number of times may be set depending on the change in the state of the subject.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the winning ball number according to the count value of the winning ball number counter is always paid out to the player at the chance of becoming a big hit, for example, the big hitting becomes an opportunity A judging means is provided for judging whether or not to pay the player the number of winning balls according to the count value of the winning ball number counter, and when it is judged that the judgment result of the judging means is to pay, the number of winning balls The number of winning balls corresponding to the count value of the counter may be paid out to the player. Although a random number different from the big hit random number or the special symbol random number (first special symbol random number, second special symbol random number) may be used for the determination of this determination means, for example, other than the type of big hit in the symbol determination table By including information on whether or not to pay the player the number of balls according to the count value of the number ball counter, the special symbol random number is used to determine the count value of the number ball counter along with the type of the big hit. It is also preferable to determine whether or not to pay the player the number of balls according to the award.

  Further, in the determination of the determination means described above, for example, the number of winning balls according to the count value of the winning ball counter is increased as the number of times of display of the variation of the special symbol until the next big hit increases after the big hit gaming state ends. The determination may be made so that the probability of paying out to the player increases stepwise. For example, the variation display count of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) from the end of the jackpot gaming state is 1 to 200 in the 1st to 200 th changes, the determination is made with a probability of 1/4, and 201 to 400 changes In the eye, the determination is performed with a probability of 1/2, and after the 401st fluctuation, the determination may be performed with a probability of 3/4. In such a case, even if a game is being played on a so-called hamari stand, many winning balls are counted as winning balls according to the count value of the winning balls counter, and it became a big hit It is highly probable that the number of winning balls will be paid out at the same time, and the player's willingness to obtain the number of winning balls will increase, and the game will continue, since it can be expected for the winning of the number of winning balls. Can. In addition, even if it is an empty platform, many prize balls are counted as the prize balls according to the count value of the prize balls counter, and the prize balls are paid out when it becomes a big hit. The probability of being played is high, and the player can be expected to obtain the number of winning balls, and the player's willingness to obtain the number of winning balls is increased, and a new game can be played on that stage.

  Also, in this embodiment, whether the time saving state or the non-time saving state is controlled as a period for adding the number of winning balls according to the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b to the winning number counter. Regardless of the time frame. For example, if it is a big hit game state opened for a long time in the big hit game state, it is easy to win the game ball in the first big winning hole 2102 or the second big winning hole 2509 which is opened, Since the winning balls corresponding to the winnings on the first large winning opening 2102 or the second large winning opening 2509 are paid out in large amounts in a short time, the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening are immediately set. Even if the player does not pay out the prize balls according to 2587b, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that they will not be paid out. Also, in the time saving state, there is not a large amount of payout in a short time as in the big hit open state for a long time, but it is very possible to win the game ball in the second starting port 2587b by performing so-called right strike. Since it is easy and the number of times of variation display of the special symbol per unit time increases, the player can pay attention to the lottery result of the special symbol, and immediately the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b. Even if the player does not pay out the winning balls according to the above, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that they will not be paid out.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state is executed triggered by either the jackpot associated with the first special symbol or the jackpot associated with the second special symbol, and at the end of that time, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 The payout effect based on the payout effect in-progress flag is executed using, and the player is notified of the fact that the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter is to be paid out. In the present embodiment, in the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, a big hit game effect during execution of the big hit game state is a payout effect as a effect based on a big hit start command, a big hit round start command, etc. Is separately executed before the payout effect, but the jackpot game effect and the payout effect may be integrally executed. In this way, by executing an integrated effect of the big hit game effect and the payout effect, and executing the big hit game state during the execution, for example, in the case of executing the big hit game state of opening for a short time as the big hit game state. It becomes difficult to notice opening control of the opening / closing member 2104 of the above-mentioned attachment unit 2100 or the second opening / closing member 2572 of the above-mentioned second attachment unit 2570, and unlike the big hit gaming state of long-time opening It is possible to make it difficult to give the player a sense of loss that can not be done. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of winning balls according to the count value of the winning ball number counter is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111. According to this, as the number of winning balls according to the count value of the winning ball counter is displayed, the player has the right to obtain a large number of gaming balls at one time, and the player plays the game with expectation. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, when winning in the winning opening of either the first starting opening 2201 or the second starting opening 2587b, the number of winning balls according to the winning opening is added to the winning ball number counter. Although it is made to memorize, it is the same even if it counts and memorizes the number which won to each of the above-mentioned first starting opening 2201 or the above-mentioned second starting opening 2587b. In this case, the jackpot gaming state is executed triggered by either the jackpot associated with the first special symbol or the jackpot associated with the second special symbol, and at the end of that time, the number of winnings in each winning opening is Based on the number of winning balls, the number of winning balls may be paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, among the winning openings other than the first large winning opening 2102 and the second large winning opening 2509, the number of winning balls according to the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b is set. Although it is made to add to a prize ball number counter, the above-mentioned first starting opening 2201 or second starting is not intended for the starting openings of both the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b. Only one of the starting ports of the port 2587b may be targeted. For example, in the non-short time state such as the low probability short time state (normal state), since the winning of the game ball to the second start hole 2587b does not occur, only the first start hole 2201 is targeted, In the time reduction state such as high probability time reduction state (probability change state), since only winning of the game ball to the second start opening 2587b occurs as long as so-called right strike, only the second start opening 2587b is targeted It is also good. Further, among the winning openings excluding the first large winning opening 2102 and the second large winning opening 2509, not only the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b but also the general winning opening 2301 The number of winning balls may also be added to the winning ball counter. Also, instead of targeting all the winning balls according to the winning openings such as the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b, for example, according to one winning out of two winnings Even if only the number of winning balls is added to the number of winning balls counter, or only one winning ball number is paid out immediately and the remaining two are added to the winning balls number counter, etc. Good. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player the feeling of not being paid out even if the number of winning balls according to the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b is not immediately paid out to the player.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although what was applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine was shown, it is not limited to this, It applies to the pachislot machine, and the gaming machine formed by uniting a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same function and effect as described above can be exhibited.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 1100 Game area 1110A Front component 1150 Game panel 1158 Opening 1900 Liquid crystal display device 2000 Table unit 2100 Attacker unit 2101 General winning opening 2102 First big winning opening 2200 Start Mouth unit 2201 first starting opening 2300 front side unit 2301 general winning opening 2500 center role 2502 peripheral wall 2509 second large winning opening (inlet)
2509a Attacker passage (distribution passage)
2510 center base 2510 k branch passage 2510 l branch space 2510 m communication passage 2510 n second attachment space 2510 p induction part 2570 second attachment unit 2571 unit base 2571 e receiving part 2571 f induction part 2571 i lower right projecting part 2571 j stopper part 2572 second opening and closing member (opening and closing member )
2572a blade portion 2572b shaft portion 2580 second starting opening unit 2585a gate portion 2587b second starting opening

Claims (1)

A game panel in which a game area is formed on the front,
A passage opening through which game balls flowing down the game area can pass;
A variable receiving port provided on the downstream side of the passage port and having a switching member capable of changing between an open state capable of receiving gaming balls and an unacceptable closed state ;
A common view variation display means for performing variation display of a normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the passage opening;
Switching member control means for controlling the switching member in the open state based on the fact that a specific result is derived as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol;
A specific passage through which the game ball, which has passed through the passage opening, reaches the variable receiving opening;
And state control means for controlling to a specific gaming state in which a short variation time shorter than normal is set as the variation time of the normal symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
The specific passage is configured such that the flow-down direction of the game ball flowing down is changeable in the front-back direction, and has a change portion that changes the flow-down direction,
At least the if it is controlled to a specific game state, said by the passage of the passage port as the game balls became opportunity to control the switching member to the open state, it flows down with the change by the change unit Configured to be receivable in the variable receiving port;
The passage opening, the changing unit, and the variable receiving opening are all provided in the right gaming area of the playing area, and all the passage opening, the changing unit, and the variable receiving opening are A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured as one unit member so as to be integrally attached to a gaming panel .